ATreatiseonMillingandMillingMachines 10066323

A T R E A TI S E O N
M ILLING
MILLING MA CHINES
COP Y IGH
R T, 1 9 1 6 , BY
T HE C I N C I NN AT IMI LL I N G MA CH I NE
C OM P A NY
T H E LA
IN WHI C H
P NT
I I A I ILLE S MAD E
C N C NN T M R ARE
This illustration is made from a scale drawing and shows the

plant as it actually is today . The m a ch inesh o p building is 8 1 0
feet long ; co mbined length of all the buildings 13 00 feet . The
three story front is 3 80 feet wide The entire plant exclusive of
-
.
,
I
the power plant h as eight acres
, square feet ) of floor
space t is the largest plant in the world devoted exclusively to
G
.
the manufacture of Milling Machines and Milling Cutter rinders .
V isitors are cordially welcome to inspect this plant at all

times .
PRE FA CE
The past few years have seen an unusually rapid development

in the art of milling We have carried out some very exhaustive
.
experiments in cutter design cutter and work cooling and other

, ,
branches of the art which have led to marked improvements not

, ,
A
only in these particular branches but in the Milling Machine itself
, .
lthough some of the data pertaining to these de velopments

hav e already appeared in various publications we believe that their ,
compilation in complete form as found in this book will make

,
A
them of much more general use to those interested in and responsi ,
ble for efficient produ c tion from Milling Machines

, more c om .
p l e t e knowledge of the action of milling cutters , the effect that

action h as on produ c tion a familiarity with the different c o nstru c
,
tions and types of milling fixtures and holding devices the cause of ,
unsatisfactory Milling Ma c hine performance and the basi c prin

c ip l es of cutter sharpening are all necessary for the intelligent
,
application of the modern Milling Machine .
We have in this book given c onsiderable space to various phases

of these subj ects and to this end are presenting some matter never
,
before published .
The mathematical chapters dealing with the computations

involved in cutting spur bevel spiral and worm gears present
, , ,
these subj ects in a simple detailed manner which will we believe

, , , ,
make them clear and useful to those for whom the usual method
of presentation of this matter h as always been too much involved .
The arrangement of the various formulas and mathematical

tables will prove of convenience to all who have occasion to use them .
H
The formulas and diagrams in the chapters on gearing have
’
been adapted from Machinery s andbook and are printed by
S
permission of the publishers .
S
The mathematical chapters especially the chapters on hop
G
,
AL
Trigonometry Continued Fractions
, piral and B e v el ears are
, ,
based on material prepared by Mr D e L eeuw while Chief

E
. . .
,
ngineer of The Cincinnati Milling Machine Company .

4 THE C IN CINNA TI MILLING MAC HINE C O MPANY
CO NTENT S
C HAPT ER I
The Constru c tion and Us e of Milling Machines .
C HAP TER II
E rection C are and Adj ustment of Milling Machines
, .
C HA P T ER III
—
Toolroom Millers The D ividing H ead , etc
C HAP T ER I V
S etting up the Ma chine
C HAPT ER V
An Analysis of the Process of Milling .
C HA P T ER V I
Milling Ma chine Feeds
C HAP T ER V I I
Speeds of Milling Cutters .
C HA P T ER V III
Stream Lubrication Cutter and Work C ooling ystem
— -
S .
C HA P T ER I X
Milling Cutters N otes on
— D esign and E f i c iency of
th e f
Modern Cutters .
C HAPT ER X
A T EA ISE R T ON M ILLING A ND MILLING MACHINES 5
C HA PT ER X I
Re quired to do Milling
P ower
C HA P T ER X I I
Various Methods of Milling . 1 86
C HAP T ER X III
Milling J igs and Fixtures
‘
.
C HAPTER X I V
Sizing and Cutting of pur Gears
Th e S . 247
C HA PT ER XV
Shop Trigonometry Bevel Gears and their C alculation
—
I stru c tions for C utting
n .
C HAP T ER XVI
G
S piral ear Cutting— C alculations Formulas Tables etc
, , , . 29 1
C HA P T ER XV II
Worm Gearing — Calculations and Methods of Cutting .
C HA PT ER XV I I I
Application to Shop Prob
A I
Continued Fractions and their
lems — ngular ndexing '
C HAP T ER X I X
C hange Gears for Cutting Spirals 33 2
C HAP T ER XX
C ams Tables for S etting the Milling Ma chine for Milling
—
Spiral C ams
C HA PT ER XX I
Tables of N at al Trigonometric Functions
ur 3 85
THE CINCINNA TI MILLING MAC HINE C OMPANY
H i g h Po w e r
-
U ni v e r s a l C i n c i n n a t i Mi ll e r
S
F l ly v
Ma d e in S ix izes
( Pa t e n t R i gh t s u R es e r ed )
A T EA ISE R T ON M ILLING 7
HA P T E I C R
T HE C O N STR U CT I O N A N D U S E O F
M I LL I N G MA CH I NE S
Before entering into an analysis of the pro c ess of milling the ,
design of milling cutters j igs fixtures etc and the mathemati cs

, , ,
.
,
involved in the setting up of the machine for some c lasses of milling ,
it may be best to first examine into the construction of the machines

and atta chments available
I
.
C l a ss i fi c a t i o n o f M a c h i n e s n this book we will confine our

.
selves to the Column and Knee Type Milling Ma chines and the
smaller S izes of Manufa cturing Millers in most general use These .
comprise the types of ma chines with which everyone is more or less

familiar They are the machines that are used in the toolroom
p
.
,
in the j obbing sho for model work repair shops and for manu
, ,
f a ctur ing .
Universal M illing Ma chines s o called becaus e of the great range

,
of work that they will accommodate are arranged with a swiveling ,
table and regu larly equipped with a dividing head They can thus
,
.
be used in addition to a general line of milling for all sorts of indexing

, ,
and milling work between c enters such as spur and spiral gears
E
, ,
and also on angular work such as bevel and mitre gears , ach .
toolroom S hould c ontain one or more of these Universal Ma chines .
P lain M illing Machines are S imilar to the Universals differing ,
only in that the P lain Machines do not have a swiveling table and ,
that their equipment does not include index centers of any sort .
They are used both in the toolroom and for regular manuf acturing .
Vertical Milling Machines are S imilar to the P lain Milling

—
Ma c hines with this ex c eption that the spindle is in a v ertical
,
position and at right angles to the plane of the table They are
, .
parti cularly adapted for the use of fa c e and end mills in the manu
f actur ing department for the milling and boring of j igs in the
,
toolr oom and for the ma chining of dies

, .
Manufacturing M illers are particularly adapted for repetition

work produ c ed in large quantities They are generally speaking .
, ,
S impler in construction than the Knee Type Millers and are used in ,
A
large quantities in the manuf acture of firearms typewriters auto , ,
mobiles etc
, ll of these machines will be briefly des cribed in the
.
following pages
Se e g
.
Th e on o f a M i l l in Ma ch in e
l cti The sele ction of the .
type of Miller best adapted for the economi c al production of a gi ven

class of work can not be given too careful co ns ideration The quan .
tity and quality of work that the machine will produ c e must
j ustify the investment .
We have gone far towards helping our customers in the solution

of their milling problems and have thus gained a wider knowledge
ch h w
v a
w ch v
S pi
v y
l ly f d
l d ly c l d wh f d
Fi g l Th e n dl e D ri i n g G e rs ( th e ai n d ri es th e f e e d o nl )
u d hu dh
. .
vch l u u l y f d d v f c
h h S dl
d hf
T he a in s o n h as n o t i n g t o d o it the p in e D ri e I t i s so e a ee
ch
.
a i n a n d i s s p p ie on o n sp e ia o r er en ee s are t o be r ea i n t o san t s
p e r re o t io n N orm a
. t h e ee i s ri en ro m the o n s t a n t s p ee s a t da n d r ea s
I n in es p e r m in t e .
ofthe e c onomic field of milling than can be obtained from the limite d
experience of one shop on one class of work .
We are prepared to make complete time studies of all the milling

operations on any piece of work suggest methods fixtures et c , , ,
.
,
and fur nish the c omplete e quipment for doing it .
O ur wide experience in this work and the great variety of milling

ma chines made by us enable us to recommend and furnish that size
, ,
A T EA ISE MILLING MILLING MA HINES
R T ON A ND C 9
Style and typ e of ma c hine which will prove most economical in v iew
of all the c onditions attendant upon its ins tallation and use
I
.
t would hardly be appropriate to attempt to deal here with all

the c onsid erations upon which an intelligent sele c tion of a ma c hine
depends but mention of the most important factors wil l we belie v e
, , ,
pro v e helpful
H
.
Whether it should be a C one D riven or a igh P ower S ingle P ul

- -
ley type ma chine depends ou

The quantiti es in whi c h parts are made .
The kind of work to be milled .
P ower re quired .
Method of transmission used whether by line shaft group , ,
drive or indi v idual motor dri ve .
Whether it S hould be P lain Universal or Verti c al dep ends

,
ou
Whether it will be one of m any mach ines Or the only Milling

w
Machine in the department .
The amount of time it will be used for spiral cutting .
Wh ether it will be used for j obbing or manuf a cturing .
Whether for machining flat sur faces , die sinking or gang

work
A
.
Whether it S hould be an utomatic depends on the quan

tities in which the parts are made .
T he suggestions c ontained in the illus trations of machines in

operation will be helpful in the sele c tion of the proper ma chine .
gM S
S H
Pl ain M i l l i n ach in
e s These are made in both the ingle
G p
.
P ulley eared pindle igh P ower type and the C one D riven ty e
- -
.
The rapid development of the use of Milling Machines is constantly

extending their field into heavier work demanding more ower at ,
p
the cutter and therefore in c reased strength and rigi dity in the
,
I
machines Th is development h as led to the design of the single
.
pulley c onstant speed belt machines n their design the spindle .
power is not handi ca pped by the limitations of a driving cone and ,
for all practical purposes it may be assumed that the constant speed
belt dri ve delivers the same power to the c utter at all spindle speeds ,
so that the operator knows jus t what can be expe c ted from the
ma chin e under all c onditions .
10 THE CIN CINNA TI M ILLING MACHINE C O MPANY
A
These machines lend themsel ves readily to direct connected
motor driving They may be driven direct from the line S haft
. .
countershaft is not necessary The main driving pulley is j o ur n al e d

.
on a bracket bolted to the column of the machine and is connected

to the driving shaft by means of a disk friction clutch of large
proportions The machine is started and stopped through this
.
A
clutch by means of a lever at the front of the machine The spindle .
drive gearing is arranged as Shown in Fig 1 ll the gears are . .
steel and hardened Those most used for speed changing are chrome
.
nickel steel heat treated and hardened making an extremely

, ,
A
durable drive There are sixteen speeds provided The small gear
. .
“
in the illustration is never used for transmission but serves as a
”
pilot when engaging the large gears .
lf
l S pi lh v ck l l h
d Fc a ly y d l
Fig . 2 . The Com p e te nd e D ri e
d
w
G e a r s I J , K a n d L a r e s t ee o rg i n g s Al l o t e r s a r e n i e s t ee , e a t t re a t e ,
,
h d d
.
a n d a l l t h e g e ars a r e ar e n e a e ge r L is t h e o n g ea r k e e t o t h e s p i n e
h c h d
. .
No g ea r s a r e i n m e s ex e p t t o se oing ork .
I
Fig 2 S hows the driving gears of a hori z ontal machine in section
. .
n order to reduce torsional strains and consequent vibrations to
L
a minimum there are no gears keyed directly to S hafts with the
,
S ingl e exception of the main gear “

which is keyed to the front ,
A
end of the spindle close to the bearings .
nother feature which gives these machines the strength and

A T EA ISE R T ON MILLING AN D M ILLING MA CHINES 11
S h w d v h a f u bl
l v
ch w h l d v f d f
fd l dv f
Fig 3 I n s id e of S pi n d e D ri e Bo x
d hf
. .
ing ri i ng s t, t m er and ai n ee f o r r i in g ee ro m co n
dl
o
ta n t t The may a be ri en ro m t h e s p i n e a s s h o w n un
i ig
S p ee s a . ee so
. 1 .
rigidity which modern practice demands is the automatically
N
clamped tumbler Fig 3 and Fig 4 The tumbler frame is supported
,
. . .
from the machine frame one of its weight c omes on the main .
driving shaft T he swinging frame carrying the tumbler gear

.
“
rocks on the trunnions C and is operated by means of the pilot
W
S
heel on the outside of the ma c hine through
“ ”
the spiral gears By means of this same .
pilo t wheel the entire tumbler frame can be

adj usted laterally When the pilot wheel is .
turned to the right the gears are brought into

“
mesh and the lug D of the swinging tumbler ”
frame abuts on the stop pins

governing the proper meshing
W
.
N OW if the pilot heel is turned

farther to the right the swing ,
ing frame the tumbler frame

,
and the spiral gears act as a

system of levers and screw
whi c h lock the tumbler frame
g h T m bl u
ly v l
Fi g 4 S ti th
uv
ec on ro u er
securely to Its S hde 0 11 the Th f m C C C i t l c ti g f l g d im
. .
en
ly l
e ra e s a s ee as n o ar e
t d d t i b
maCh l ne frame and hold the i t h d i b
uw
i p p ti th i g s o ns, s or e en re on e o e a ea r n
d th p ti f p d ch gi g n e r e ox , a n e o era on o S ee an n
t m tic c m p it t t hi b ch
support for the tumbler gear as k i g p it i
i g i a o
or
a
n
a
os
a
on.
s o s ea r n n ea
12 THE CIN CINNA TI MILLING MAC HINE C OMPANY
firmly as if it were permanently bolted in place By turning the .
pilot wheel to the left as far as it will go the tumbler gears are ,
brought out of engagement .
All ch a n g es a re
Fi g
m
. u
ad h u h
5 .
e
O
t ro
ts i d e
g
of
the l w l
Sp d C h
ee
pi toh ee
ange
a nd
Bo x
t wo l e v ers s h o w n.
The speeds are very easily and quickly changed by means of

the pilot wheel above mentioned and the two levers S hown in Fig 5 . .
The lever positions for each speed are clearly marked For example .
to obtain 1 1 5 r p m the index . . .

,
plate S hows corresponding to
I
this number the symbols 3 BC -
.
t is therefore merely nec es

“ ”
sary to move one lever to B ,
N
“ ”
the other to C and move the ,
tumbler to the o 3 position . .
By pressing lightly on the

treadle while moving these ,
levers the gears are given a ,
sufficient amount of motion to

fa c ilitate easy speed changing .
v h C h gi g Sp d w wl The position of the op erator

y
l l wl y u
P i ti f Op
yw l
Fi g 6
. . os on o t e ra o r en an n ee s
H me toh les e f i t i l
e v e r as g d t h
a r asb when c h a n g l n g speeds
o an 1 s sho wnen
tl i g th t d th g t rn
gen
an d
p r ess n
i l g i t p it i
o
on
n o os
e
on
r ea
.
e
In F l g
e
6 The feed IS driven
ears s o
. .
A T EA ISE R T ON MILLING A ND M ILLING MACHINES 13
from the c onstant speed

shaft and t h e feed plate
read s i n inches er p
minute unle ss otherwise
,
specified at the time the

machine is ordered .
T he outside of th e
feed b ox is shown in Fig .
7 The feed index and

.
feed c hange le vers ar e
f ro
T is
m
h
c
re
o ns t a
Fi g
m a ins t h e
n t sp ee d h
.
sa
s
7
a
.
f
m e fo r
t
Th e
.
F d
f d di
ee
ee
s
Bo x
r v f en ro m s p i n d l e or
the same as for the dri ve
box but feed changing
,
is done best while the

machine is running .
The inside of the feed

box is shown in Fig 8 . .
A
Th e C o l u m n K n e e , ,
S a d d l e a n d Ta bl e .
powerful spindle drive

mus t be supplemented by
I
correspondingly strong
main frame memb ers n .
F v
our designs we ha v e made
use of the box section
principle T he illustra.
Fi g 3 I t i
h i i t h c m p t m ch
fg g
f
i m f p
dB
i d i g t h 1 6 ch g
0
'
ee
s e o l. .
e e
n e r or o
e an s or
ee
ro
ox
n e an es
tions S how that the C ol

umn is a re ctangula r box with openings only large enough for insert
ing the main d rive gearing and the feed gearing
I
.
T he base d eserves especial attention t must have sufficient .
strength to rigidly support the machin e and its work and to with
p
,
A
stand the wedgi ng action of the cutter as discussed on age 93 .
A
ny tendency to spring in the manner of a diaphragm s eriously
affects the alignments as well as the rigidity of the machine S a .
result of careful experiments w e have changed th e design of our ,
milling machine bases gi vi ng them about s ix times th e strength ,
that had formerly been considered ade quate .
The Knee Fig 9 must c arry the entire weight of the work and
, .
,
i ts fixture and in addition to this must resist th e twisting strains

resulting both from taking the c ut and from the varying twisting
moments set up through the changing position of the table with
its work in relation to the knee
,
.
14 THE CIN CINNATI MILLING MAC HINE C OMPANY
H i g h - P o w e r Pl a i n C i n c i n n a t i Mi ll e r
Ma d e in S ix S izes
( Pa t e n t R i g h t s F ll
u y R es er v ed )
A T EA ISE R T ON MILLING AN D MILLING MA CHINES 15
I t has been general practice to provide the knee with c lamping

le vers for lo cking it to th e c olumn when taking a cut , but we ha v e
found this rapidly distorts the knee redu c es the bearing to a small ,
area under the c lamping s crews and ultimately it becomes impossible ,
to s o clamp the kne e that it will not ro c k on the c olumn To avoid .
this diffi c ulty we have eliminated knee clamps entirely have in ,
creased very c onsiderably the metal in the knee where it engages

the c olumn and pro v ided a long taper gib Fig 1 1 adj usted len g th
, , .
,
h h
T is
le g t h m t l
n
s
e a
o w s t h e k n ee
to m eta
»
lb
N o t e t h e ea
.
Fi g
h
.
vy 9
t a p ere
ea ri n g a t a l l t i m e s .
d g ib , wh ch v d full
i p ro i es a
wise whi c h affords at all times a full bearing on the column This
,
.
gib when a dj uSt e d so as to give a ni c e S liding fit between these t wo

,
H
members provides a degree of rigidity that enables new pattern
,
Cin c innati igh P ower Millers to do heavier c utting than was

W
-
pre viously possible and also to do a c curate work ithin c loser

limits .
i
For example a N o 5 Machine ( which h as a standard 20 h p

,
. . .
motor rating ) had been for some nine months in operation in our
fa ctory on a variety of work taking cuts which sometimes re quired ,
4 0 h p when it was called upon to mill some long b ars

. .
, Thes e are .
shown in the illustration Fig 1 2 They are 4 2 long 4 wide , . .

,
”
,
and thick Two of them were milled with a spiral mill mounte d
.
A
on an arbor in the usual way t wo with a S hell end mill using a Ver , ,
ti c al tta chment and t wo wi th the same mill in the spindle of the

,
16 T HE C IN CINNATI MILLING MA CHINE C O MPANY
18 THE C IN CINNATI MILLING MAC HINE C OMPANY
Fi g . 13 . Th e S dda l e, Le a dS c re w a nd uc
Q i k R e tu r n
ping either feed or speed This makes it quite pra cti c al to mill
.
such a pie c e of work without leaving an off s et where the cut ends
A
- .
P ow er Q u i c k Tr a ve r s e a n d R e t u r n ll of the larger P lain .
A I
and Verti c al Machines are re g ularly equipped with our P ower
Quick Traverse and R
eturn rrangement Fig 1 5 t is driven ,
. .
c u l f df
C o n t r o o f e e s ro m
tt e r i n e n g a g e m e n t W i t
b hi d t h t bl
h th
e
k h
e w w
n
Fi g
or
e
. 14
a
en
e , e na
d om g
l
bi ng the o p e ra to r
e n d m ill i n g , b
to s ee
or i n g , e tc
h is
.
dire c t from the main pulley independent of the feed mechanism and
provides a mo vement forward or back at 1 0 0 per minute The con "
.
trolling lever indicates the direction and when the lever is released ,
the table stops The feed and power quick traverse can not
.
both be engaged at the same time There are limit stops whi c h .
A T EA ISE
R T ON MILLING A ND MILLING MA CHINES 19
prevent going beyond limits of the table travel . All thes e

things make for safety .
Being driven from the

main pulley which ,
does not stop when the

machine is S hut down ,
this power quick trav

erse is available for
making quick table a d
j ustments when setting
up the machine pre
paratory to milling a
piece of work This ar .
rangement can be fur

n ish e d on our smaller
high power-
achines m
as an extra attach
ment .
Fi g . 15 . The Po w uc v
er Q i k Tr a e rs e a n d Re t u rn
D i r e c t - C o n n e c t e d M o t o r D r i ve We have developed a S im .
ple and highly effi c ient arrange

ment which is shown in Fig 16 . .
The motor is mounted on a swing

ing base hinged to the base of the
machine S O that part of the weight
of the motor is supported by
the belt keeping it at all ,
times at the proper tension

and doing away with
the need for any atten
A
tion on the part O f the
operator n endless .
leather belt and a

metal belt guard are
included in the equip
ment This arrange .
ment is suitable for

any make or style of
l
constant speed motor
F i g 16
ud v
Th C t t Sp d B t d M t D i g m
ru nn l n g n O t faster
v vt h a n
u
v lu
. . e o ns a n ee A e t e o or r e r ra n e en
S i t bl f c t t p d m t h i g m i m m
a e or o ns a n s ee 12 00 I p m
o o rs a n a ax
'
. . .
s pe e not o er re o t io n s .
20 THE CIN CINNA TI MILLING MACHINE C O MPANY
H i gh Po w e r Ve r t i ca l C i n ci n n a t i
-
Mi ll er
Ma d e i n T h r e e S i z es
( P a t e n t R i gh t s F lly R
u es er ve d )
A T EA ISER T ON MILLING AN D MILLING MA C HINES 21
Another style of Motor D rive Arrangement is shown in Fig 17

I n this case the motor is mounted on a fixed extension fastened to the
.
base of the machine

and the drive is
throu gh re ducing
gears a nd a s ilent
chain to the main
pulley of the ma
chine This arrange
.
ment is suitable for

motors of any speed
up to 1 2 0 0 r p m . . .
The reducing gears

p
,
s ro ckets chain , ,
chain guard and base

are all included in
the e quipment
a vc a w
.
V e r t i c a l Mi l l e r s .
a a
Fi g . 17
lac d w h
. The C h in Mo to r
d
D ri e Ar r ng e me nt
H
T hese machines are c ch Sp
T he m o tor is p
e o f the m
e
i ne
ere it o es not in re a s e the o rki n g floor
S imilar to the igh
Here again we have aimed to make a machine

P ower P lain Millers in all particulars except that the spind l e is ,
in a vertical position .
F ig
T
. 18
h
.
e se
Th e
g ea rs
S pi dl
a re
n
m ad
e and S pi
e o f s te e
ll h v d
nd e
and
D ri i n g G e a rs
ar en e d .
22 THE C IN CINNA TI MILLING MA CHINE C O MPANY
that will have the same degree of strength in all i ts important parts ,
bearing in mind that the pressure against the cutter which must be
resisted by the members carrying th e S pindle is the same as the
pressure against the pi ece of work on the table
”
The c onstruction of the spi ndle head and its driving gearing is
shown in Fig 18 . . A
ll the driving gears including the mitre gears ,
shown are steel and hardened

, These latter have self contained
.
-
bearings The one through which the spindle passes has a long hub
.
bearing which takes the entire thrust of the gears thus relieving ,
the spindle from these strains The spindle is as long as the S pindle
.
in the corresponding horizontal machines Its bearings are both .
c arried in the head frame and are always a maximum distance apart .
Vertical adj ustment of the spindle iS o bta ined by moving the '
entire head frame carrying the spindle This frame h as long bear .
ings provided with an adj ustable taper gib and when the ma c hine ,
is in c onstant operation on hea vy repetition work this frame may ,
be se c urely clamped to the body of the machine c onverting it ,
temporarily into a fixed head machine .
The head adj ustments are qui c kly made by means of a pilot
wheel the head itself being counter balanced
, There is also a -
.
S low movement provided through worm and wormwh eel when

desired .
Fi g . 19 . P la i n In d ex Head
A T EA ISE
M i ll i n g Ma c h i n e A t t a ch m e n t s
A y
The range of work that a Milling Machine c an do is greatly
in c reased by the us e of attachments n almost endless variet of .
a u ch m
I
Fi g . 20 . Ge r- C tt i n g A t t a e nt
attachments h as been devised for spe c ial requirements t is some .
what difficult to determine where to draw the line between what

are essentially attachments for the machine and those other devic es
which should be properly classed as fixtures .
I
We always carry in stock a full variety of standard atta c h
ments suitable for the various sizes of machines n their design .
we have again followed the principle that ea c h part of the ma chine

should be equal in c apa
city to all other parts
I
.
H
The Universal ndexing
and D ividing ead whi c h ,
forms part of the e quip

ment of Uni versal Ma
chines and whi c h can also
be us ed on Pl a in Ma ch ineS
'
for work done between

centers as well as for an
gular work such as be vel ,
gears mitre gears et c is

p
.
, , ,
des cribed in another lace .
Th e I IH H
C o m bi n a t i o n n d ex e a d s Fo r a general line of index.
I
ing work the Combination ndex
, eads will be found extremely
c onvenient These can be furnished as P lain ndex Centers Fig 1 9
.
, .
,
i ndexing through a plate at the rear by means of an index lever

mounted dire ctly on the spindle To this c an be added the bracket
.
24 THE CINC INNATI MILLING MA CHINE C O MPANY
H
c arrying a side index plate which makes the same divisions as our
,
A
Uni versal D i viding eads for universal indexing through worm
G
,
and wormwh eel This makes our ear C utting ttachment Fig 2 0
.
-
, .
,
and the use of this can be still further extended to include spiral
S H
milling by adding a shaft and gears for c onnecting it with the lead
s crew . I
n this form it is the piral Milling ead These heads are .
made in both 1 2 and 1 6 sizes and are recommended for us e not

"
only on Milling Machines ,
but on other ma chines that

are called upon to do work
A
between centers .
nother form of indexing

centers for small light work
is S hown in Fig 2 1 These . .
centers swing work 10 in
F i g 22. Hig h N m b
. u
I d i g A tt ch m
ert
a
n
S ide index plate
ex n a
diameter and index through
hich en
W
I H
operates through a worm and wo rm wh eel in a manner S imilar to
G
A S H
that employed on our Universal ndexing and D i viding ead ear ,
Cutting ttachment and Our piral Milling ead The worm and
, .
wheel can readily be disengaged and the indexing may then be done
dire c t by revolving the spindle by means of the handle attached to
the disk at the rear of the head which disk also serves as an index ,
plate and indexes any number di viding evenly into 24 The

,
.
divisions for 3 4 6 8 and 1 2 spaces are plainly marked

Hg I
.
, , ,
A A
i h Nu m ber
ex nd
ing t t a ch m e n t ll .
our index heads using the

S ide index plate make an
unusually large number of
divisions as shown in the
,
table in t h e chapter on
Universal Toolroom M i l
lers Thes e divisions in
.
cl ude all numbers odd and ,
even up to 60 even num ,
bers and those divisible by

5 up to 1 2 0 and many us e
,
F i g 23 Th D i i g M ch i m e r v n e a n s
H
. .
ful divisions beyond these .
owe ver it often happens that additional divisions are re quired for
p ,
s ecial work in the toolroom or for model making and experimental ,

26 THE CIN CINNA TI MILLING MA C HINE C O MPANY
heavy raising blocks for supporting the D ividing ead or work H ,
carrying member and a special arbor support which is attached to

,
A
the Knee as shown in Fig 2 4 instead of through the overarm as is .
, ,
H A
regular practice standard arbor and either a Universal D ividing
G
.
ead or a ear Cutting ttachment can be used The work is sup

-
.
ported immediately above the cut by an adj ustable stud in the

raising block under the tailstock ,
which takes the strain due to the

thrust of t h e cutter and thus rel iev ,
ing the centers from any strain from

this source
Hg S gA
.
S
Mil l in t t a ch i h - p eed
m en t ometimes work requires .
the us e of very small end milling or

profiling cutters which S hould run at
very much faster speeds than the
highest speeds provided on standard
Fi g 24 A H i g h S p
.
- d A tt ch m t milling
- ee
machines a For en
such work
H S A
.
I
the igh peed ttachment S hown -
,
in Fig 2 4 A comes in very handy

.
-
, t is a geared attachment driven .
I
from the main spindle and is supported by the front box to which
it is clamped t is made in sizes suitable for use on N os 1 and 2
. .
C one D riven M achines

-
.
S gA
gA
pira l Mil l in t t a ch m en t
I t is often desired to mill

a n d U n i ve r s a l M i l l i n t tach
m en t .
S hort lead spirals which have an "
angle that is greater than that to

which the table of the Universal
Machine can be swiveled This can .
be eas ily and satisfactorily a cco m

p l ish e d by adding to the equip
S A
ment of the Universal Machine ,
a piral Milling ttachment Fig ,

.
A
2 5 or where the work is light
l l a
, ,
er a Universal Milling ttach

T h S pi Mi i g A t t ch m t
,
F i g 25 . . e ra n en
ment Fig 2 6 These attachments

, . .
will both cut spirals of any angle up to and can be used on the
H
S H
P lain Milling Machine in conjunction with a D ividing ead or
piral ead and D riving Mechanism for this class of work
,
.
A T EA ISE
R T ON MILLING A ND M ILLING MAC HINES 27
Fi g 26 U ni v al l
e rs Mi i n g A tt ach m e nt
A
. .
U n i v e r s a l t t a c h m e n t Fig 2 6 c an a l So be used as a
A
Th e , .
,
S A
Vertical ttachment When it is desired to mill S pirals on P lain
.
Ma chines the piral Milling ttachment is recommended

, .
Fig 27 Styl e H Ve r ti c al A t ta ch m e nt
A
. .
Verti cal ttach m

en t s There are many o c casions when
.
A
horizontal machines both P lain and Uni versal are called upon to
, ,
do the work that could be best done on a Verti c al Machine t .
the same time there may not be enough of this to j ustify the ins tal
28 THE CIN CINNATI MILLING MAC HI NE C OMPANY
lation of a Vertical Miller For all such work horizontal machines .
A
c an be c onverted into very effic ient Verti c al Machines by the
addition of a Vertical ttach
m ent .
These are made in two sizes

—the heavy atta c hment as shown
in Fig 27 and the light attach .
,
ment especially adapted for light ,
profiling on the small machines ,
as shown in Fig 2 8
A A
. .
Ra ck t ta ch m en t s gen .
eral line of ra c k cutting can be
A
done on a milling ma chine by
using a ack tta c hment as R ,
shown in Fig 2 9 and the useful .

,
ness of this attachment is further

yl l R
I A
in c reased by the use of the ack
F i g 28 S t A V ti c A tt ch m t
e er a a en
ndexing ttachment Fig 3 0
. .
. .
,
This attachment includes diff erent combinations of gears which

enable ra c ks to be indexed by making either a half or complete turn
of the index plate and will index all diametral it ches fro m4 to 1 6
, p
in clusive and all even diametral pitches from 1 8 to 3 2 inclus ive ;
,
standard c ircular pitches from yg to varying by S ixteenths also ,

1 2 1
such odd pitches as 2
gA
/5 /7 /3
”
/5
r/ r/ 11 ”
°
y : :
S l o t tin t t a c h m en t .
Toolroom work pattern ,
making and similar work

,
re quires the us e of a S lot

ter but it is rarely that
,
there is enough of this sort

of work to j ustify the i n
s t all a t i o n of such a ma
chine It can be very well

.
S
done on a Miller by the
addition of a lotting A t
t a ch me nt as shown in Fig
3 1 which h as been espec
,
,
F i g 29 R c k Mi i g A tt c h m
.
t . . a l a n en
I
i all y designed for meeting the requirements of tool and diemakers .
t can be set at an angle on either S ide of the vertical position with
I
out disturbing the length Of stroke The toolholder is of clapper .
box c onstru c tion relieving the tool on the up stroke

,
t may be -
.
A T EA ISE
R T ON MILLING AND MILLING MAC HINES 29
swi veled through a c omplete c ir c le and a graduated dial is pro

vi de d for setting it at any desired angle .
c
R a k I n d e xi n g A t tac h m e n t
gA
C i r c u l a r Mi l l i n t tach m en t This is shown in Fig 3 2 t I
I
. . .
is appli c abl e to P lain Uni v ersal and Verti c al Mach ines

, t greatly .
Fi g 3 1 S l o tti n g A tta ch m e nt
I
. .
in c re as es the us efulness of any ma ch i ne t is dri ven from th e .
feed box and is pro vided wi th an automati c throw out Operated by -

30 THE CINC INNA TI MILLING MAC HINE C O MPANY
adj ustable dogs The direction of rotation may be reversed which

.
,
adapts it thoroughly for internal and external milling .
The driving worm may be thrown out of mesh at any time when
milling short sections of the cir cumference of work and the attach ,
Fi g . 32 . T h e Cir c ua l
l r Mi i n g A tta ch m e nt
ment revolved by hand to bring the next surface to the c utter .
The circumference of the attachment is graduated in degre es .
Fi g 3 3 . Th e C a m Mi l i n g A tta ch m e nt
gA A
.
Ca m Mil l in t t ach m en t n attachment especially designed

.
for milling face c ams up to 16 in diameter and cylindrical cams up

”
to 8 in diameter is S hown in Fig 3 3 The change from face to

”
. .
cylindrical cam milling is readily made by setting the wormwh ee l

A T EA ISE
R T ON MILLING AN D MILLING MAC HINES 31
Fi g 34 O il P u m p f o r C o n e -D r i v
en Ma ch i ne s
I
. .
spindle at right angles to the milling machine spin dle t can be .
provided a countershaft for power feeds when desired .
446 .
Fi g . 35 . O il P u m p fo r Hig h - Po w ach
er M ines
I
O il Pu m p s We can furnish oil pump equipments for either
H
.
Cone D riven or igh P ower Millers

-
n both cases the oil reservoir
-
.
is formed in the base of the machine and the pump is attached to

the outside O f the column making a very neat and compact arrange
,
32 T HE C INC INNA TI MILLING MACHINE C O MPANY
ment The oil is returned to the reservoir through a flexible tube

.
connected with the end of the table These are S ho wn in Figs . .
3 4 and 3 5 .
Our pump and equipment for flooded lubrication is fully described

in the chapter on stream lubrication .
Fig . 36 . S wv l
i e Vi s e Fi g . 37 . P l ai n Vi s e
Vi s e s . Since the work required of toolroom machines is con

st an tl ychanging s pecial fixtures are seldom used The work is .
S
usually held in the vise furnished with the machine Our standard .
design of wivel V ise for Universal Millers is S hown in Fig 3 6 These . .
vises are made in four si z es with j aws from wide to wide .
They are provided with a graduated swivel base .
They are also fur nished as P lain Vises by omitting the swivel
A
base and are S hown in this form in Fig 37
,
.
nother standard type is the Toolmaker s Universal V ise Fig ’

, .
I
38 .This is intended for toolroom work requiring angular settings , ,
not obtainable with the other styles of vises ts j aws are 6 wide .
”
,
3
1 3 deep and open 3 Vz
”
When in a hori z onta l position the top
”
of the j aws are 8 53 above the table ”

.
Fi g 38
. . l
T oo m a k e r s
’
Vi s e
34 THE CIN CINNA TI M ILLING MACHINE C O MPANY
Th e 1 8 i n c h A u t om a t i c C i n c i n n a t i
-
M i ll e r
Wi t h I nt e r m i t t e n t Fe e d , A
u t om a tic S p i n d l e So
t p an d P o we r
Qu i ck R e t u rn
( P t n t R i gh t F u l l y R
a e s es e r vd
e )
A T EA ISE R T ON M ILLING A ND MILLING MA CHINES 35
A u t o m a t i c M i ll i n g M a c h i n e s
Whenever duplicate parts are manuf actured in large quantities
as in the construction of firearms typewriters adding machines , , ,
etc the work of the milling machine is reduced to absolute routine

.
, ,
S
and it h as been the practice to employ a S imple S ingle purpose
machine for the work ince one operator must serve a number of
.
these machines it is clear ,
that the more automatic

the machines the simpler ,
the functions of the oper

ator and conse quently , ,
the greater the number of

machines that he can con
v e n ie nt l y take care of .
A
With this in mind the ,
Cincinnati utomati c Mil

ling M achines were de
S Ig n e d
'
a l v a a
.
w
Sh i g m l pi d d i g g m
The machines are of
F ig . 41
A
o n nor t S n e r e e r arr n e en
rigid and powerful CO H
.
struction ll unnecessary slides have been eliminated There is

. .
no saddle The table rests directly on the bed When the machine
. .
A
is set up for operation the only movable parts are the rotating ,
Spindle and the S liding table stream lubrication system as de .

,
scribed in the chapter on

that subj ect forms part ,
of the equipment of each

machine
A Sp
.
So
Th e u t o m a t ic in
dle These machines
t p .
are s o arranged that at the

termination of the table
feed a dog will automatic
ally throw O ut the spindle
clutch and apply the brake
while the table is auto
Fdl d v a v
f c l al u l ch
.
42
ma t l c al l y re ve r s In g
u
g
th at
l .
’
A r ra n g e m e n t o f s p i n e ri e ge rs fo r re e r se s p ee d s
the table returns w h l l e the as se d fo r a e m i ing a n d so on D p ex Ma i ne .
cutter is stationary This adds greatly to the safety of the O perator

.
and also improves the q uality of the finished work Th e automati c .

36 THE CIN C INNA TI MILLING MACHINE C O MPANY
spindle stop can be eas 11y disengaged when the nature of the work
does not require the use of this feature .
R i T OR N
Th e
p e e d s choice of S
one . A
a
Q U \C K
R EVE R S E
FO R
.
WAR D
of 2 4 spindle speeds IS o ff ered ,
5 10 ? and the gears which furnish this

one speed when reversed will , ,
also give an additional speed in

that same series The three .
series O f speeds and the gear a r
A
rangements are S hown in Table
with reference to Fig 4 1
E XA If the
. .
,
FO R MPLE . ma
chine is geared for 62 r evo l u
tions reversing the gears will
,
give 2 1 2 revolutions ; or if geared ,
for 103 revolutions reversing the ,
gears will give 127 revolutions ,
and s o on The change gears are .
the same for each series For ex .
ample gears that will give 3 1

,
revolutions in the low series will

give 4 9 revolutions in the stand
ard series and 1 1 0 revolutions in
the high series But extra b ack .
gears are required for each a d

d it io n al series The arrange .
ment of the spindle drive gearing

is shown in Fig 4 1 and the ar .
,
rangement of this same gearing

for r everse speeds is shown in
Fig 42 . .
Fe e d The feed move

Th e .
ments of the machine are O pera

ted in the cycles shown in Fig .
w y l ab l d v 43 The fundamental cycles are

b a bl
F ig . 43 .
D i ag r a m h in g som e c c
es o f t e mo em ent
ch
s o
o t i na e Forward quick to the
w 1 t h t h e I n ter m it t e n t Fe e i n g Me 1 .
i m
an s
work feed across the work auto
.
, ,
m a t i c a l l y stop spindle automatically reverse and return to starting

,
point with spindle stationary .

A T EA ISE R T ON MILLING AND M ILLING MA C HINES 37
2 .Forward quick to the work feed across the work quick , ,
forward to clear and automatically stop both feed and spindle .
Then when the work h a s b een removed the table may be returned
, ,
I
quickly to the starting point by shifting the lever on the feed box .
I
n both of the above cases the stopping of the spindle is auto
m a t ic a l l y accomplished by tripping and applying a brake n all .
cases after the work is chucked the main starting lever starts
, ,
both feed and speed S imultaneously Under no conditions can the .
f eed be engaged with the spindle stationary

I
.
3 . f it is desired to chuck a string of pie c es on the table dogs ,
can be provided to produce an intermittent forward movement ,
by which the space between pieces is automatically traversed at

the rapid rate of 1 00 per minute This can be repeated for as ”
.
A
many pieces as there are on table .
A
number of variations of the above fundamental cycles may
be obtained by the use of additional dogs full representation .
of the most useful cycles is given in the accompanying diagram ,
Fig 4 3 . .
We offer a c hoice of one of the 1 2 feeds provided These are in .
I
two series as shown in table B Feeds are given in inches per minute . .
I
t will be seen that should a feed of be selected then by ,
reversing these feed gears feed will be obtained n the ,

.
same way reversing gears for , feed will give a feed of

and so on The feed gears are the same for both series But to
. .
use both series an extra pair of feed back gears is needed .
T A BL E A — S PEED S A N D G EA R S
a l l
BACK G EARtS AN D S PFo]} DS f
C HANG E G EARS
au a a a
Lo w S E R I E S STA N DA R D S ER I ES
( Two S pee
o ne
re vers
Pa “
mg
O
on
d bt d w th
f Ch
s o
G
St d D
b
ng e
d C) s
i ne
e rs
an
i
V u d
S pin e F 59T
St d D I nner Ge r 1 8T
S PE E DS
St ud Spind F 5 2T
e
D I nner G e r 2 5 T
S PE E DS
T A BL E B — F EED S A N D G EA R S
a a afd
C HANGE G EARS BACK GEARS AND FEEDS
v u f
f d b
( Two ee s o taine wit
h
o ne p ir of C
r e ers ing h
on
d
ng e G ear s bv
S a t A a nd
h L O W S E R I ES
Sh t A Inner Gear 5 9T
Stu B Inner Gear 1 9 T
fud
h
H I GH SE R I E S
S a t A Inn er Gear 3 1T
St B Inner G ea r 4 7T
a nd S td B) FE E DS FE E DS
38 THE C IN C INNA TI MILLING MA CHINE C O MPANY
Th e 1 2 i n c h B
-
. GPl a i n M a n u f a c t u r i n g
.
C i n c i n n a t i M i ll e r
( Pa t e n t R i g h t s F lly v d
u R e s er e )
A T EA ISER T ON MILLING AND MILLING MA CHINES 39
12 i n ch B
-
. G . Pl a i n M a n u f a c t u r i n g M i ll e r
This is a simple S ingle purpose machine O f the column and knee

type designed for the rapid production O f small machine parts as
,
used in the construction of typ ewr iters sewing ma chines adding , ,
machines registering machines etc

E
.
, ,
vidence of its rigid constru c tion is v ery c learly furnished by

the illustration This machine is designed to run at one spindle
.
speed because it is usual practice to employ such ma c hines con

,
t inuousl y on a S ingle operation or operations which are pra c tically

identical
I
.
t can be furnished as a back geared machine as S hown or ,
without back gears in which case the tight and loose pulleys are
,
mounted directly on the spindle

p g A a ge
.
Qu i c k iAc t i n g O e r a t i n
The operator from rr n m en t .
A
his position in front of and at the left hand end O f the table con -
trols the feed movements with his right hand ssuming a piece .
of work placed in the fixture he moves the table forward at the rate
,
A
of 2 3
4 per turn
”
of handwheel until the dog hits the trip which ,
automatically engages the power table feed t the end of the c ut .
a second dog disengages the table feed and stops the table which ,
is then returned to the starting point bringing the fixture imme di ,
ately in front of the operator who after a new piece has been chucked , ,
A
repeats the above movements .
n analysis of these movements compared with usual prac tice

will S how that the operator s work has been S implified and many
’
of the usual time consuming elements are eliminated

-
e may . H
move the table forward as rapidly as he wishes and he need not S low ,
down when he approaches the cutter because the trip remo ves all
need of precaution .
Therefore with the dog pr operly set the work is brought rapidly
, ,
close to the cutter before the power feed is thrown in thus reducing ,
the actual feed distance to very little more than the actual amount
needed to traverse the work .
Both of the foregoing machines have proven very popular with

managers because they increase output and with operators because , ,
they very materially reduce labor .

40 THE CIN CINNATI MILLING MAC HINE C O MPANY
Co n e -
D ri v e n Pl a i n C i n c i n n a t i M i ll e r
S
F ly vd
Mad e in F i ve iz es
( Pa t e n t R i gh t s u l Reser e )
42 THE C IN CINNA TI MILLING MA CHINE C OMPANY
on the clutch disk away from the pulley Make sure that the screw .
is again tightened after the adjustment has been made to insure ,
that the holder for fingers will be tightly locked to the clutch disk .
Fi g . 45 . Det i al u of Co n te rs h af t C l u ch
t
S geP
in l ey ull Hg
Ma c h i n e s are not furnished with a
i h - P o w er
countershaft but are driven direct from the line Care S hould be
,
.
A
taken when belting up the machine to be sure that the pulley runs
in the direction indicated by the arrow on the pulley suitable .
I
pulley should be placed on the line shaft to drive the machine pulley
at the proper speed n determining the S i z e of this pulley follow
.
,
this rule :
Revolu ti ons of ma chi n e pu l l ey mul ti p li ed by the di ameter of
ma chi n e pul l ey di vi ded by the revolu ti ons of li n e shaft, equa l s di a meter
,
of pu l l ey on l i n e s haft
E XA Assuming a line shaft running

.
FO R MPLE . 2 00r p m and

. . .
a machine pulley 2 0 diameter running 3 2 5 r p m . . Then we have

,
325 r p m x 20
32 for the diameter of the pulley on the
. . .
”
1
2
20 0
line shaft .
This same rule of course applies when determining the S ize

, ,
of the pulleys on the line shaft when driving a countershaft except ,
in this case we multiply t h e s p e e d o f t h e c o u n t e r s h a f t by the

diameter of i ts pulley and divide by the revolutions of the line shaft .
O i l in g I
t is important that a Milling Machine be well oiled
. .
We advise the use of a good grade of mineral oil On all our machines .
the oiling places are plainly marked and those places provided with
A T EA ISE R T ON MILLING AND MILLING MA CHINES 43
oilers are all in plain S ight The operator S hould acquaint himself .
with all of them and be careful not to neglect any

H
.
On our igh P ower Machines S ight feed oilers are used for the
- -
important bearings and most O f the mechanism is oiled from central

,
oiling places These should be filled once a day The table bearings
. .
are oiled through O il holes provided on the front and rear Sides of
the table To oil the inside parts of the saddle bring the zero line on
.
,
g
the table over each one of the three lines on the saddle and in each
case O il t h ro u h t h e o i l h o l e ove r t h e z e r o l i n e o n t h e t a b l e .
Be sure to keep the table in each of these positions long enough to

give the O il time to pass through the tube to the place to be oiled .
LOCKNUT FOR ADJUS TI NG S PI NDLE
S c ti
e on t h ro uhd v
g ri i n g g ea r s
Fig
and
. 46
S p in d l e of a H ig hP -
o w er Ma ch i ne .
S
T o R e m ov e t h e p i n d l e f r o m t h e M a c h i n e This is an .
operation that is rarely necessary When after long and hard use .
, ,
S
extensive overhauling makes this advisable it is only necessary ,
A
to l oosen the lock nut on the pindle Fig 4 6 at the same time dr iv , .
,
H
ing the spindle forward fter the spindle has passed through the
.
main gear at its front end on both C one D riven and igh P ower - -
M achines it will come out freely

Aj
.
,
d u stm
e n t s The machine spindles are tapered at the front
.
end and are s o proportioned that under ordinary servi c e the wear
,
on the end thrust collars and on the spindle bearing proper is about
equal s o that by screwing the lock nut on spindle against the front
,
44 THE C IN CI NN ATI MILLING M AC HINE C O MPAN Y
A
box the spindle is drawn into its tap er bearing to proper adj ust
,
ment .ll machines are properly adj usted before they leave the
factory and this adj ustment is seldom necessary When properly
, .
made the machine should again run without further adj ustment
,
for a number of years .
The white metal thrust bearing of the spindle rests against

. thin washers O f hard paper By removing some of these or adding .
additional ones as the case requires an independent adj ustment

, ,
of the thrust bearing can be made when excessive continuous service

on one kin d Of work may make this advisable
A gK S B g
.
dj u stin ee a d d l e a n d Ta b l e ear in s
n These bear
, .
ings are all provided with taper gibs The table and knee gibs are .
adj uste d endwise by means of a substantial screw and S hould be
H
kept snug s o as to take up all play keeping these members in the con ,
dition O f a good sliding fit The knee gib on igh P ower Machines .

-
is no longer provided with clamping levers and if kept in proper

adj ustment it will be found that the machine has greater solidity
,
between the knee and column than can be obtained by any system
of locking or clamping levers
g L eve s Hg
.
O p era t i n The operation i h P o w e r M i l l ers

H
r on -
.
—
of Cincinnati igh P ower Millers is the same for all types P lain
-
,
Universal and Vertical The important operating levers are indi .
ca t e d in Fig 4 7 . .
T o Us e t h e T a b l e Fe e d s Throw in the lever for the table feed .
gear train and then start and stop the feeds by the table feed oper
ating lever To feed to the left move the lever towards the left
.
, ,
and to feed towards the right move the lever towards the right ,
.
To Us e C r o s s Fe e d s Throw out the lever for table feed gear .
train and se t the lever for cross feed gear train to th e p osit io n marked
cross feed on front o f knee Operate the cross feed by O perating
“ ”
.
lever at side of knee .
T o U s e V e r t i c a l Fe e d Throw out the lever for table feed .
gear train and s et the lever for vertical feed to position marked
“
vertical feed on front of knee,
”
Operate the vertical feed by .
operating lever at side of knee Move lever up to feed up and down .

,
to feed down
g S S S
.
T o Ch a n e t h e pin dl e p e ed s top the machine R ead . .
from speed plate the lever positions for the speed wanted ; for example ,
A T EA ISE R T ON M ILLING A ND MILLING MA CHINES 45
1 15revolutions requires lever positions 3 BC Turn the pilot -

.
wheel to the left a s far as it will go Th en move it along until the .
detent drops into the hole under 3 ; then turn pilot wheel to the
right until you feel the gears come together ; then press on the
treadle lightly which will revolve the gears S lowly at the same time
, ,
turn the pilot wheel right a s far as it will go and finally pull it home ,
I
tight This sets and locks the tumbler
. .
I
“ “
N ext move the levers B and C
,
f the gears interfere .
,
press lightly on the treadle and they will go into place t is best .
to press on the treadle j ust hard enough to start the gears The .
position of the O perator when speed changing is shown in Fig 4 8

g
. .
T o C h a n e t h e Fe e d s Change the rate of feed by means of .
the levers and pilot wheel on feed box in the same way as the speed
changing is done D o this while the machine is running
. ou . Y
need therefore not use the treadle .
T A R TI N G L E V E R
MI C RO M ETE R D E P T H GA U GE
U IC K T R A V E RS E F O R HEA D
U
HA ND A D J S TM EN T U
C L TC H F O R E N G A G I N G MIC RO ME T E R
S P EED C HA NG E Le vERs
S TO P F O R D E P T H G A U GE
P I LO T W H E E L F O R O P ER MI C RO ME TE R H A ND A DJ U S T ME N T
U
A N D LO C K I NG
T MB L E R
W H E N C HA N G TA B L E F EE D O P E R A T I N G
IN G S P E E D S
E V ER
B LE F E E D G E A R TR A I N
U
E F E E D TR I P D O G S
HA N D A D J S T ME N T F 0
V K R ET RN U
U
F E E D C HA N G E L E E R S TA B L E
A N D T MB L E R L O C K .
U
O P E R A TE W HI L E R N N I N G
A DJ U S T ME N T
V E RT I C A L F E E D T R I P D O G
L E FEDGE
F J QC R D
i T
RA IN
A
R
D
U
TR EA D L E F O R T R N I N G
T HE G E A R S W HE N V E RT I C A L A D J U S T ME N T
C HA N G I N G
S P EE D S C Ro s s A ND
V V
A N D R E ER S I NG L E ER V
E RT I C A L F E E D O P E R A T I N G
A rr a Fi g .
ng e m e n t o f o per
47
a lv
ting e e rs
B efore engaging either table

.
cross or vertical feed it is always , ,
desirable to s ee that the handwheel on the end of the lead screw ,
y
cross screw or vertical adj usting screw is disengaged from the
, ,
clutch as otherwise the sudden rotation of these handwheels ma

, ,
cause inj ury to the operator .

S e ty Pi n s
af The feed mechanism O f all Cincinnati Millers
.
is provided with a safety pin which will shear when the machine
,
A
is overloaded with too heavy a feed before breakage occurs in any
important part of the feed mechanism number of these pins .
are supplied as part of the regular equipment with the machine .
The bushes in which these pins are located will be found j ust outside
the reverse box on the left hand side of the knee on the igh P ower
-
H -
I
Machines and just outside the feed bracket on the right hand side of
,
-
the column of the Cone D riven Machines -

nstructions for removing .
the sheared and inserting fresh pins will be found on the envelope
containing the pins which accompanies the machine
A g Hg
, .
dj u stin th e
Cl u t ch o f i h P o we r M a c h i n e s This -
.
friction clutch may be s et s o that it will S lip when very delicate

cutters are used and can also be s e t up so firmly that it will transmit
,
the maximum horsepower that the belt can supply To adj ust this .
clutch remove the cover from the end of the main driving pulley
, ,
release the clamping screw which holds the large threaded finger
carrier and screw up in a right hand direction until the p roper degree
,
-
of friction is obtained Tighten up the locking screw and replace

.
the cover .
Car e of t h e Ma ch in e The machine should be kept clean

. .
This point can not be emphasi z ed too strongly The continued .
A
acc ur acy and durability O f the machine depends upon this more
than on any other one thing ll O il holes should be kept closed
.
,
A
and it is advisable when oiling to first wipe iron dust and chips
away from oiling places before inserting the oil can fter a bearing .
has been allowed to run dry due to in sufli c ie n t or improper oiling ,
I
and has become cut any amount of flooding with oil will not improve
,
its c ondition t is best therefore to exercise proper care in the

.
, ,
first place .
When oil holes or oil tubes become clogged with gummy O il they
should be thoroughly flushed with gasoline This will not inj ure the .
bearings but will have a cleansing e ff ect which will insure that all
,
bearings will again get their full supply of clean O il .
The machine should never be taken apart unless absolutely

necessary and then the work S hould be done by a competent man
,
who has first familiari z ed himself with the construction of the

machine To remedy some temporary trouble it seldom is n e ce s
.
,
sary to take any great portion of the machine apart For example .
,
trouble due to an improperly oiled bearing may always be located

A T EA ISE
R T ON M ILLING AND MILLING MA C HINES
by turning the various members of the mechanism by hand until

the inj ured member is located B y bearing these things in mind a .
great deal of the time and trouble required to dismantle a machine

may be saved .
The careful workman will see to it that wooden coverings

are provided for the front of the knee and the top of the
A
table s o that he may place work or tools on these parts without
,
inj ury to the slides or to the upper surfa c e of the table ttention .
to this will do much to maintain the original accuracy of the machine

g
.
Wh e n o r d e r i n
e p a i r s always give us the construction num
r
A
ber and letter stamped on the front face of the column immediately
below the front box of the machine lso specify the part wanted .
,
by number We have for some time past numbered every part

.
entering into the construction of our machines and these numbers ,
are placed where they are not liable to be obliterated by wear

By specifying the part number in each c ase making replacements ,
will be v ery much facilitated .
v lv
a w h
w l ha
lwy l adl l wly
F ig 48 P o s i ti o n of O p e r to r C ng i n g S pe e c s
’
. . en
He mo es thel e h er a s fa r as it i go and t en by
g e nt p r es s i n g o n t h e t r e e t h e g e ars s o t ur n
a nd i g o i n t o p os i t i o n .
48 THE CIN CINNA TI MILLING MA CHINE C OMPANY
10 3 7 5
-
Fig . 49
N am es o f Par t s o f Cin c i n n at i H gh Po w er
i -
Pl a i n M i ll e r s a n d T h e i r U s e
These illustrations S how t h e location on the machine of the
different parts referred to in this book They will contribute to
.
a better understanding of the machine and also facilitate ordering

repairs N umbers in circles are on the part to which they refer or
.
,
they are directly over that part when it is concealed .
1 . Clutch lever for starting and stopping machine .
0
5 Table feed setting lever .
9
9 P ower quick traverse O perating lever .
9 Table feed adj ustable trip dogs .
Table feed trip plunger

1
9 .
50 THE C IN CINNATI MILLING MACHINE C O MPANY
Fi g . 50
C olumn of the machine . 50 . Base.
bo x
géb
rl x e .
51 . Bracke t containing right
ee OX '
hand bearing for table feed
D ri v1ng pulley .
screw
S
Feed reverse box .
52 Br i dle by W t h the braces

addle
.
are fastened to the knee

.
Table .
Knee .
53 . Front spindle bearing box .
A T EA ISE
A
54 . Front face of column where the construction number and
I
letter will be found lways give us this number and letter
.
when ordering attachments or repairs t identifies the .
machine .
55 . Micrometer dial for vertical adj ustment .
56 . Micrometer dial for cross adj ustment .
57 . Front sliding covers in top O f knee Back sliding covers cor .
responding with these can not be s een .
58 . Cross screw bracket at front of knee .
A
59 . Trip plunger bracket .
A
60 . djustable gib for table bearings .
61 . dj ustable gib for saddle bearings .
62 . Telescopic Universal j oint shaft ( long fork ) .
63 . Uni v ersal j oints ( short forks and ball in fork ) The short fork .
connecting with the S haft in reverse box has a flange which

carries the shearing pins ( safety fork ) .
64 . Oil pump c onnection with tank which is in the base of the

machine
E
.
65 . j ector rod
L
66 . V ertical feed nut on base of machine .
67 ocation of oil pump when furnished

g
. .
Th e fo l l ow i n p ar t s are Sh own i n Fi g . 50
68 . P ower quick traverse pulley .
L
Quick traverse bracket on column
69 . .
70 ong fork on quick traverse shaft

E
. .
71 . xtension shaft quick traverse

,
.
72 . C over over end of lead screw ( Remove when setting up for .
S
cutting spirals ) .
73 . hort forks of Universal j oints ( These are identical with

.
the forks used for driving the feed ) .
74 .
Quick traverse bracket under saddle .
75 .
Quick traverse operating lever bracket .
76 .
Quick traverse lever shaft .
77 .
Q uick traverse safety lever .
78 C over over driving gears ( Remove when oiling inside parts )

A A g
. . .
dd i t i o n a l P a r t s p p l yi n t o V er t i c a l Ma c h i n e s Fig 5 0 .
79 . P ilot wheel for quick adjustment of spindle ( 6 per turn ) ”

.
80 Knob for engaging hand feed movement

H
. .
81 . andwheel for hand feed movement .
82 . Micrometer dial for hand feed movement .

52 THE C INCINNA TI MILLING MAC HINE C OMPANY
10 3 5 '
Fig . 51
83 One of four bolts for clamping spindle

. solidly frame
S
of machine for heavy work .
84 pindle head
. .
L
84 A -
Rack for adj usting spindle head
. .
85 ower spindle bearing box

. .
86 Upper spindle bearing box

H
. .
87 .ead adjustment worm casing .
A dd i t i o n a l Pa r t s A p p l yi n g to Un i ve r sa l M a c h i n es Fig 51
Arbor
.
I
88
Head
. .
89 . Universal ndexing and Dividing .
90 . Tail stock .
A T EA ISE
R T ON M ILLING A ND MILLING MA CHINES 53
E levating center for tailstock .
Front index plate on spindle for direct indexing low numbers

H
.
ead center .
S
D river for dog .
S
ide index plate D rilled both sides reversible .
, .
I
ector for convenience in indexing .
I
ndex p inh o l der .
S
ndex pin ( in the holder ) .
egment for change gears ( This se g ment with a complete .
S
se t of change gears constitutes a D riving Mechanism ) .
winging arm or bracket for idler gear .
I
Change gears for cutting spirals ( 12 in a set ) .
dler gear .
S
Quick return crank handle .
wivel carriage or housing .
S
Vise body .
wivel base for vise

H
.
l
older for adj ustable bron z e bu sh for outer arbor support .
( This is substituted for the large bearing holder in the
S
intermediate arbor support ) .
teady rest .
Universal Milling Machine chuck .
Vise housing .
V ise screw .
S
V ise j aws .
wivel block in tailstock .
S
Tailstock center carrier .
addle of Universal Machine .
A di
d ti on al Pa r t s A p p l yi n g to Co n e Dr i ve n M a c h i n e s
-
Cover over back gears .
Cover over back gear pinion .
Back gear quill .
B
Back gear operating lever .
ack gear locking pin .
Driving cone .
Back gear sleeve .
Back gear shaft .
Braces as used on N O S 1 2 and 3 cone driven machines .

,
-
.
Bridle for atta ching braces to knee .

THE CIN CINNA TI MILLING MACHINE C O MPANY
Con e - D iv
r en U n i ve r s a l
:
C i n c i n n a t i Mi ll e r
Ma d e in Fo u r S iz es
( P a t e n t Ri g h t s F ll y
u R e s er vd
e )
A T EA ISE R T ON MILLING A ND MILLING MA CHINES 55
HA P T E III C R
UN I VERSAL T O O L R OO M MI LL ERS
The term Universal designates a Miller espe c ially designed
for automatically milling spiral forms .
This in addition to its equipment for cutting spur mitre and

, ,
bevel gears and doing a general line of indexing and other work
,
that is held between centers makes the Uni versal Miller the gener
,
S
ally accepted toolroom machine .
uch machines have the table mounted on a swi veling carriage ,
permitting the work held between centers to be s et at an angle with
H
the cutter to suit the spiral being milled .
Their equipment includes a Universal D ividing ead change ,
H
gears chuck etc These two particulars vi z swiveling table and
, ,
.
, .
,
D ividing ead equipment constitute the only difference between

,
Universal and P lain Millers .
The development of
modern machinery has
brought with it the use of
spiral gears of wider angles
than that to which the table
of a Universal Miller c an be
swiveled .
To meet these require
S A
ments we brought out our
piral M illing ttachment
some years ago to increase
the range of Universal
S
Millers to take in this work .
in c e then we have ar
ranged our P lain Mille rs s o
that they ca n be use d i t h Fi g 5 2
W
P i Mi E q i pp d f C t ti g S p i l l u u l
H
. . a n er e or n ra s
the D ividing ead geared to th e table feed screw for generating
S A
spirals the same as Universals
,
B y adding to this equipment the
.
piral M illing ttachment Cincinnati P lain Millers will cut spirals

,
of greater angle than can be c ut on any Universal Miller with regular

e q uipment .
56 THE CIN CINNATI MILLING MA CHINE C O MPANY
I n recent years Plain Millers have been coming into more general
us e as toolroom machines than formerly it being recogni z ed that ,
only a portion of toolmaking consists of spiral work and for all other
purposes the P lain Machine h as the advantage of g reater rigidity .
A
For a small toolroom using only one machine it is customary to ,
I
select 3 Universal
. dditional machines may be P lain or Universal
.
in proportion to the amount of spiral work to be done t should .
be borne in mind that o ur P lain Millers are made to the same close
limits of accuracy a s our Universals .
Fi g . 53
T h is is t h e m o s t i m p o r t
.
nt e
av
a f a u v al l
T h e D i i d i ng H e d
t re o f a Uni ers Mi er
Toolroom machines are not often required to do h eavy cutting

E
.
xtreme accuracy is more essential than great power But in order .
to produce accurate results it is essential that all the working parts

,
of these machines be as rigid as it is practical to make them This .
is especially important in regard to the large sliding members of

—
the frame such as the table saddle knee and column On our .
, ,
machines these are constructed on the enclosed box principle all as ,
detailed in the preceding pages describing P lain Machines .
We have based our design of each of these members on a definite

knowledge of the nature of the strains to which it is subj ected .
Th e D i vi d i ng Head
A modern powerful Universal Miller is severely handicapped

H
,
unless it is equipped with a D ividing ead that is strong enough to

do work commensurate with the capacity of the machine itself .
58 THE C IN CINNA TI M ILLING MA CHINE C O MPANY
I t will be noted that the front bearing APE R S TO A RD THE R O N T

T W F
E ND . The effect of the clamp therefore is to take up whatever play
ADJ US TI NG s cns ws W ORM CAS 'NG
Fig . 56
exists by pushing the spindle forward in its bearing and thus bring
ing it into perfect alignment before actually clamping it .
°
The spindle may be s et at any angle from 5 below the horizontal
to 5 0 beyond the perpendicular position The swiveling block is
°
.
CLAMP I NG R‘NQ FOR

LOCKI NG S P l NOLE
El BLOCK
.
BOLT FOR
CLRMPlNG SWWEL
W ORM CAS l NG
F ig . 57
graduated about its circumference and provided with a vernier

1
reading to five minutes or 1 72 of a degree
,
The swiveling block .
”
swings on large trunnions ( 6 2 diameter on 1 0 head and 8 2 on 1 2
”
1 ” 1
A T EA ISE
R T ON M ILLING AND MILLING MAC HINES 59
and 14 heads ) clearly shown in the illustrations and may be held

"
, ,
rigidly at any angle by clamping the large trunnion bearings by

S imply tightening two cap screws The rigidity with which the .
clamps hold the trunnions is carefully tested Fig 5 9 on each head , .

,
as soon as the swivel block and clamps have been fitted .
HORI ZONTA L S ECTI ON OF CI NCI NNAT I DI V I DI NG HEAD .
by
l l a l
c w hu cla
Fig . 58
w h ch dl addwb y cwu dl y
l
cd c
w hu w
T he S pi n e m p o n s is t s o f a S p i t r i n g , C i is S pre th e e ge
h
,
B t ig te n i n g t h e s re A, t s m ping the Spi n e en is e , se re

i t o t roc d i n g i t o ut o f a ig n m e n t .
,
E very head must carry pounds 2 2 inches from the center o f

600
the swivel without any evidence whatever of failure on the part of
the clamps to rigidly hold the swivel block in position .
Fi g . 59 . Te s t of Ri g i d i t y la
of C m ps
N ote the simplicity of our clamp the large clamping surface ; and :
that the swi vel bearing is completely protected This insures that .
I H
it will not be c ome inj ured s o a s to destroy the alignment of the head .
n addition to cutting spirals the D ividing ead is especiall y

,
adapted for bevel and mitre gear cutting as describ ed in the spe c ial
chapter on that subj ect .
60 THE C IN CINNA TI MILLING MA CHIN E C O MPANY
Work of this sort should always be done with the D ividing ead H
spindle se t at an angle away from the direction of the cut s o that ,
any springing that may result from the small arbors that the
nature of such work O ften requires will be away from the cutter ,
I
and prevent its gouging in This requires that the S pindle be set
.
past the vertical position Ours can be s e t to

. t also requires
a head of the greatest rigidity The details of ours are all very .
large and the test on the preceding page S hows how securely our
,
spindle is held
gH
.
Th eD i vi d i n e a d T a i l s t o c k The tailstock has an adj ust .
I
able center bar which may be raised and lowered through rack and
°
pinion t is carried in a slide which can be swiveled to 10 above
.
or below the hori z ontal to bring the centers in line with the center
An ex a l accu a
mp
Fi g
e of
. 60
r te in d exin g .
I
I
of taper work t is S O constructed that the cutter can pass over it
.
without injury when se t at an angle t is provided with two .
centers one for small light work and the other for heavy work
, ,
and may be reversed to bring either in position .
The centers are carried in a massive slide which has V bearings -
in the housing The clamping bolt passing through the latter

.
serves as a j ournal about which both the housing and the S lide
carrying the centers revolve .
A T EA ISE R T ON
"
MILLING AND MILLING MA CHINES 61
So
gH A
TEST S HEET FO R DIV HEADS .
m e Evi d e n c e s of
D i vi d i n ead c cu r
acy The accompanying .
dividing head test records

were drawn at random
from our files They r e .
present average accuracy .
They are only a few of the many
H
similar tests which every one of
our D ividing eads must pass .
We call special attention to

the indexing test This puts our .
regular product in the same class

with instruments of precision .
We are able to accomplish

this because of s pecial worm and
w o r mwh ee l generating machines
and other special tools which we
T t f cc
es o a uay v
F ig 61
c f D i idi g H d C t
r o
.
have developed for this work
alone
n ea en er.
.
Fig 60 is an example of the accuracy of our index mechanism

.
.
S IX 1 d Iam e ter holes are spaced equally on a circle 1 4 1 é in diameter

.
”
”
/ .
They are first dri lled then bored to si z e , The maximum radial .
-
error is less than two ten

T ES T S HEET FO R D IV HEADS .
thousandths inch ,
and the maximum chord

a l error is less than thre e
q u a r t e r th ousan d ths
D A m a te n e
5 ) inch The radial Am mw N mb

.
, u “
measurement is made
from the centrally placed
standard plug gauge and
read from the lead screw
dial In the usual way and
finally checked with mi
c ro m e t er calipers .
This extreme chordal

accuracy ( that is the ao ,
curacy from hole to hole )

results directly from the
accuracy O f the 1 2 index ”
T t f cc
F i g 62
c f l ig m t es o a u y ra
.
o a n en .
62 THE CI N C INNA TI MILLING MACHINE C O MPANY
head on which the work is done The data given with the indexing .
A
test S how why our index heads can do such work .
ccurate indexing can not be done no matter how accurate the ,
i ndex mechanism unless the dividing head is made to close limits

,
in other particulars To give a better understanding of the care

.
I y
we take in testing out each part a few of our methods are shown , .
f the center does not run true ou can not d o accurate work of
any kind between centers Ours are all tested by revolving the
.
spindle with the indicator resting against the point of the center ,
Fig 61
. .
This test is repeated after the center has been removed turned ,
part way around and replaced The record shows a total error of .
one quarter thousandth

-
inch that is one eighth on each , ,
-
—
side of the true position too small an e rror to affect work usually
done on a Miller .
The alignment test Fig 62 insures that their spindles are in

, .
,
close alignment and central with the T S lots of the Miller table -
.
R eadings taken along one S ide of the 1 8 test bar S how the parallel
”
relation with the T slots The central relation with the T slots is
-
.
-
S hown by the di ff erence between readings on both sides of the test

bar The record S hows a .
“
total error found O f one ”
thousandth inch in
’
each case That s accurate .
enough for the most exact

ing requirements .
Fig 63 S hows h o w the .
indexing accuracy O f the

w o r m wh e e l is tested in the
finished head The disk .
con tai ns an ac curatel y

g raduated silver ring By .
Fi g
means of a microscope with
Th d mg t t e In ex es .
j
a m i crometer adj ustment ,
we can read the errors in the w o rm wh eel and also those in the worm ,
to one fortieth of a thousandth O f an inch ; not only the
E
-
H
errors in pitch but also the inaccuracies O f the tooth face
, very .
A
C in cm n at i D ividing ead is S O tested a record being kept ,
.
piece of accurate indexing is shown in Fig 64 Thirty s ix . .

-
holes 1 4 diameter are spaced on the periphery of a 1 9 disk rigidly

,
” ”
,
hel d on a 12 index head ”

They are first drilled and then bored a
.
A T EA ISE
trifle under si z e and finally reamed to a plug gauge fit with a

,
specially ground M end mill The error between holes is less than
”
.
I
one thous andth of an
inch n addition to illus .
tr a t in g the accurate results

that can be O btained this ,
also shows the best method

of handling work of a larger
diameter than the index cen
ters will swing .
Fig 65 S hows the us e of

H
.
the Dividing ead for index

ing a drill j ig This j ig h as .
S
1 2 holes distributed over all
O f its sides ome are radial .
,
and some are at an angle .
By holding it between cen

ters the spacing and the ,
F i g 64 .
angles are O btained by a
combination of movements ; circumferentially by indexing ; at an ,
angle with the radius by indexing and vertical adj ustment ; and
lengthwise by means of the lead screw The lengthwise and vertical
.
measurements are checked by micrometer calipers in the usual way .
They S how an accuracy with

i n one half thousandths
-
inch but the accuracy

of the circumferential spaci ng
results entirely from the a c
c uracy O f the index and ,
comes within one tenth of a -
degree or s ix tenths of a
-
thousandth inch on
this d iameter of
Fig 66 shows a piece of
.
work that requires a machine

that is not only extremely Fi g 65 .
accurate but it must be in correct adj ustment throughout

,
The .
disk is 1 8 in diameter when finished and h as five slots evenly

”
spaced The s ides of the slots are radial and must be finished
.
individually The maximum variation in the distance between S lots

.
is not o v er one thousandth inch .

64 THE CIN CINNA TI MILLING MACHINE C O MPANY
Fi g . 66
Car e an d Use of th e D i vi d i ng Head
The preceding illustrations S how that the D ividing ead is in H

reality a precision tool We go to unusual expense to make it
.
accurate and this is a large factor in the cost of the Universal

,
I
Machine But all this accuracy and refinement can be lost in a
H
.
I
S hort time if the D ividing ead is not properly taken care of
.
t .
should be kept well O iled with a good grade of mineral oil t should .
I
be kept clean and it should never be placed on the floor but a suit ,
able bench or S helf should be provided for it n fact when not in .

,
us e it should be given the same care and protection that is given

,
other precision tools gauges and instruments

E H
.
,
ven the most accurate Dividing ead will not produce accurate
work unless the conditions under which the work is done are correct .
For instance it sometimes happens that a gear is to be out very

H
,
accurately and dependence is placed on the D ividing ead alone ,
without taki ng proper care that the machine is adj usted that the ,
I
work is held properly that the cutters are in good condition etc
, ,
.
,
resulting in disappointment in the finished piece of work n such .
H
cases the blame may very often be improperly attributed to the
D ividing ead .
66 THE CIN C INNATI MILLING MAC HINE C OMPANY
Ho w t o S e t Up for I nd
ex i n a e a r When an accurate piece g G
H
.
of indexing is to be done a D ividing ead that is in good condition ,
S hould be placed on a machine that is in similarly good condition .
Then care should be taken to see that the machine is in proper

adj ustment in all respects such as end play in the spindle loosene s s , ,
in the table saddle or knee gibs etc The arbor should be in good
, ,
.
condition and properly held in the spindle of the machine ; the

cutter should be placed as near the shoulder of the arbor as the work
will allow and t h e c u t t e r m u s t b e s h a r p
,
The D ividing ead . H
H
must of course also be in proper adj ustment ; then with the Dividing ,
H
ead in place on the machine the cutter must be properly centered
with the D ividing ead center Then with the work securely .
,
mounted on a mandrel which ,
itself runs true and properly ,
secured between centers with

no play between the dog and
the driver we are ready to ,
proceed
H
.
The D ividing ead must

be set with the indexing
pointer in place for the
Fi g 67
F
.
or
. H ig h N m b
i d i g p im
n ex n
I d
dd d r
u
i g A t t ch m
er
mb
e, o
t
n
proper
ex n
numbera
v u
of divisions
en
and the sector must be s et

an e en n er s .
,
for the proper spacing as

H
,
described a little later The D ividing ead spindle must now be

.
clamped .
The machine should be started and the gear blank S ho ul d be

adjusted vertically until there is evidence that the running cutter
touches it Then it must be moved aside and the knee raised
.
vertically for the prop er depth as shown by the dial and we will be , ,
ready to take the first cut

After this has been taken we loosen the clamp and index for the
.
rection I f by
next tooth making sure that the pointer moves in one continuou di s
. chance it passes the hole we must return some dis

, an y , ,
before it ent ers the hole I n this way we will be sure that all the
tance and again come forward and let the pin touch the plate a little
.
back lash is taken up We then clamp the spindle and proceed wi th

.
the next cut and so on ,

.
The various methods of in dexm g the use of the sector and , ,
index tables are given on the following pages .

R T ON AN D C 67
I ex g There are two methods of indexing employed

nd in
P LAIN I N E X ING B y Head into plain index

.
1 . D . c o nver t in g o
th e
centers and us ing the front plate and index pin shown in the illus
I
t r a t io ns This plate has three circles of holes : 24 3 0 and 3 6
.
,
.
I
t will index any number that divides evenly into any one of these .
I
t is especially convenient for indexing low numbers as when mak ,
ing four or S ix flute d reamers etc

-
t saves all the time lost by the ,
.
old method of indexing through the S ide index plate which requires
p
,
ten turns of the ointer to make each one Of the divisions of a four
fiut e d reamer
H
.
To change the ead from universal to dire c t indexing the worm

is dropped out of mesh with the worm wheel by simply turning the
T bolt shown in Fig 5 5 through half a turn
-
. The indexing is done .
H
by turning the spindle by hand When the j ob is finished the .
A
ead can be set for universal indexing again by turning the T bolt -
in the opposite direction ll this c an be done in a few seconds

. .
The mechanism is positive in its action and does not depend up On

clamping arrangements of any sort
V I X
.
UNI E RSAL N DE ING This is the usual indexing arrange

2 . .
ment by means O f a plate and pin on the S ide of the head but differs ,
W WV B
w idely from others in the following very important feature : THE
PLATE IS PLA CE D CO N CEN TRI C I TH THE S I EL L O CK bringing ,
it on a line with the work spindle which enables us to use an index ,
—
plate very much larger ( S i g in diameter ) than is practical by any ”
other c onstruction
I
.
We employ only one plate t is drilled on both S ides and .

,
reversible and makes an unusually large number of useful divisions

,
because its large diameter gives room for many circles and a large
number of holes in these c ircles and consequently a w ider ra n g e of
'
indexing than can be done from plates of smaller diameter They .
include all numbers up to and in c luding 60 and all even numbers ,
and those divisible by 5 up to and including 120 .
The table furnished with the machine gi ves all divisions O b t ain
able up to 4 0 0 This covers the requirements of most shops
. t . I
I
is printed in full on page 7 6 .
f higher and prime numbers are to be indexed the range of the ,
B
X
index mechanism can be greatly extended by using the HIGH N U M E R
IN DE ING ATTA CHMEN T S hown in Fig 67 By using it all indexing .
,
—
becomes simple indexing no compound arrangement is necessary
no combinations of change gears need be set up to ac c omplish th e
68 THE C IN CINNATI MILLING MAC HINE C O MPANY
—
A
result there is no compli c ated and bothersome chart to be con
s ul t e d ll obtainable divisions are indexed d irect from the plates
H
. .
This can be applied to a ny O f o ur Dividing eads Combination

I H
ndex eads and 1 0 P lain Centers and will index all numbers up
”
,
,
I
to and including 20 0 all even numbers and those divisible by 5 up
,
to and including 4 0 0 and make many divisions beyond

, t may .
be added at any time at small cost The complete high number .
indexing tables are printed on pages 7 2 to 7 5

I g
.
Ho w C a l c u l a t e n d ex i n
to The cal culations by which the .
index tables are produced and which must be followed for determ in
ing the circle and moves for indexing numbers not given in the tables
can perhaps be best understood by taking several practical examples
, ,
which follow
I
FI RST CASE : ndexing less than 4 0 divisions et us assume L
p
.
that a iece of work mounted between centers is to be divided into

1
20 equal parts This will require 3 6 of a turn of the spindle for
.
each di v ision and since the ratio between worm and wo rmwh ee l
,
is 4 0 to 1 this will re quire e ii or two turns of the worm and there

,
fi -
fore t wo turns of the index crank ( The gears connecting the

,
.
wormsh af t and the index crankshaft are equal in si z e )
S I L
.
E CO ND CASE : ndexing more than 40 divisions et us .
assume tha t it is desired to divide the circle into 80 divisions .
I
This time the wo rmwh eel will make T3 0 of a tur n while the worm
1
,
and index crank will make 68 O r a tur n n both of the above .
c ases the index pointer always engages the same hole in the index
plate c onsequently it is immaterial which one of the even number
,
circles of holes it is s et to
I
.
THI RD CASE : ndexing 1 52 divisions We have seen from the .
above two cases that since the ratio between worm and worm
,
wheel is 4 0 to 1 ,
R
( U LE Forty divided by the number O f divisions required
will determine the number of tur ns or the fractional part of a turn
N
to be made by index pointer which we s aw was two turns for 20,
divisions and 2 a turn for 80 divisions

1 ow following this rule .
, ,
we will divide 4 0 by 1 52 which expressed in the form of a fraction

, , ,
is a s of which
R
,
( U LE The denominator represents the circle to be used and

the numerator represents the number of holes in this circle over
which the index pin must be passed for each division .
Applying these rules to the first case mentioned we hav e the

fraction i ii which we need analyze no further than to say that if
, ,
N
the pin were in the 20 hole circle it would pass over 4 0 holes or -
, ,
two turns for each division ow referring to our present c ase we .

, ,
I
find that the index plate does not have a circle containing 152 holes .
t is therefore necessary to transform this fraction into an equivalent

fraction whose denominator will be the same number as the number
of holes in one of the circles of the i ndex plate does contain a
t
.
4 Q—
3 8 hole circle We will then transform our fraction 1 e to the e q uiva -
f
.
A
lent fraction O f 99 by dividing both the numerator a r d denominator
R
9 ,
by 4 . pplying ule 2 to this new fraction 3 8 is the circle to which ,
the index pin must be adj usted and it must move o v er a series of ,
1 0 holes for each one of the 1 52 divisions into which we are dividing
our work
I
.
F O U RTH CASE : ndexing 33 divisions Our fraction now takes .
the form of i f The plate does not contain a 3 3 hole circle neither -
,
does it c ontai n an 1 1 hole circle nor a 3 hole cir c le and since - - .
the se are the only numbers which can be evenly divided into 3 3 ,
we must make our transformation by multip l ying instead of divid

ing We find that the plate does contain a 66 hole circle ; there
.
-
fore by transforming our fra c tion into an equivalent fra c tion of

, .
_
larger numbers by multiplying both numerator and denominator

by 2 we get the equivalent fraction O f 9 99 in which 66 is the circle
,
8
,
and 80 Is the number of holes over whi c h the pin must pass for ea c h
division ; but S ince 8 0 holes are more than the 66 hole c ircle contains -
,
we divide 8 0 by 66 and find that it is contained once with 1 4 left

,
over ; therefore the pointer must make one complete turn and 14
,
holes in addition
I
.
F
80
CASE : ndexing 30 5 div isions Our fraction is
T .
9 99
8FI H
7 9 in which c ase we us e the 79 hole circle and index over eight
,
H N
holes .
I A H
The highest number that can be obtained with a igh umber
ndexing ttachment is 7 9 60 Our fraction is 9 9 89 1 9 9 ere . .
we must use the 1 99 hole circle and index one hole for ea c h of the -
79 60 divisions
S c o Referring to third case (page I n order to

.
Th e e t r.
save c ounting the ten holes each time the index plate is provided
‘
A
with a sector as S hown in Fig 68 The arms of this sector may be
,
. .
set by loosening the screw s o as to take between them any
desired number of holes One arm rests against th e index in as . p ,

70 THE CIN CINNATI MILLING MAC HINE C OMPA N Y
y
indicated b the black hole and the other arm i s set 1 0 holes ahead
, .
We must remember that the hole in which the pin rests must never
be counted for the simple reason that we are actually counting
,
spaces and not holes When the first division h as been made the
.
index pin is moved forward 10 holes to the arm C of the sector ,
and the sector itself is

moved up until the arm B
again strikes the index pin .
This will set arm C ahead

the required distance to in
d ic a te the hole into which
I
the index pin is to drop for
the next division n mov .
ing th e index pin forward it

is always best to move S low
l y as the hole is approached
and let the pin drop into
I
pl ac e j ust as the hole is
reached n this way all .
the lost motion in the gear

ing is taken up t will . I
never do to let the pin pass
38 0 m m}: the hole and then bring it
Fi g “ ,
back because in this way ,
S
the lost motion is not taken
up and the indexing will not be a c curate hould the pin pass the
.
hole accidentally it must be brought back some distance and then

,
moved forward again in the original dire c tion and carefully placed
in the hole .
Re se t t i n g Wo rk to th e C u t t er — N o t ch ed
I n d e x Pl a t e
Itften occurs in toolmaking and experimental work that a piece
O
A
of indexed work that h as been milled must be put back into the
I
machine for rem ill ing simple case is that of a disk with teeth of
.
some form on its periphery f it is found that the teeth are all too
.
thick another cut must be taken all around the disk

, .
When the work has been replaced in the machine as before it , ,
must be revolved the proper amount to bring the spaces to the cutter
for recutting This can not be done by indexing because it will be
.
,
found that when the work is in proper relation with the cutter the ,
A T EA ISE R T ON MILLING A ND MILLING MA C HINES 71
index pin is somewhere between the holes To meet this condition .
our index plate h as notches in its periphery and the lock has cor
responding notches Fig 69 B y loosening the lock and holding the
,
. .
index p inh o l der stationary the plate can be revolved until one O f
,
the holes comes to the pin The plate may then be locked again .
,
A
the lock e ngaging a different set of notches .
gain it may be desired to remill indexed S lots in order to cut

,
H
them deeper The problem n ow is to reset the work s o the cutter
.
will line up with the slots as originally cut ere again the final .
,
A
adj ustment may be made by revolving the plate as in the previous
c ase
. nother very useful application O f this feature is bevel or
mitre gear cutting When the blank is revolved toward the cutter
.
,
after the O ff set h as been made the index pin will nearly always ,
fall between two holes Then by revolving the plate we can bring
.
one of the holes to the pin .
The notches are O f such S i z e that by revolving the plate the

amount of one notch a piece O f work 1 in diameter will be revolved
,
”
The diameter of any piece O f work multiplied by this

figure gives the amount its periphery will be revolved ( that is the ,
amount it will move towards the cutter ) For example a piece of .

,
work 6 diameter held between centers will be revolved toward the

”
cutter 6 x 0 0 0 1 7 001 0 2 for each notch that the index plate is

” ”
. .
H
revolved .This h as pro v en a v ery useful feature on C incinnati
Dividing eads .
A se c ti on o f t he 8 3
'
di a m e ter in d pl
ex a te s h o wi n g th e not ch es a n d l ck
o .
72 THE CIN C INNA TI MILLING MA C HINE C O MPANY
H I GH NUM BE I N D EX TABLE R
Fo r S i m p l e In d ex g H g N m e s P m e
in i h u b r , ri , Odd and E ven
FO R USE W IT H H I G H N U MB E R I ND EX IN G A T T A C HM E N T .
IN D E X E S A LL NU MB ERS UP TO A ND INCLU DING 200 ; ALL EVEN
N U MB E R S A ND T HO S E D IV I S IB L E B Y 5 U P TO A N D I NCLU D IN G
T his
Eu
a t t a c hm e nt
d r ill e d o n s ix s id e s , AB
c o n s i st s
C , D , E a nd F
o f
3 i
a n
(
d
se t
S e
e
e
x
n
p
o
lof
a t e s w
t e , pag e
.
h i c h a r e
u u A
, ,
x a m pl e t o i n d e x di i i T h e p re fe r r e d s i d e i s F , s i n c e t h i s
35 v s o n s :
re
q i r e s t h e l e a s t n m be r o f h o l e s
u B u t s h o . l d e i t h e r D ,
o r E
i n pl a c e , i t c a n be u s e d , t h s a v o i d in g t h e bo t h e r O f c h a n g i n g p l a t e s
b e
— _ fi — fl
74 THE CIN CINNA TI M ILLING MAC HINE C O MPANY
I n d ex Ta b l e f o r Hg
i h Nu m b er s — C on t in u ed
A T EA ISE
R T ON MILLING AND MILLING MAC HINES 75
I ex T
nd a bl e for Hg i h N u m b e r s— C o n t i n u e d
N O TE —T h h
ese t r ee pl a te s h hl
a ve o es a s f ll w
o o s
—
A 30 4 8 , 69 , 9 1 , 99 , 1 1 7, 129 , 147, 17 1, 1 77 , 1 89
P L A TE —
,
l B 36 , 67, 8 1 , 9 7, 1 1 1, 1 27 , 14 1 , 1 5 7, 1 69 , 1 83 , 19 9
0 — 34 4 6 , 79 , 93 , 1 09 , 123 , 139 , 153 , 1 67 18 1 , 197

P L A TE D —3 2
,
4 4 , 77 , 89 , 10 7, 12 1 , 13 7 , 15 1 ,
,
1 63 , 1 79 , 193
,
E— 2 6, 4 2 , 7 3 , 8 7 , 103 , 1 19 , 1 33 , 1 49 , 16 1 , 1 75 , 19 1
P L A TE F— 2 8 , 3 8 , 7 1 , 83 , 10 1, 1 13 , 13 1, 1 43 , 1 59 , 1 73 , 1 87
76 THE CIN C INNA TI MILLING MA C HINE C O MPANY
A A I N D EX TABLE
S T N D RD
Fo r t h e
I ND EX E S
S
A LL
I ex P a e Us e w D v g H ea
ta n d ard
N U MB E R S UP
nd
TO A ND
l t
I N C LU D I N G
d
60 ;
ith
A LL EV EN
i idin
N U MB E R S A ND
d
d ll d b h —d h l f ll w
TH O S E D IV IS IB L E BY 5 UP TO I ZO, A ND A L L D IV I S I O N S O B TA I N A B L E U P T O 40 0 .
T his Pl ate i s ri e on ot si es an d h as o es a s o o s
F IR S T 8 ID E 5 8 3 0 34 3 7 3 8 3 9 4 4 2 4 3
—
- - - - - - - - - -
24 2 2 1 .
S EC O N D S I D E 6 - - - - -
4 47 4 9 5 53 5 5 5
1 4
-
7
-
8 -
59
-
62 -
6 6 .
A T EA ISE
R T ON MILLING A ND MILLING MACH I NES 77
C HAP T E I V R
SETT I N G UP THE M A CH I NE
Pl a c in gC u t t ers o n t h e A rb
o r When setting up the machine
.
preparatory to milling a piece of work care S hould be taken to have

,
the c utters as close to the end O f the spindle as the work will per
mit Milling Machine arbors in general us e are as a rule v ery much
.
smaller in diameter than they S hould be and their weakness is simply

,
emphas i z ed by placing cutters a t or near the middle of a long unsup

'
ported arbor Cutters O u hand may have small holes making small
.
,
diameter arbors necessary but whenever new cutters are ordered

, ,
careful consideration should be given to having them made large

enough to permit O f using arbors of large diameter sin c e it is only
p
,
H
with pro erly designed cutters and arbors O f sufficient S ize that the
S
best results can be O btained from modern igh P ower Milling -
Machines ( ee paragraph on chattering page 8 7

.
,
Cutters should always be keyed to the arbors T he friction due .
to tightening up the arbor nut c an not be expected to hold them .
P arti cular attention should be paid to the proper cleansing of the

hole in the spindle and the taper S hank O f the arbor Unless this .
point is c arefully watched a true running arbor c an not result

, ,
accurate work c an not be secured both the hole in the spindle and
,
the bush in the arbor support will be spoiled The body O f the arbor .
,
A
the arbor collars and the shank should be thoroughly cleaned before
,
the cutters and collars are placed on the arbor ny foreign matter .
between these members will bend the arbor when the nut is tightened
A bo S
.
r r u pp o r t s
We supply with all our machines two differ
.
ent styles of arbor supports For the small arbors which hav e a
.
bearing on the outside of the arbor nut there is a suitable adj ust ,
able bronze bush in one of the supports The larger arbors all .
have one or two spacing collars that are larger than the rest and ,
these collars fit the bushing in the arbor bearing bracket and serve
to give the arbor an additional support This bearing collar should .
be as close to the cutters as practical so that the support may be

close to the cutters and thus properly support the arbor The .
78 THE C IN C INNATI MILLING MA CHINE C O MPANY
braces for tying the arbor support to the knee of the machine should
always be used if the work will permit .
S PIND
A
Fi g . 70
Fig 70
. . ll short arbors are provided with a pilot bearing at
A
the end This fits a split bron z e bushing X in the arbor support
.
, , .
dj ust this bushing to a close bearing .
S
Fi g . 71
Fig 7 1
. .ome medium length arbors have in additi on to an
end pilot bearing X as above an arbor bearing collar to fit the
Y
, , ,
intermediate support This support should be placed a s close

.
to the cutter as practical the cutter itself being located as close

,
to the shoulder of the arbor as conditions will permit .
A
Fi g . 72
Fig 7 2
. . nother style of medium length arbor does not have
the pilot bearing for bron z e bush at end but is furnished with a
bearing collar which perm
,
its O f placing the support anywh ere

close to the cutter .
BR n c e s
A
Fi g . 73
Fig 7 3 ll our long arbors have two bearing collars When

Y
. . .
ever possible one O f these

, should be placed between cutters
, ,
that are spaced some distance apart on the arbor and the other ,
Z to which the braces are fastened S hould be as close to the out

, ,
side of the gang as conditions will permit .

A T EA ISE
R T ON M ILLI NG AND M ILLING MA CHINES 79
BR n c e s
Fi g . 74
Fig 74. A
nother wa y of supporting a long arbor
. . I n this case
the width of the table does not permit of bringing the support Z ,
to which the braces are fastened close to the cutters

,
. The inter
mediate support Y is therefore placed close to the gang and
between it and the outer support Z .
S P IH D
F ig . 75
Fig 75. S
ometimes the nature of the work requires the cutters
.
to be near the outer end of the arbor Then the intermediate .
support Y should be placed inside of the gang that is between the , ,
gang and the spindle .
Fi g . 76
Fig 76 Th e Wr o n Wa y
. . g I
n all of the above c ases the cut
.
ters have been pla c ed as near the end of the spindle as conditions
permit When this was not possible the supports hav e been placed
.
close to each side of the cutters Compare th ese conditions with

.
I
this sketch which shows a cutter in the middle of a long unsupported
, ,
arbor This sort of s et up S hould never be tolerated

.
-
t c an not .
possibly produ c e satisfa ctory results .

80 THE CIN CINNATI MILLING MACHINE C O MPANY
A H
A
D r i ve f o r r b o r s a n d C u t t e r s
Th e Al l of our
. igh P ower
Machines as well a s our larger Cone D riven Machines ,
uto m at i c
Fi g . 77
Machines an d Manufacturing Machines have flanged spindles ,
as shown in Fig 77 These flanges are fitt ed with hardened keys

. . .
u ss
FULLDEPTH OF THREAD
F ig . 78
THE CIN CINNATI MILLING MAC HINE C O MPANY
mills to fit standard flanged spindle ends are g iven in the drawing ,
Fig 7 8
S g S I
. .
p in d l e
Fl a n e s f o r T h r e a d e d p i n d l e s t will be found .
very simple to put flanges on the older machines having threaded

spindle ends and thus gain the full advantage of complete inter
,
changeability of face mills between these and the later machines .
On some si z es such a flange will also adapt the O lder machine for
using the new flanged arbors .
The sketches Fig 79 show flanges suitable for Cincinnati

,
.
,
Millers with threaded spindles a s made in recent years and g ive ,
sufficient dimensions to enable anyone to make S imilar flanges to

suit the spind l e ends of any other Cincinnati machines
A A
.
utt o rs
r ll our rb
arbors 1 diameter and larger have
C
‘ e .
standard keyways as listed in the table These are also the standard .
keyways used in cutters .
S t a n d a rd Keyw a ys f o r C u t t e r s an d A rb ors
Fi g . 80
u
D i a m e t er o f
i n C tt er , ch
H o le ( D )
I n es
Cutters S hould be held on the arbor by keys that are a good s i d e
A
fit in the keyways in both the cutter and the arbor The height of .
A
the key Should be a little less than twice so as to have t o p ,
c l ea ra n c e key that fits top and bottom like a wedge and not
.
on the sides is bad because it will roll and r uin the arbor and prob ,
ably split the cutter in two .

A T EA ISE
R T ON MILLING AN D MILLING MAC HINES 83
When heavy c utting is done there is always the danger that the
,
I
side pressure will cause the key even when properly fitted to c rush ,
in the side of the keyway in the arbor t is best to make the key
.
longer than the cutter This is especially true of narrow cutters such
.
as saws B y using a long key the pressure is distributed over a

.
greater area reducing the tendency to crush the keyway

, The .
better method of driving large narrow saws is through a flange

fitted with pins which will drive through holes drilled in the saws .
For especially heavy servi c e the special key and keyway Fig
, , .
8 1 was designed the idea being to substitute for the shearing

, ,
action O f the ordinary key a wedging action that would have no

,
tendency to distort either key or arbor The arbor is first flattened.
and then a standard S ize keyway is milled into it .
The keyway in the c utter is an arc of a circle and the key is

made o ut of a piece of round stock milled in on both sides and then
sawed apart lengthwise one pie c e of sto c k forming two keys
I
.
,
f for instance the driving pressure is from right to left the

, , ,
key will be forc ed over to the right and the flat portion of the key
pressed down on the flat on the left of the arbor This pressure .
being almost dire c tly downward there is practically no side pressure

, ,
and therefore no distortion of the keyway in the arbor can result .
This style of key has proven very satisfactory Cutters s o .
mounted can be readily removed after the heaviest milling .
HR BO R
Fi g . 81
84 THE CIN CINNATI MILLING MAC HINE C O MPANY
S t a n d a r d C u t t e r A r bo r s C a rr i e d i n S t o ck
Styl e A yl
St e B
St yl e C
yl
St e D
S ty lF
e
St l y e G
Fig . 82
.
St l
Mi
yl u e J
i ng C tt e r A r b ors
We carry in stock arbors as listed We no longer put tangs on .
arbors because tangs are not strong enough to do the heavy work
,
that is now being required of milling machines The small end O f .
the arbor shank is tapped 1 1 for drawing in bolt and a

”
5 -
8 ,
bolt long enough to reach through the spindle of the machine and
p
A
draw the arbor firmly into the taper is furnished as art of the ,
equipment O f every machine ll arbors 1 diameter and over are .

”
splined for standard keys .
r/ 08
18 and 18
09
1 and 2P l a in a n d U n i 7
ch h
v ersa l C o n e Ma
h
in es ; a l so N o 2 *
9
10
d
.
H ig P o wer w e n 11
h du d c u
-
S p i n l e e n d is 13
1 2 P l a in
”
41
ch
t re a e .
Man fa t r i n g 43
b
Ma i n e s u s e Ar
o rs N O S 4 1 a n d 43
. .
44
45
A T EA ISE R T ON MILLING AND M ILLING MA C HINES 85
S t an d a rd Cu t t er A r bo r s — C on t in u e d
NO
Pl
. 3
ain and
ig —o e r
n i ve r
H hUP w 16
18
-
-
0
C
O
O
d d
s al , N O 3 ain a n d Pl C
j
53
wh p d l
.
-
fi
U n i ve rs a s t a n a r l 55 C
j
h dd
-
fi
en S in e end is 556 0
j
-
' fl
j
t re a e 59 fi
h
j
57 fi
NOS 2 an d 3 H ig
P o we r P l
.
and ain
U n i ve rs a l NO 3 ,
P l a i n a n d U n i ve rsa l
.
C o n e and N O S 3
d d
.
a nd 4 P l a in a n d
h
U n i ve r sa l S t a n a r
w it flang e S in l e dp d
e nd
J "
rl 2 ,
A u t Om a t i c
. 24
it
fl a n g ed s i nd l e e n d
"
p
w h
.
23
25
26
66
67
N os 4 and 5 a in Pl 68
hl wh
.
a n d U n i ve r sa C o n e l 69
and ig Po w H 70
er
s in
t
p
M il ers
h dd e
r ea
end dl
en
is
e
77
78
71
75
76
73
90
91
N O S 4 and 5 a in 92 Pl
h P wPl
.
and U n iversa 93 l
H
ig 94 l
h
o er , a so -
NO 4 ain an d 95
d p dl
.
U
ni ve r sa C o n e it 96 l w
fl a n g e S in e en d 10 1 .
10 2
fu hdw h b
103 2
c ay
N O T E —N o 1 6-0 c ll
w hy dchd c llw h hf ll dw d dl d
an d No 23 are no t r nis e it a ea r i n g o ar .
b l ch c d th i b
. .
‘
W h i t is t o us e
7p
the ma i ne s w e om men NO 10
l c ll
en n e ess r a ar or on a r g er re s ar or
c c ti 6 .
h w S d d ch w h h d d dl d
in it sta n et s a s
S d d ch w h f l a d d l
o n ne on ar o o o s:
c ll
w
N o 3 C o n e T p e Ma i n es i t t r ea e s p i n e e n s u s e P
“ ”
-
et
achch ww hh flh dd d dldl d d cll l

o
c l
. . .
N o 3 H ig -P o e r a n d N O 3 ta n a r Ma i n es i t t re a e S p i n e en s , u se PP o et
d
. . .
N o s 2 a n d 3 H ig h - Po e r a n d N o 3 ta n a r Ma i n es it spi n
”
. ng e . e en s , us e P o e t.
No s 4 a nd 5 M i n e s i t t r e a e S p i n e e n s u se H
“ ”
. o et , .
N o s 4 a n d 5 Ma i n e s i t
“
sp in N co e t
"
. ang e e e n s use , .
86 THE C IN CINNATI M ILLING MACHINE C O MPANY
Ar bo r E q u i p m e n t s f o r Mi ll e r s are as F o ll o w s
Co n e Typ e M a c h i n es
-
Ar b I clu d d
or n e b
A r or S n t o n
A pp o va l
r
e
09 — 1 x 6
—
09 1 x 6
11 — 1
”
x 8
4 1— 1 x
1 1— 1
”
x 8
43 x
”
81 x 12
”
86 x 29
92 x 14
—
1 03 2
”
x 36
"
NO .
—
11 1
”
x 8
"
1 1— 1
”
No x 8 No 43 x
—
. .
” ”
N O 16 1
”
. x 10 NO 86
. x 29
N o 9 1— 1 4 —
”
1 12 N o 10 3 2
”
. x . x 36
Hig h -
P owe r M a c h i n e s
S in g le Pu l l ey wi th F l a n g e d S p i n d l e En d s
Ar b I cl ud d
or n e b
Ar o r S e n t o n
A pp ro va l
1 6— 1 x 10
”
86 x 29
3 Pl . S td . 81 x 12
”
86 x 29
”
81 x 12
86 x 29
4 Pl S td 81 x 12
”
—
. .
86 1 x 29
92 x 14
—
1 03 2
”
x 36
—
94 1 1
2
”
X 26
—
1 03 2
”
x 36
NO 16 1— ”
x 10 86 x 29
"
1 6 —1
.
” ” ”
No x 10 86 x 29
1 6— 1
.
”
NO x 10 86 x 29
1 6— 1
.
” "
NO . x 10 No . 86 x 29
NO 9 1
. x 12
”
NO —
1 03 2
”
x 36
”
N o 92
. x 14
”
No —
103 2
”
x 36
”
A T EA ISE
R T ON MILLING AN D MILLING MACHINES 87
Ch a t t er in g
P robably the greatest annoyance to whi ch users of Milling

Machines are subj ected is the pe culiar action called chattering
,
“
.
This is a condition of vibration that sometimes is so serious as to

affe c t the entire ma chine and frequently gives the impression that
,
it is caused by the driving gearing This is hardly ever the c ase . .
Chattering always starts at the cutter and whate v er v ibration may ,
result from it in other members is due entirely to this intermittent

motion of the cutter as it passes through the work and this motion
carried through the S pindle and gears causes a c orresponding and
g
exaggerated vibration in those members We c an not emphasize .
too strongly that c h a t t e r i n a l w a y s s t a r t s a t t h e c u t t e r although ,
the fault may not always lie in the c utter itself .
A A N
The action of the cutter at work is fully described in the chapter
on n nalysis O f the P rocess of Milling ow if the cutter can
.
,
spring away from the work or if the cutter is not properly sharpened
,
so that it alternately digs in and then S lides over the work again ,
it throws intermittent torsional strains on the arbor and these are

carried through to the gears .
When investigating the trouble it is well to make sure first that

the ma chine is in proper adj ustmen t espe c ially the spindle ; that ,
the arbor is properly fitted into the spindle and se curely held there ;
that the cutters and arbor supports are all as c lose to the end O f
p
the spindle as ossible so as to keep the arbor from bending and
I
springing away from the work ; that the bra c es are properly attached
and that the table saddle and kn ee gibs are properly adj usted
, f .
all these things are as they should be the cause of the chatter lies ,
either in the cutter the method of mounting the c utter t h e work

, ,
itself the method of holding the work or a c ombination of some or

, ,
al l of these
g
.
M o u n t i n t h e W o r k The work should be mounted so as to

.
bring the cutter as near the end O f the spindle as possible and then
the outer arbor support should be brought as c lose to the cutter as
the work will allow . Y
ou c an not get good results from a cutter
held in the middle of a 1 arbor 16 or 1 8 long supported at its
”
,
” ”
,
outer end only The arbor should be as large as possible The work
p
. .
must be securely held either in the vise or in a roperly designed

fixture and the fixture itself must be strong enough to hold the
,
work .
88 THE C IN CINNA TI MILLING MAC HINE C OMPANY
We have known of serious cases of chattering that were caused by

the Operator having failed to carefully clean the fixture before
I
inserting a new piece with the result that the piece rocked in the
fixture n another case pieces made on an automatic machine
.
,
were held in an excellent fixtur e made to fit the pieces and hold

the m securely but serious chattering resulted from the fact that
,
when adj usting the automatic machine which made the pieces ,
A
after the tools had been sharpened the pieces were not made to the ,
exact si z e as before and therefore did not fit the j ig , lthough .
they were held down tight enough for the milling operation they
Y
,
were not properly supported and this caused all the trouble et our .
S
customer did not suspe c t this because he felt sure that the pieces were
being turned to uniform size and shape ometimes the work itself .
is so frail that it springs under the c ut and this induces chattering .
When the arbor is of proper size and the cutters are properly
mounted ; the work of sufficient strength to stand the cut and
I
securely held in proper fixtures serious chattering may still result ,
because of a faulty c utter t is certain that if each tooth of a cutter

.
has an opportunity to take an even chip O f the same size there will ,
be no chattering provided that each tooth h as an opportunity to

take a chip of adequate thickness Cutters with teeth close together .
are almost sure to chatter because the chip per tooth becomes s o
small that it is practically impossible for each tooth to take a chip .
This condition is exaggerated if a slow feed rate is used For instance .

,
if we have an old fashioned cutter with 16 teeth feeding 0 0 8 per

-
,
.
”
I
revolution each one of these 1 6 teeth has a chance to take a maxi
,
mum chip only 000 5 thick t is not practical to gr ind a cutter

.
”
.
S
that will run as accur ately as this after it has been mounted on the
arbor ome of the teeth will therefore S lide over the work
. ven . E
with all the other conditions as they should be such a cutter is likely
p
,
to cause those minute vibrations which produce the high itched
I
singing e ffect .
A
f the feed in this case is increased to 03 0 or 04 0 per revol u . .
tion the difficulty is quite sure to disappear

, gain an entirely .
,
new cutter of corr ect design may cause chattering be c ause the
c utt erm a ker not knowing on what class of work the cutters will be
,
used usually grinds them with about 7 clearance This is about

,
°
.
S
5 0 % more than it should be for cast iron and about twice what it
should be for steel uch a cutter having too much clearance will
.
dig into the work and then spring back again at close intervals ,
causing the worst kind of chattering conditions .

90 THE C IN CINNATI MILLING MA CHINE C O MPANY
the chattering action A

ll of the above refers to Milling Machines
.
using cutters on an arbor .
When face mills are used particularly on Vertical Machines

, ,
too wide a cutting face on the teeth of the mills may cause chatter .
The actual work of a face mill is not done by the face edges of the
teeth but by the peripheral edges The face edges should therefore
,
.
,
not be too wide or they will have a dragging action on the work which
,
will induce vibration These face edges should be only about $5

.
”
wide and the balance O f the width of the blade S hould be ground
S
back towards the center O f the mill at an angle O f about 7 ( Fig °
.
ince chattering is really a synchroni z ing of the vibrations due

to the diff erent strains set up by cutting it will sometimes be found ,
A
effective to release some member as for instance one side of the
, ,
bra c e in order to break up this synchronism

I
,
nother point to .
be watched is the base of the fixture t is not enough for the .
I
mi l ling fixture to be strong enough to withstand the feed strain .
t ought to be heavy enough to absorb the vibrations as d is

cussed in the chapter on Milling Fixtures but it is proper to s ay ,
here that the provision of adequate end supports and clamps will
often do away with a good deal O f chatter This is particularly .
true O f pieces which stand high above the table in which case ,
the pressures or forces resulting from the cut have a great moment
around the knee .
P ER I P HER A L
ul
O t in e of a p ro
Fig
p l
er y . 83
s h arp e n e f
d c a e mi ll .
A T EA ISE
C HA P T E R V
A N ANA LY S I S O F THE PR O CES S O F M I LL I N G

The preceding pages describe the v arious types O f Milling
Machines available for the work to be done in most machine shops
and toolrooms Bearing these machines in mind we will proceed
.
,
with an analysis of the process O f milling and a dis c ussion of the

tools used.
Milling is the removal of metal by means O f a tool whi c h rotates

while the work is advancing or feeding in a direction at some angle
with t h e axis of the tool When we mill with an ordinary spiral
.
mill the axis O f the tool is the center line of the arbor or spindle and
,
the feed takes place at right angles to this axis When we use a .
face mill on a Vertical Machine the axis of the tool is vertical but ,
the table again feeds at right angles to the axis When we cut spiral .
gears the axis of the tool is the same as the axis of the spindle and ,
the table travels at an angle with this axis but this time it is not a
,
right angle .
Cl a s s i fi c a t i o n of M i ll i n g C u t t e r s
The tools used for milling are c alled milling cutters Milling .
cutters as we know them have a number of teeth but it is not abs o ,
l ut el y necessary that they

should have a large num
ber ; in fa c t some milling ,
S
cutters have only one tooth .
uch cutters are called fly

cutters .
With the exception of
A
fly cutters all cutters are ,
bodies of revolution .
body of revolution is a body

Fi g 84 with su ch a shape that it can
be formed in a lathe ; in other words a body which has a central
,
axis . The S implest bodies of revolution we know are cylinders ,

92 T HE C IN CINNA TI M ILLING MA CHINE C OMPANY
cones and spheres but a body of revolution may have any imaginable
,
section .
When such a body of revolution is provided with cutting teeth ,
it becomes a Milling Cutter When the teeth are on the outside of .
the cylinder as in Fig 84 it ,

.
,
is called a Spiral Mill When .
the teeth are On the base of

the cylinder as in Fig 8 5 it ,
.
,
is called a Face Mill .
When a face mill is of

small diameter and of rel a
t ivel y great length it is
E
,
called an nd Mill Fig 8 6 ,

. .
When the teeth are cut on a
A
truncated cone Fig 87 it is ,
.
called an ngular Mill ; and

when it is neither a cyl inder 977
-
14
nor a cone but h as an irreg ,
ular outline it is called a ,
Form C utter Fig 88 ,

Fi g 85
. .
.
Fr om these five fundamental forms of cutters a great variety of

shapes and styles of cutters for different purposes h as been developed .
Th e A c t i o n of a M i ll i n g C u t t e r
Most O f the difficulties in milling arise from the peculiar shape
I
of the chip The action of a milling cutter at work is therefore a
’
very important thing to keep in mind t will readily be seen with .
out much discussion that the chip as taken by an ordinary milling

cutter a formed cutter or an angular cutter is approximately of
, ,
the shape as shown in Fig 89 .

,
A
in the shaded portion The .
cutter enters at and leaves

at B When it enters the chip .
,
has no thickness theoretically ,
speaking ; when it leaves the ,
chip has its maximum thickness .
Fig 9 0 gives us a somewhat .
F i g 86
better idea of the shape O f such a
.
chip but whereas Fig 8 9 completely overlooked certain things ,

H
.
, ,
Fig 9 0 grossly exaggerates these same points

. ere a milling cutter .
A T EA ISE R T ON MILLING AND M ILLING MA CHINES 93
is shown with its c enter at 0 1 This same Cutter is also shown

.
with its center at O z, and it is supposed that the cutter h as

advanced in relation to the work from 0 1 to 0 2 during the time
it made one revolution ; in other words that this distance 0 1 0 2 ,
.
A
is the feed per revo l u
tion ( s a matter of .
fact it is not the cutter ,
H
which ad v ances but the ,
work owever the ef .

,
fe e t is the same and the

problem is S implified by
assuming that the cut
ter has advanced as
OSO I A
-
shown ) The cutter .
F i g 87 ,
which we hav e repre
sented here is supposed
to have onl y one tooth and this tooth is shown in the position it
would be in when the center of the c utter has arr ived at O
The line X Y shows the top of the work when rough The line
p
.
V W shows the top of that art of the work which is finished .
The curve Y V has been swept out by the tooth of the milling
I
A
cutter when its c enter was at O 1 t will be seen that the tooth
.
B C strikes the work at t h e point B and that this point B is a

I
,
little higher than the finished line VW t will also be seen that .
at this moment the c utting edge of the tooth advances not only
to the left but also slightly downward following the c urve B
, ,
R .
and that it h as to compress the metal of the work before it gets

to the vertical position .
This is not true cutting of

metal be c ause some of the
parts of the metal have to
I
be squeezed downward into
the work t is more like a
.
punching operation The .

5 I0 0 F
'
metal h as to flow away from

the c utter to give the cutter Fi g 88 .
a chance to enter .
Fig 91 gives a better and less exaggerated idea of what actually

.
I
happens . The distance 0 1 0 2 is more than is ordinarily used
in practice t is true that such an amount of feed or even more
.
, ,
is used per re v olution but not per tooth and we are assuming a cut
, ,
94 THE CIN CINNATI MILLING MACHINE C OMPANY
ter that h as only one tooth Fig 9 1 S hows that the tooth enters
. .
almost but not quite in a vertical position and that the height of
, , ,
this little hill as shown at B in Fig 90 is very small indeed and .

, ,
that therefore there is perhaps more O f a chance that the cutter

, ,
will slide over the metal to be removed than that it will penetrate .
—
This is actually what happens in practice the tooth does not
I
penetrate at once but slides over ,
the work .n doing so the cutter ,
and the arbor are lifted or sprung

up and put an increasing amount
of pressure on the work This .
Fi g 89
pressure finally becomes great .
enough to make the tooth O f the cutter penetrate into the metal .
From that moment on the chip is being removed .
There is something that makes the action described even more
H
pronounced and that is that a cutter is never absolutely sharp
,
.
owever nicely a cutter tooth may be ground it will be found that ,
its edge is slightly rounded when viewed under a strong enough
I
magnifying glass .
t is obvious that such a rounding helps the tooth to slide over

the work and delays the moment when the tooth actually begins
A
to penetrate .
ll these things are not visible to the casual observer because

the distances are so small and the cutter goes around so fast but an ,
analysis O f the cutter ac

tion shows that these o c
curre n ces must actually
take place .
Fig 9 2 shows the cut .
ter in various positions ,
w each position being ahead

of the previous one the
amount of the feed per
revolution This sketch .
again is much exag g er

ated to show that the
finished surf ace as obtained is not an absolutely smooth surface but ,
I
h as ridges running across We are all familiar with these ridges
F
. .
They determine the QUALI TY of the INISH of the milled piece t is .
plain that these ridges must be close together in order to give a toler
able finish For mere roughing operations the distance between the
.
,
A T EA ISE
R T ON MILLING AN D MILLING MA C HINES 95
ridges is of no importance but for finished work these ridges must

,
be close together and the better the degree of finish required the
,
nearer these ridges must be to ea c h other .
R evo l u t i o n
M a r k s These ridges are sometimes called tooth
.
I
mar ks .
—
They are not toothmarks at all they are revolution
”
marks . f these marks were really toothmarks then it would be ,
possible to get the ridges very close
H
together by simply putting more
teeth in the cutter owever as .
,
a matter of fact the number of ,
the teeth in the cutter does not

affect the distance between these
marks at all This can be proven .
by putting two cutters next to each

Fi g 9 1 .
other on the same arbor The cut .
ters should preferably be of the

same diameter and S hould have diff erent numbers of teeth They .
should be so placed that a pair of teeth are in line with each other
Then take a cut with both c utters at the same time over one piece
of metal and you will find two important things
I n the first place the two cuts side by side have exactly the same
.
influence I n the second place you will find that the ridges made by
number of ridges per inch S howing that the number of teeth has no
,
.
,
the two cutters are not in line with each other notwithstanding ,
the fact that we took care to line up one tooth of the one cutter
with a tooth of the other
R eferring again to Fig
.
The cutter positions are shown with

. 92 .
a distance between them equal to the feed per revolution We can .
calculate the height of the

ridges if we know the
diameter of the cutter and ,
the amount of the feed per

revolution and if we A S
,
S UME THAT THE RE IS O NLY

F ig 9 2
O NE TOO TH IN THE CU T
.
The calculations S how that for a 3 2 cutter and with a feed

”
1
TE R. ,
O f fifty thousandths per revolution the height of the ridge is 000 1 9 ,

.
,
or practically two tenths of a thousandth ; with a feed of thirty

-
thousandths it would be 0 0 00 7 or less than one tenth of a thous

,
.
,
-
a n dth ; with a feed of twenty thousandths it would be 0 00 0 3 or , .

,
96 T HE C IN C INNATI MILLING MACHINE C O MPANY
three hundredths of a thousandth ince there is only one tooth . S

at work it might be inferred that if there were ten teeth making
, , ,
the feed per tooth in the first instance not fifty tho usandths but ,
only five thousandths the height of the ridge would be much less
,
I
than But this is not s o because a milling cutter never ,
runs absolutely true n order that a cutter shall run true every
.
tooth of the 1 0 tooth cutter must be on exactly the same diameter

-
,
Fi g . 93
and describe a circle around exactly the same center and in order ,
to make this all perfect the cutter must be absolutely round ; its
hole must be absolutely round its hole must be absolutely con e en
,
tric with the outside ; it must be mounted on an arbor without

any clearance whate ver ; the arbor must be absolutely round and of
even diameter ; the center of the arbor must be absolutely in line
with the center of its taper ; the taper must be absolutely round and
must fit into the hole of the spindle which again mus t be absolutely
round ; this hole in the spindle m ust be absolutely concentric with
the bearing of the spindle ; this bearing must be absolutel y round
I
and must work without any clearance in the front box This is a .
condition which is impossible n a practical machine all of the

.
points mentioned here will have some variation T he highest de .
gree of workmanship woul d not avoid some little error in all of

these pla c es and it is fairly certain that the resultant error will be
,
an accumulation of some of these

I f the
.
su m of these errors is only two ten thousandths of an

inch ( and this would certainly be remarkably good workmanship ) ,
I
then the ridge made by the cutter will be two ten thousandths -
,
I
regardless of how many teeth are at work t is the swing O f the .
cutter which makes the ridge t is only then when the swing of
.
,
I
the cutter is less than two ten thousandths of an inch that the ,
ridge will be less deep t is clear therefore that the ridge we s ee

.
, ,
is a revolution mark and not a t o o thm ark

H owever
.
if we should increase the feed per revolution to 3 00

,
.
then the height of the revolution mark would be approximatel y

.0006 and in that case it is very likely that the number of teeth
,
in the cutter will reduce the size of the revolution mark Fig 9 3 . .
98 THE CIN C INNA TI MILLING MAC HINE C O MPANY
The work feeds against the cutter in the direction of the arrow t . I
will be seen at once that it is the peripheral edge of the tooth that
does the work taking away a slice every time a new tooth enters
, ,
as shown in cross section -

,
two slices having been
I
represented in the S ketch .
t is O ften thought that

the face edge of the
D i n z c vt o s o s n t o tooth of a face mill does
Fi g 9 4
the cutting but this is
‘
not so ; the sketch shows clearly that th e cutting is done by the

peripheral edge of the tooth .
Fig 9 5 is a top view of this same face mill with one t ooth
.
shown in position BW is the portion of the work already trav

.
ers e d by the tooth and X Y is the metal about to be cut off The .
I
cutter turns in the direction of the arrow and takes a slice as ,
A
shown in cross section n order to have a true cutting action
-
.
,
the line B of the cutter tooth must clear the already finished
portion and the line B C must
,
fall back of the center the angle 10

,
A
O BC being called the rake and ,
the angle B D the clearance

angle .These rake and clearance
angles may vary for different
kinds of material and different .
conditions but there must be

,
some clearance angle or else the

cutter will refuse to cut and if ,
we wish to cut with some degree

of e fli c iency there also must be
,
a rake angle else the metal will ,

Fi g 95 .
be pushed off ( the action of a

punch ) instead of being cut off ( the action of a kn ife ) .
The chips made by a properly designed face mill resemble planer

chips ; in fact it would be impossible to s ay what machine h as
,
produced the chip by simply looking at it ; but if the cutter is not ,
properly designed then the chips produced will be short and badly
,
—
crushed entirely diff erent from those produced by a proper planer
tool .
The power required to remove metal will be very much more

if the proper angl es are not provided and the l ife of the cutter , ,
A T EA ISE
R T ON M ILLING A ND MILLING MACHINES 99
and for that matter the l ife of the machine also will be very much
, , ,
A S A
shortened .
I
c t i on o f a id e M il l S ide milling cutter h as both peripheral
.
and S ide teeth t is a fa c t however that the greater part of the

.
, ,
S
cutting is done with the peripheral teeth unless the amount of stock ,
to be removed is very small Fig 9 6 S hows a ide M illing Cutter at

. .
work on a piece of material cutting on both periphery and side .
The amount of metal to
S
be removed is indicated
by the dotted lines up .
pose the thickness O f this

stock is 8 and the other
1 ”
dimensions a s given in
the figure ; at a speed of
7 0 feet per minute we ,
I
run 54 revolutions per
minute f the feed is .
very fast sa y 2 0 per , ,

”
minute there will be re ,
moved per revolution

o
f r and a s there are 1 1 ,
teeth each tooth h as a ,

F ig 9°
y
2 0
feed of 9 9 9 or p ra c t i
I
°
c all t wi ll be seen that at the bottom O f the groove and ,
for a width of the c utter acts exactly as a spiral mill ; that

is it does all the cutting with its peripheral teeth and removes a
comma —
,
shaped chip whi c h is thick at its thickest part For .
the other V8 of the width of the cut the cutter also acts like a
”
,
spiral mill the only differen c e being that here the cut is
, deep
instead of The surface traversed by each side tooth is
1
high and / 3 0 wide that is it is as wide as the chip is thick This
”
, ,
.
area therefore is of a square inch The surfa c e traversed by the .
peripheral edges of each tooth consists of two part s ; one part is

wide and high ; the other is 8 wide and
1 high The ”
.
first part has an area of x equaling 3 , square inches and the

5
,
other part has an area x equaling 17 9 square inch altogether

1 “
I
—
7 4 square inch therefore it traverses practically nine times as much
3
,
surface as a side tooth f the feed were less than 20 per minute
.
”
,
I
the surface traversed by the side teeth would be proportionately
smaller . t will be seen then that the S ide teeth perform only a
small portion of the total work and their only function is to clean ,
1 00 THE CIN CINNATI MILLING MA CHINE C OMPANY
up the side of the groove or slot thus acting merely in a finishing

,
capacity and at the same time of course provide space for the
, , ,
accommodation of the chips produced .
F i g 9 6- A
.
S
A N I L L U T R A TI O N O F L A R G E S ID E MIL L S IN A C T IO N
The mills in Fig 96 A are

.
-
in diameter and in combina , ,
tion with a pair of spiral mills 3 in diameter they take a cut

”
,
deep across these surfaces having a width Of 27 y, at a table travel

,
”
A
of per minute .They work at a speed of 1 4 r p m and r e . . .
move altogeth er O f metal per minute final finishing cut .
br Ing s the pieces accurate to within

The work is done on a N O 4 P lain . igh P ower design miller H .
-
4 74 L
Fi g . 9 6- B
1 02 THE CIN CINNA TI MILLING MAC HINE C OMPANY
matter on these machines because the main shaft always runs at ,
constant speed and the feed is driven from it There are some .
advantages in the O lder system used on C one D riven Machines -

,
but except in special cases these advantages are outweighed by ,
those Of the newer system reading in inches per minute as will be , ,
seen from what follows

L
.
Fe e d s i n T h o u s a n d t h s p er R ev o l u t i o n et us first con .
A
sider a ma c hine with feeds reading in thousandths per revolution .
ssuming a small end mill requiring a fast speed say 3 50 r p m , . . .
The finest feed available on a large C one D riven Machine is 0 07 -

.
per re v olution On some work this feed may be entirely too fast
.
N
for this small frail cutter , .
ow let us assume a large c utter requiring a S low speed sa y

, ,
14 r p m
. The coarsest feed is 3 0 0 per revolution and the fastest
. . .
,
table travel we can get at 1 4 r p m is 1 4 times 3 00 or per . . . .

”
minute which is entirely too S low in many cases These extreme

,
.
cases indicate the limitations of this system Most milling comes .
between these extremes and for the usual work the feeds provided
are entirel y satisfactory This system h as the advantage that it .
indicates at once the grade O f finish ; that is the distance between ,
revolution marks
I L
.
A
Fe e d s i n n c h e s p e r M i n u t e et us consider a machine with .
H
feeds in inches per minute ssume again a small end mill r unning .
3 50 r p m . The finest feed on Cincinnati igh P ower Millers is

. .
-
per minute This results in the present case in a feed of about

.
,
N
00 1 5 per revolution c ertainly fine enough for the frailest c utter
”
. .
,
ow assuming a large cutter at 1 4 r p m using the coarsest . . .

,
”
feed of 2 0 per minute We of course get a table travel of 20 per
”
.
, ,
minute which is a very satisfa ctory rate of production This system

,
.
H
also has the advantage of indi c ating at once the rate of production .
Cincinnati igh P ower Millers are all arranged with feeds reading
-
in inches per minute the feed box providing 16 changes ranging , ,
from 4 to 2 0 per minute

1 ” ”
I
.
n fl u e n c e o f Fe e d o n P r o d u c t i o n T he rate of production .
I
depends directly on the rate at which the work pas ses under the
cutter t follows therefore that the feed used S hould be as fast as
.
, ,
practical There are certain conditions which frequently arise in

.
practice which limit the rate of feed that can be used Quite O ften
,
.
I
the piece is of such a natur e that it can not be held rigidly in the
holding fixture n still other cases the piece itself may be too frail
.
A T EA ISE R T ON MILLING AND MILLING MA CHINES 1 03
to stand the pressure due to a heavy feed n such cases there are . I
only two things possible ; either reduce the feed ( table travel ) and
H
do the work slower or if the machine is cone driven reduce the
,
-
,
feed per revolution and incre as e the speed On a igh P ower .

-
Machine this latter result is accomplished by simply increasing the

speed of the cutter beca use this automatically reduces the feed per
,
revolution therefore producing smaller chips and consequently

H
, ,
less pressure against the work owever high speeds have a .

,
tendency to burn out the cutter and therefore if we want to increase , ,
production by increasing speeds we must do something to keep the ,
S L
cutter from burning This will be discussed more fully in the
.
chapter on tream ubrication

g g g S
.
R ou h in an d
Fi n i sh i n C u t s ome work is milled with only .
I
one cut to produce the desired surface Other work requires two .
cuts. n the latter case the roughing cut may be taken without
regard to the finish produced and the only elements to be con ,
s i d er e d are : the stren g th of the piece itself the power of the machine , ,
I
i t s ability to stand the strains and the condition of cutter arbor ,
and fixture .f only one cut is taken then the finish must also be ,
cons idered Using spiral mills end mills or formed mills a very
.
, ,
S
satisfactory commercial finish is produced with from 03 5 to 050 . .
”
per revolution uch a feed and often even higher feeds may be
.
,
used for surfaces which are bolted together and which are not r e
quired to be O iltight but for a great variety of work a finer feed is
, ,
necessary Work which must be scraped or which is finish ground

.
will easily stand whereas work which must have a high finish
and does not get any subsequent operation may require a feed as
low as 0 2 0 per revolution When very small end mills are used for
.
”
.
such work as die S inking and rounding out the ends O f keyw ays
, ,
and various other delicate operations a finer feed must be used , ,
not because of the finish but because O f the frailty of the cutter
,
.
The relation of feed to speed on a great variety of cuts in cast
S
iron and steel is g iven in the diag rams in the following chapter on
peeds O f Milling Cutters .
104 THE CIN CINNATI MILLING MACHINE C OMPAN Y
HAP T E V II C R
SPEE D S O F M I LL I N G C U TTERS
We are all familiar with the fact that if a piece O f work in a lat he
“
runs too fast the lathe tool will burn out This term burning out
,
.
”
is incorrect What is meant is that the tool becomes S O hot that the
.
,
temper of the extreme cutting edge is drawn out and this edge be ,
comes S O soft that it refuses to out further This holds true whether .
the tool is a lathe tool a planer tool or a milling cutter the only
, , ,
difference being that with the lathe and planer tool the work moves
while the tool is fed into it whereas with the milling cutter the ,
— —
A
condition is reversed the work is fed under the cutter while the
a
milling cutter rotates milling cutter is a complicated tool as

.
compared with a lathe or planer tool and we will therefore us e the

latter in our analysis of the action of cutting tools
Ac L
.
ti on Of e T o ol a When a lathe tool takes a chip

ath .
,
feeding s a y from right to left its front end is up against the finished
, , ,
part of the work its top face is partly covered by the chip as it
,
comes O ff the work and its left side is pressed against the work
,
trying to feed into it There is considerable pressure between the

.
work and the front edge heavy pressure between the top and the
,
chip and also heavy pressure between the left side and the work
,
.
I
Meanwhile the work is moving and this movement under pressure
causes friction and friction generates heat t can be easily seen .
under a magnifying glass that the chip as it comes O ff the work is

broken up into a great number of fine laminations which slide over
each other The breaking up of the chip and the sliding of the
.
laminations both generate heat

He g If a lathe tool takes a chip
.
—1 ”
a tin . deep with a feed of 32
per revolution the chip as it comes O ff h as a section much greater
,
A
than x and a different shape ; it is not rectangular but ,
I
triangular .ll this breaking up sliding and changing of shape , ,
causes a great deal of heat to be developed n fact much less than .

,
1 % of all the work done on a lathe is used for separating the chip
from the work and all the rest O f the work is spent in breaking up
,
106 THE C IN CINNA TI MILLING MACHINE C OMPANY
this extra work is converted into heat and this more than O ff sets ,
the favorable conditions under which a milling cutter works .
The speed O f a tool is limited by the fact that it gets so hot that
it loses its temper and this heat is developed by useless work being
,
done namely by bending and breaking up chips and S O on There

FF
.
, , ,
are TH REE DI E REN T ways by which we could speed up a tool .
One by finding some material of which to make the tool which

,
would not lose its temper no matter how high the temperatur e .
A
This was PA RTLY accomplished by the invention of high speed -
S
s teel .second way by making a tool of such S hape that it merely
,
separates the metal and performs no useless labor uch tools may .
A
be invented some day and in fact a lathe tool h as been made which
, , ,
will remove metal without breaking it up third way to increase .
I
the speed would be to carry off the heat as fast as it is generated .
f we can do this then it makes no difference how much heat is

,
developed by the action of cutting for all of this heat will be carried
,
o ff immediately and the tool will become no hotter Under such .
conditions as far as burning out is concerned A NY speed would be

, ,
permissible .
To O btain the very best results we should employ all three O f

these methods ; that is we should have the cutter made of some
,
material which will retain its temper even at a high temperature ;

it should be constructed in such a way that it does as little u nn ec es
sary work as possible and there should be means of carryi ng O ff
,
the heat as fast as it is generated Under these conditions we can

.
get the highest possible speeds

g S
.
B
W
C o n d i t i o n s D e t e r m in i n Pr o p er p e e d s IT IS I MP O SSI LE
F
.
I
TO S TA TE DE INI TELY A T HA T SPEEDS CU TTE RS SH OU LD BE RU N
B
.
,
E CA U SE THIS DEPENDS O N TO O MANY CO N DI TI O NS t depends in .
the first place on the kind of cutter in the second on the amo unt of,
A
material to be removed per minute and not only that but it depends , ,
on the relation between the depth of cut and feed cut of .
depth and feed per revolution can be taken at a higher speed

than a cut at a depth of and with a feed 0 1 3 per revolution
1 ”
,
I
though the amount of material removed per minute would be the
I
same in both cases t further depends very largely on the rigidity
‘
of the machine and the fixture in which the piece is held t depends .
also on the rigidity of the piece itself and last but not least on , , ,
how O ften we think it economical to regrind the cutter .
We can run at almost any speed if we are willing to regrind

A T EA ISE R T ON M ILLING A ND M ILLI NG MACHINES 107
I
the cutter every five minutes but this would not be economical , .
t is also possible to regrind the cutter only once every s ix months ,
but we would have to run s o slow that again this would not be
economical There is a point where we get the highest efficiency
.
and when a shop h as to mill a great number of pieces O f one kind .
a few figur es should be put on paper to determine which is the most

economical speed at which to run the cutter
I Sp A
.
en c e o f
nflu e e d o n Pr o d u c t i o n To illustrate : shop .
*
h as to mill pieces and employs two c utters for this purpose one
, ,
O f which is being reground while the other is in action We run at .
such a speed that it takes S ix minutes to mill one piece We will .
as sume that it requires three minutes to place the piece in the j ig
A
and remove it again 60 minutes to regrind a cutter and 4 0 minutes
, ,
to reset the machine while the new cutter is put in place ssume .
that the speed is such that the cutter must be reground after every
100 pieces We then have . minutes to put them in the fixture ,
minutes to mill them 600 to grind the c utter and 4 00 to s et the ,
cutter While the grinding of the cutter is being done the mill ing
.
,
still goes on so that though we have to figure in the labor cost of

,
grinding the cutter the milling machine is never standing idle

, ,
except during the time that we reset the machine for the new c utter .
The total time including sharpening and setting cutters for these
,
pie c es is minutes ( The machine time is minutes .
I
and the grinding time 600 minutes ) .
f we should run the cutter so much faster that the milling could
be done in five minutes instead O f six minutes per piece under those ,
L
conditions we have to grind the cutter more frequently than once
in every hundred pieces as in previous examples et us assume
,
.
that X represents the number of times we must grind the cutter per
I
hundred pieces then we would like to know h ow often we may
,
grind this cutter without losing time n order not to lose time we .
must mill all these pieces in minutes and we m ust ,
remember that if we grin d the cutter X times as often we also must

d p h llfuu d w h wp l f pc bl h u d ph c pl
,
l
*
d k
In
c or er to ee t is i s t ra t i o n a s s i m e as o ss i e, so t at th e ri n i e
l u ll h u chw k
i n vo
va e
ve
of
m ay
an o
not
’
r s
be
or
on
on
se
cu llu d wquh chl hu h u w lyk

th e
it
tt er g r i n er
the ag e
e
a t o r , i t is
a s t at
as s
of an
me
o
t
’
r s
at th e
or
on
o necuthe
ul pp ll
m i i ng m a in e
b
If
tt e r t h e m i i n g m a i ne
.
chb c u p p l d dlcu h p
, in the i
o
s t ra t i o n
er a t or a s o o es
i
th e
ass m es t h e
tt e r s ar
us e o f o n
ening , the
p h p
,
res
ll
c h i ne
t a
ch
e ars t o be e tt er ,
i s i dl e a nd mi lli n g p r oducti on s ufi ers

e a se
h
t he o
k
e ra t o r
ly c u u ly
’
is n o t i
Th e i m
e, bu t the mi lli n g m a
or t a n t t i n g i s t o ee
p bl
.
the m i ing m a i ne g o i n g a t t h e rig t r a t e , a nd as n e ar o ntin o s as
o ss i e .
10 8 THE CIN CINNA TI MILLING MAC HINE C OMPANY
I
reset the machine X times as often The cutting now takes place
.
in minutes t takes . minutes to put the piece in the

fixture ; X times 60 0 minutes to grind the cutter ; X times 4 0 0
minutes to reset the machine ; altogether minutes
I
.
X + 600 X = 1 0 0 0 0 Therefore X 2
,
. n other ,
.
words we may grind the cutter once for every 5 0 pieces The machine .
time in this case is minutes and the g rinding time may be

minutes .
This means if we reduce the cutting time from s ix minutes to
I
five minutes we may grind the cutter twice as often as before an d
,
not lose time .f we find that we have to grind the cutter less than
twice as O ften we would gain time but if we find that we have to
, ,
A
grind the cutter more than twice as O ften we lose time ,
.
The figur es show a rather striking result reduction of the

.
cutting time from six minutes to five minutes that is an increase , ,
I
in speed O f 2 0 would allow us to regrind the cutter twice as O ften
provided we had two cutters f we increase the cutting speed so
,
as to reduce the cutting time from six minutes down to four minutes ,
1 10 THE CIN C INNATI MILLING MAC HINE C O MPANY
chucking time and cutting time are different the value of X will ,
I
be differe nt also .
n o ur own practice parts are made in comparatively small

— —
lots several hundred at a time and we aim to use such a com
bination of feed and speed as will enable the cutter to stand up for
one complete lot of pieces without resharpening .
Ro uh
Fi g
g
C UT S PEED
.
in g
‘
99 .
Vs
”
S pi ra l Mi
d eep ,
lc
as t
s
ir o n .
Pra c t i ca l C u t t in gS
The diagrams Figs 97 to 1 0 9
peeds . ,
.
,
were developed from o ur own practice .
We make parts in comparatively small lots and plan our feeds

and speeds S O that a cutter will mill a complete lot without r es h arp
e n in g The l ife of the cutter is therefore a factor entering into
.
these curves They are applicable to modern machines equipped

.
with the latest design cutters and ample lubrication where lubricant ,
is used They do not show the maximum feeds and speeds that can
.
I
be used but are a s afe g uide for those wh o are responsible for pro
,
duction t is entirely practical to very greatly exceed these feeds

p
.
and s eeds on some work but if the equipment consists of the usual
,
form of standard cutter as found in stock it is necessary to reduce ,

A T EA ISE
R T ON M ILLING A ND M ILLING MAC HINES 111
the results shown by these speed curves a very substantial amount

before they can be applied
g gC I o S
.
R o u h in ast r n wi t h
M i l l s The diagram in Fig
pira l . .
9 7 shows cutting speeds and feeds when milling cast iron at different
depths O f cut with a 3 diameter cutter The variables are the depth .
of cut the fe ed in inches per minute and the cutting speed That
, , .
part O f the c urves sho wn to the ri ght O f the heavy verti c al line
60
C UT S PEED
uh
Fi g .
R o g i ng {
10 0 .
I '
g
S pira l
d ee p ,
Mi l l s
c as t iro n .
drawn at 7 0 feet per minute cutting speed represents good practice ,

.
S
The us e of th ese curv es will be evident from the following :
uppose we are to take a cut deep in cast iron and w ish to
run 80 feet per minute cutting speed The c urves will show that the
.
most efficient feed rate to be used providing the work and cutter
,
will stan d it is 22 per minute On the other hand suppose we have

,
”
.
,
I
a piece of work which we feel should go through the ma chine at a
I
feed O f 12 per minute . f the cut is again f g deep we may run as
i ”
,
fast as 88 feet per minute cutting speed t must be noted that the .
above diagram does not take into account that influen c e the diameter
1 12 THE C IN CINNATI MILLING MACHINE C OMPANY
of the cutter has on the permissible speed

” ”
t is good for cutters . I _
from 3 to 3 2 in diameter
1 .
The diagrams in Figs 98 99 1 00 and 1 0 1 shoul d therefore be

.
, ,
referred to for more exact results for cutters of other diameters

N
.
The curves in Fig 9 8 are bas ed on cuts 99 deep

.
1
ow assuming ”
.
,
I S
a cutter 4 in diameter and a roughing Out at 24 0 per revolution :
”
.
t will be safe to run the cutter 92 feet per minute imilarly the .
,
C UT S PEED
uh
Fi g
R o g i ng
. 10 1 . S pira l
d p c
ee ,
Mil l s
as t iro n .
curves in Fig 9 9 S how that under these same conditions and with a
.
cut deep the best cutting speed is 84 feet per minute

, .
Fig 100 shows that with a cut 3 5 deep the best speed is 7 6 feet
.
3 ”
per minute and Fig 1 0 1 shows that with a cut 4 deep the best
, .
1 ”
speed is 65 feet per minute .
These fi g ur es show a range in speed from 65 to 92 feet cutting

speed . G
enerally speaking 70 to 7 5 feet cutting speed is good
,
practice when milling a hi gh grade of cast iron such as is used in

-
,
the better class of machine tools .
T h e above cur ves are based on wide spaced wide angle cutters ,
.
1 14 THE CIN CINNA TI MILLING MA CHINE C O MPANY
equipment is in good order this feed rate will produce an excellent

,
finish
A .
ssuming again our 4 diameter cutter and a feed of 02 3 per .
re v o lution : Fig 103 shows that with a finishing cut

. deep it is ,
safe to run the cutters 1 3 0 feet per minute and Fig 104 shows that ,
.
for a finishing cut deep it is safe to run the cutters 1 2 0 feet

,
per m i nute .
IOO
CPI S PEED
F ig . 103 . S pi ra l Mi l l s
Fi i hi
n s ng 3 h
"
d e ep , c as t ir on .
p S
e e d s a n d Fe e d s f o r h e l l En d S
M i l l s The diagram Fig .
, .
105 shows curves based on good practice when using end mills
,
—
taking cuts from %3 to 1 6 deep in cast iron
3 " ”
n all of these cur ves . I ,
the depth of cut remains constant the variables being as before , ,
the feed in inches per minute the cutting speed and diameter of
,
the cutter and there is also the additional variable width of cut
, ,
.
We find from these curves that if we want to take a cut 2 wide

”
S
with a 3 diameter end mill we can run about 7 5 feet cut speed and
”
,
at a feed of 1 1 per minute”

hould we wish to take a cut 3 wide
.
”
,
with a diameter cutter we find that we can run practically

,
60 feet out speed and use a feed of 9 V2 per minute and so on

”
.
,
A T EA ISE
R T ON M ILLING AND MILLING MA C HINES 115
A very interesting additional feature these curves is found Of
below the 5 0 foot cut speed curve the application of which is as

-
,
S
follows :
uppose we are taking a cut 2 2 wide with a 2 2 diam eter
1 1 ” ” ’
cutter at 50 feet cut speed We c an feed safely

H
per minute
. . .
I
owever if for some reas on we should find it preferable to feed only
,
3 per minute then we can run 100 feet cut speed with safety n
”
.
,
the same way with a 3 / é diameter cutter taking i ts full width

1
,
”
,
I OO
Fig
F i i hi
n s
.
CUT S PEED
1 04
ng 3 5
.
1 ”
S pi l Mi
ra
d p c ti
ee , as
l s
ro n .
of cut namely 3 V2 the proper speed is 5 0 feet and the corresponding

”
,
feed is 8 / é
1 owever at
”
. H ,
per minute feed on this same cut

, ,
w e can with safety run 8 0 feet out speed and so on From this it , .
will be seen that all of the diagram lying above the 5 0 foot cut speed -
curve shows the relation between feed speed diameter of c utter , ,
and width of cut That part of the diagram which is below the 5 0
.
foot curve applies only to the maximum width that each cutter
can take it of course being clear that a 3 diameter end mill can not
,
”
take a cut greater than 3 wide This part of the diagram is useful
”
.
in showing the extent to which the cut speed may be increased when
THE CI NC INNA TI MILLING MAC HINE C OMPANY
the feed is reduced the diameter of the cutter and the width of cut
,
remaining constant .
This diagram is based on actual practice in our shop using ,
modern wide spaced shell end mills

-
For the O lder style of end .
mills as found in stock the values shown by these curves should be

,
reduced by 2 5 % to
k c
F ig . 10 5 . S l
W ID T H o r: CUT
uh l E d Mi
e
g hi g c t i
n
,
l s
d
g I
B ro en o r n e rs . Ro n , as ro n VJ f g - ’ ”
e ep .
H S
Fa c e M i l l i n C a s t r o n Fig 1 06 shows a s et of curves for
. .
igh P ower Face Mills and tandard Face Mills for both r oughing
and finishing cuts which have a width approximately equal to the
diameter of the cutter From these we find that at a feed of 1 2 ”
H
.
AS
per minute a igh P ower Face Mill can very safely run 62 f eet
cutting speed for roughing and 82 feet for finishing tandar d .
Face Mill that is one of the lighter design S hould run about 50
, , ,
A
feet cutting speed for roughing and 7 3 feet for finishing and s o on
t a feed of 8 per minute the speeds become for a
.
”
, igh P ower H , .
S
mill 68 feet for roughing and 89 feet for finishing and for a ,
tandard mill 56 feet for roughing and 7 9 feet for finishing

Sp g S S L
, .
i ra l M i l l in in t eel wi th tr ea m u br i c a t i o n Fig . .
1 07 is a general diagram based on cuts T E I 3

1 5 and M deep ”
,
” ”
,
1 18 THE C IN CINNATI MILLING MAC HINE C OMPANY
If we want to take a roughing cut at

A
per minute the diagram 16
shows at once that we can us e about 8 0 feet cut speed finishing .
cut at 1 6 per minute can be safely taken at 94 feet cut speed and
”
,
so on .
The separate curve at the left of the diagram applies to rough

ing cuts 4 deep and 6 or more in width These exceptionally
1 ” ”
.
heavy cuts of course can not be taken at such high speeds and fas t
Fi g
Ma ch i n er y .
C UT
10 7
s t ee
.
l St.
S PE ED
S pi r
re a m
al lub c
Mil l s
ri a t io n .
feeds For instance at a feed

.
,
Of 12 per minute the cut speed
should not be more than 60 feet .
Fig 1 09 is again based on modern cutters supplied

K e yw a y i n g . .
with ample lubricant and milling nickel steel drop forgings N .

,
.3 0 to 4 0 carbon 40 to 60 Chr and also when milling the grade

.
,
. . .
,
of machinery steel known as hub stock There are two sets of .
curves shown We will first consider the curves based on a 2 2

.
1 ”
diameter cutter This is a cutter of our latest design as described

.
,
in the chapter on that subj ect and it will be seen that with a ,
feed of 8 per minute a cutting speed of 3 0 feet can safely be used

”
,
in chrome nickel steel and in hub stock a cutting speed of 7 3 feet

,
A T EA ISE
R T ON MILLING A ND MILLING MA CHINES 1 19
-
is about right With cutters of the O lder design these results

.
S hould again be redu c ed .
The other t wo curv es whi c h refer to a special staggered tooth

,
cutter are based on the us e of the cutter sho wn in Fig 1 10 This is

, . .
I
a cutter 4 in diameter f g fa c e with inserted teeth as S hown
i
,
”
, ,
.
ts constru c tion makes it possible to take advantage of the best

cutting angles and it will be noted that the teeth are far apart and
70 80
Fi g
C UT S PEED
10 8 F c ch ll y
a e Mi s
u
. .
St l cee ast in g s a n d m a i n e r s te el .
Wi d t h o f c ut , to the c
d ia m e te r o f t h e t t er .
I
each tooth removes a chip which is only part of the full width of
the cut t therefore has not only a free cutting action but the chips
.
,
are entirely free to get out of the way throughout all stages of the
cut
R
.
eferring to the diagram it will be seen that at 8 per minute

,
feed this cutter mills chrome nickel steel safely at 1 02 feet c utting
speed and a corresponding increase over the other c utter when
,
milling hub stock These c urv es and this c utter are shown to indi
.
cate what was meant in a preceding paragraph which stated ,
that for special cases the speeds and feeds given in these curv es
,
can be very greatly ex c eeded .

The Cincinnati Milling Machine Company recently carried out

extensive experiments to determine maximum cutting speeds that
could be taken with a modern milling machine equipped with
proper cutters and provided with ample cutting lubricant or coolant
properly applied Machinery steel was cut at speeds of 4 0 0 to 4 5 0
.
feet per minute when taking cuts not deeper than M 2 50 to 3 50 ”

,
feet per minute when taking cuts M deep and keyways 5M wide ”
,
”
and 8 deep were milled at a cutting speed of 4 0 0 feet per minute

3 ”
.
60
C UT 5 PEED
Ma chi
Fi g
n er y .
s t ee
109 .
l St
.
K e yw a yi n g
re a m u
l b ic
r a tio n .
N ickel steel heat treated was milled at 1 5 0 feet cutting speed

,
-
, ,
taking cuts 4 wide 7 52 deep

3 ”
,
”
.
Vanadium steel of great hardness was milled at a cutting speed

of 190 feet per minute .
Tool steel carbon such as is used for certain classes of

, ,
III S
reamers was milled at a cutting speed of 200 feet per minute The
,
.
L
results O f these tests are given in detail in Chapter V on tream ,
ubrication
S S I
.
e Pr a c t i c a l
af p e e d s n general practice the following
.
cutting speeds c an be safely used with modern cutters and an ,

12 2 THE CIN C INNA TI MILLING MA C HINE C O MPANY
l u
a
Fi g . 110 . A dj us ta b l e Inse r te d T th Soo o tti n g C tte r
(P t e nt a ppli d f
e ) or
Th en there is also the legitimate wear on the cutter caused by

the edge rubbing over the work and the pressure of the chip against
the teeth T his wear is not grea ter w ith f ast than with slow speeds
‘
.
,
but if with slow speeds the cutter will be dulled in two days with
, ,
twice the speed it may become dulled in one day The AMO U N T .
of work performed by the cutter will be the same for the same amount
of wear but the TI ME re quired for doing it with fast speeds will be
,
very much less than when slow speeds are used

A
.
For example : ssuming a piece of work that can be milled at
N
10 0 rev and that the feed per re v olution S hould be
.
,
T he
resultant table travel will be 20 per minute ow if w e run the ”
.
,
cutter 5 0 re v and us e the same feed rate the table feed will be 10
.
,
”
pe r minute only one half as fast as before The cutter will be

-
.
,
doing only one half as mu c h work and will last twice as long
-
.
On the other hand if we feed 10 per minute at 5 0 revolutions

,
”
and then increase the speed to 100 revolutions but do not increase ,
the feed production will not be increas ed and the cutter will theo
, ,
re t ic all y last only half as long when milling the same number of
,
pieces because the cutter makes twice a s many chips and therefore
,
comes in contact with the work twice as often since the chips are
I
only half as big as before S ome data confirming this are given in .
the next paragraph N CREASING THE SPEE D AL O NE DO ES NO T

.
INCREASE P RO DU CTI O N
L g I S
.
C u t t er s Wh e n M i l l i n C a s t r o n
if e of ome very valu .
able experiments were made by the Cincinnati Milling Machine

Company on the e ffect of cutting lubricant on the life of the cutter
when milling cast iron The result of these tests is shown in the .
ac c ompanying table The cast iron bar milled was in each case
.
A T EA ISE MILLING M ILLING MA HINES
R T ON AND C 1 23
36
”
long A ll c uts w re taken on s c a e The c utter us d
. our e l . e was
standard slotting c utter but with only one tooth operating all the , ,
other t eeth having b een remo ve d

A
.
—
Cutter 5 diameter ,
”
M ”
fa c e —
rbor 1 1
p
.
—
S peed of cutter 7 2 r . . m . C ut— 3
35
”
deep , wide .
E ff e c t s of Use of L u br i c a n t and t h e S i ze o f C h ip on th e Li fe
of a Cu t t er Mi l l in g Cast Iron
Fd cd W h To t a l
D is ta n e
To ta
ear o f
l
of
W h
T o ot
ear
h Sh p d l
ee
Tra ve l e ks
”
p er To ot p er 1 00 Re m ar
To o t per ar ( Ra i a ) Traverse
c ui n g
3 -a 5 0069 Lub c ri an t . No
BB cc
B c
Lu b c
. . ra e
3 -b 5 0069 D ry No
B c
. . . ra e
3 -c . 0 1 47 ri an t . No ra e
3 -d 0 147 D ry No
Lu c WW hh BB cc
. . ra e
3 -e 0 14 7 00 138 bri it
Lub c
an t .
WW hh BB cc
. ra e
3 -f . 0 14 7 0009 2 D ry . it ra e
3 g 5 0069 00 254 r i an t . it
WW hh BB cc
-
ra e
3 h 5 0069 00 277 D ry it
Lu b c
-
. ra e
6 i 2 25 03 125 000 23 D ry it
BB cc
-
. . ra e
6 j 2 25 03 1 25 00 0 12 5 ri a n t . it
L b c
-
. ra e
6 m
-
1 . 0625 0 147 000 84 D ry . ra e s
6-n 1 0625 0 14 7 00 1 5 u ri an t . r a es
T he above tabulation shows som e v ery interesting things .
For instan c e c uts a b c and d were taken w ith the outer end Of
p
, , ,
the arbor su port e d from the o v erarm but not t ied to th e knee ,
with bra c es Th is th erefore allowe d a slight amount Of v ibration

.
, , ,
not suffic ient to be noti c eable but it ne v erthel ess existed and had ,
i ts effe c t on the l ife of the c utting edge of the c utter C ompar ing .
c ut c for instan c e with cut e shows that with the bra ces the wear
, , ,
I
on the cutting edge was not quite o n e half as mu c h as without -
bra c es n the sam e way c ompar ing c ut a with c ut g an impro v e

.
, ,
ment is again shown when the bra c es ar e us ed .
L
We will consider here only those c uts taken when the ma c hine ,
was e quipped with bra c es et us first c onsid er th e e ffe c t of l ubri .
y
c ant CutS e and I S how that there was less wear when running
.
I
dry while cuts g and h S how slightl in fa v or of lubri c ant T his
p
, .
y
is also true when we c ompare i and j n the same way c om ar in g .
,
m and n th e res ult seems to indi cate that it is b etter to run dr

,
on c ast iron .
1 24 THE C INC INNA TI M I LL I NG MA CHINE C O MPAN Y
The conclusion to be drawn from all this is that there is no ,
H
advantage in using lubricant when milling cast iron if we consider ,
alone the question of the life O f the cutter owever it has been .
,
very cl early demonstrated that when milling frail pieces at a high

speed rate there is a decided advantage in using fast feeds and l ubr i
,
cant when milling cast iron parts of this character because of the
, ,
I
cooling effect of the lubricant which prevents the heating of the ,
piece and in consequence warping out of shape t must be noted

,
.
,
however that we do not recommend this because whenever it has

, ,
been tried on manufactur ing O perations it was found that the

lubricant carried small particles of iron into the bearings of the
machine and caused suCh rapid deterioration that it w as not
,
practical to keep the machine in proper adj ustment to do rapid ,
accurate work
E S L E
.
ff e c t
o f i ze o f Ch ip o n i f e o f C u t t er ven more interest .
ing than the effect of lubricant is the e ff ect of the si z e of the chip as
shown by these figur es Comparing cuts e and g we find that with
.
a feed O f 1 the wear on the cutter is 00138 whereas when feeding .

,
I
M
”
the wear on the cutter is 00 2 54 when the distance milled in
.
each case is n other words feeding M per minute the cutter ,

”
,
came in contact with the work twice as often in milling a distance

of as it did when feeding 1 per minute and the wear on the ”
,
A
cutte r was approximately twice as g reat .
gain compari n g cuts h and i Cut i was taken with a feed 4 M .
times as fast as out h while the wear on the cutter at the slower
,
feed per 100 of traverse was nearly 10 times as great as the wear
”
on the cutter at the faster feed .
These fi g ures indicate quite clearly that the dulling of the cutter
is in direct proportion to the number of c ontacts which the cutter
tooth makes with the work in a given length O f travel We believe .
that an entirely safe conclusion is that the wear per contact that is ,
to s ay the wear per chip produ ce d is approximately the same for

, ,
I
different sizes of chips when milling cast iron within the practical
limits of milling n other words if we use a chip per tooth of
.
,
the cutter will make as many chips and in consequence will be

dulled to the same extent when milling a piece 100 long as it will ”
A
when taking a chip 0 14 thick milling a piece twice the length
.
”
, ,
that is a piece 2 0 0 long

, ll this shows the desirability of using
”
.
the fastest feed that other conditions will permit .

12 6 THE CIN CINNATI MILLING MAC HINE C OMPAN Y
to apply artificial means for c ar rying away the heat as fast
t un i t y
as generated and thus keep the cutter cool at high spee ds .
The C incinnati Milling Machine Company has c arried on a

long series of experiments to determine the most effe ctive method
of applyi ng cutting lubri c ant and the extent to whi ch speeds and ,
therefore production c an be increased by th e us e of a su ffi c ient

p p
, ,
v olum e of lubricant roperly a plied

I
.
t was found that the natur e of the lubri c ant does not aff e c t the
, p
cutting speed rov ided the quantity is sufficient t was further . I
found that in the maj ority of c ases the quality of finish is e qually
good with the cheaper c ompounds as w ith ure lard oil when suf p ,
fic ientl y large quantities of lubricant ar e used .
y
The speed at whi c h it is possible to run th e c utter depends
p p
y
rimaril upon the v olum e and method of ap li ca tion of th e l ubr i
c ant The average small stream as usually rovid ed is b no
. p ,
m eans suffi c ient to s e c ur e ample cooling Af ter num erous trials .
we d eveloped a system whi c h deluges the c utter and work with
y
lubri cant and as a result we are able to gre atly increas e th e sp eeds
p
, ,
o ver thos e formerl attainable and still kee cutters and work ,
c oo L
p
A L A I p
These ex eriments formed the subj e c t of an editorial in the
merican Ma c hinist by the editor Mr
A
“
P lford ,
”
t ap eared , . . . .
in the issue of pril 16 1 9 14 and as it gives important data on th e

p p
, ,
e x erim e nts as r e c ord e d by an im artial O bs erv er the e ditor ial is
p
,
reprodu c ed on the followi ng ages .
E di tori a l from the A meri can Machi n ist A p ri l , 1 6 , 1 91 1.
P rog ress cutting metals as in all other lin es of

in th e art of ,
y
h uman end e av or has been a S low ad v an c e with o cc asional sudd en
p , ,
ronoun c ed j umps followed b the same slow advan c e One su c h

p p
.
,
A
j um c ame in 1900 with the announ c ement of the de v elo ment of
p
,
high speed ste el This was first res ente d to the ME RI CAN MA
A
-
.
’
CHIN IS TS read ers in the issu e of ugus t 9 1 9 00 The featur e was high
p
.
,
s eed The editorial note said :

.
T he appearanc e of a large lathe tur ning a 1 7 ste el shaft at this

p p
I
s eed ( 1 50 feet er minute ) is nothing l ess than startling .
T his art icle belie v e is the announ c ement of th e beginning

, ,
of another j ump in this cur v e of progress at l east as it aff ects multi ,
toothed c utting tools T he startl ing featur e as in the cas e of high

p p p
.
.
s e e d steel is the sp eed , Tests h ave (s hown eri h eral c utter .
A T EA ISE
R T ON MILL I NG AND M ILLING MACHINES 1 27
p
y
s ee ds and work feeds in steel som e eight to twelv e tim es greater ,
than thos e used in ordinar milling pra c ti c e .
n u u f w
m te Wor k eed 30M p er m i n t e D e p t h o f
’
u
Mi ll er po n h i ch h ig h p ee d m il l ing tests
-s
Fi g .
w
111
c ut
e r e r un .
Vg
'
l
'
C ut t e r sp eed s 500
Mat eria , m a i ne r ch .
yr. p.
s t ee
m
l
.
c b
ar
’
458 p e r
on ,
a
. . . ,
5 m ang a nese .
V
EX
THE C INCINNATI M ILLING MA CHI NE C OMPANY S P RO GRESS I E ’
PE RI MEN TS Th e c onditions whi c h hav e made these tests pos

.
sibl e are th e dire c t result of the work that the Cin c innati M illing
h
C i ps re m o v d by
e c
o n e c ut a r oss mil
Fig
d-
. 1 12
st ee l bl ck 5 b
o , y s h o w n i n F ig . 1 11
p y
.
p
y I A
Machine Com an C in c innati Oh io has done dur ing t h e ast six
, , ,
or eight ears n 1 90 8 the ME RICAN MACH I NI ST showe d th e line

. .
128 THE C IN CINNATI MILLING MACHINE C O MPANY
of Cincinnati H
igh P ower Millers -
ince that time this line has . S
A A
undergone progressive improvement particularly in the selection ,
S AL L
of better materials t the P ittsburgh meeting of the merican
E
.
ociety of Mechanical ngineers in 19 1 1 D e eeuw until ,

. .
,
A
recen tly chief engineer O f th e company presented a paper on Milling
E
,
Cutters and Their fficiency feature O f this was data on the use
.
of cutters with wide spaced teeth This paper was abstracted on .
L S
pages 7 53 and 7 87 of Vol 3 5 . .
ast year was shown this firm s emi automatic Miller which ’
-
,
was adapted for much higher cutting speeds and table feeds than
were in common use for that general typ e of machine when it was
designed .
These developments s e t up the conditions of powerful heavy ,
machines an extensive use of cutters with wide spaced teeth which

,
-
,
permitted increased feeds and experience with feeds and speeds ,
somewhat higher than average practice From this foundation .
experiments were begun with much higher work feeds and cutter
speeds .The illustrations Figs 1 1 1 to 1 2 3 inclusive S how in
, .
, ,
graphic fashion some of

the results D etails of the
.
system have been made

the subj ect O f patents .
I
To show what these
results are can do no
,
better than to give the
I
records of the tests th at
have witnessed The .
machine upon which the

high speed tests were run
-
is S hown in Fig 1 1 1 This

H
. .
is a N O 5 .igh P ower -
Cincinnati Miller driven

by an independent motor ,
with a speed of the con

S t a nt S p e e d pulley 5 0 per
-
c ent greater t h a n t h a t f O I N
F i g 113
5 P i H ig h —P
S t m L b i c ti
Mi l
‘
h i gh d c ti
o . l a n
. .
o er
a u
w l w
re
er s
r
o
a
n
on
oo , o n a n er
d p ip an e”
which the machine was
designed The steel cut was a mild machinery steel
. carbon , ,
manganese having an ultimate tensile streng th of from

,
to pounds per square inch The cutters were all of high .
speed steel .
1 30 THE C INCINNATI MILLING MACH IN E C OMPAN Y
A p
py y
TEST N O 6 featur e of all the pre c eding tests was a c o ious
I
. .
sup l of lubri c ant to c arr Off all the heat n ea ch case as soon as .
the c ut was fin ished c utter and work were felt and neither showed
p
,
an ap re c iable r ise in t emp erature .
To S how the eff e ct of c utting dry the blo c k and cutter of T est
N O 1 w ere repla c ed and a c ut started wi th a d epth O f M f ee d at
”
p p p
.
,
2 0 per minute and a c utt er s ee d of 87 r m peripheral s eed

”
, . . .
,
M D i am e te r Mi l l
yl wd H e li ca l C utt er
ul
'
Fig 1 15 3 Fi g 116
wd u
. . . .
C ut s p d
ee 77 r p m C ut d ee p b 5
'
3M
'
di am ete r , 6
'
f d
i e , ee 1 6 p e r m i n te
'
F d 17 i l l h
. . .
i e. ee
9 '
p er m i n te l bs te ns i e Ma te r a l bs t e nsi e s t re ngt s t ee
h l 1 5
d p
. . . .
,
st re ng t st ee . sp ee , 72 r. . m .
80 feet per minute This c ut was started dry and the cutter showed
p
.
distress after running about 2 1 it was sto ped and the edges ,
of the t eeth were found to be blued

A
.
s a c omment on the length of life of some of the cutters working
N
under these c onditions a record is given of a c utter of the same
p I
,
des cri tion as the one used in Test o 5 run to destru ction t
pp
. .
,
milled not including th e cutter a roa ch This is e quivalent

p
.
to c om letely c utting 22 3 gears 1 fa c e 7 pit ch 3 0 teeth The ,

"
, , .
cutter began to S how distress at about the four th cut from the last
p
,
and from this point to destru ction the breakdown was ra id D is .
counting these last three or four cuts th e c utter milled the e quivalent ,
of 2 2 0 gears of the dimensions specified .

R T ON AND C 13 1
S TR EA L UB I A I N
M c op ous or deluging of cutter and
R C T O . Th e i use
work with a lubricant or c oolant h as been mentioned This is .
A
arranged for on Kne e and C olumn T yp e Ma chines as shown in Figs
p
.
,
1 1 1 and 1 13 round the miller table is la c ed a light steel frame

I
.
to confine the li quid n the base is set a c entrifugal pump c apable

.
of deli vering 1 2 gallons per m inute T his is some 10 times the .
p y
quantity delivered by the geared pumps ordinarily used The .
reserv oir ca a c it is large and in this the pump is submerged so , ,
Ma t er ia l
u
Fig . 117
ch i yfull d l ch
Fi g
Mach i nery
. 118 .
lc u
S e m i auto m a tic Mil l
d d l tti
er
u
u u
ih
- ma ner s t ee 7 p it st ee t ter s t a n ar s o ng t
y p e
hi g c tt h pt h
,
h h h pc d c
.
u
ia m e ter ,
’
C ut o f too t
'
n er , 12 t e e t e wi t s ar o r n ers 5 3 25 tti ng
gp d 2 18 p
as
d F d p d F d
. . .
m C t t e r 3M m e ter 112 p er m i n t e
” '
ee r. . . ia . ee s ee . ee .
'
1 12 p er m i n te .
that there is no suct on piping or necessity for priming large i Th e

capa c ity p ro v ides enough fluid so that an appreciable a c cumulation
.
of heat is av oided I
n addition the surf a c e O f the table over which
.
,
th e lubri c ant spreads in a wide sheet a cts as a means of c ooling .
The pump discharge under c onsiderable pressure passes through a

flexible hose to th e cutter or c utter hood hav ing in th e line a large , , ,
qui c k a cting gate valve From the table a large flex ible steel tub e
-
.
retur ns the lubri c ant to the machine base .
The preferable means O f distributing the lubri c ant to the c utter
y
is by m eans of a special cutter hood T h is is shown in Figs 1 1 3
I
. .
,
I
1 14 1 17 and 1 1 8
,
t c ompletel surrounds the c utter . .
T he advanta ges of the hood are principally three t c onfines .
the large flo w of lubri cant dir ectly to the c utter and work thus ,
se curi ng an i nv erted bath or flowing stream and making all of th e

13 2 THE CIN CINNATI MILLING MA CHINE C O MPANY
lubricant do its share in cooling t washes the chips from the . I

teeth of the cutter so that they can not be carried back into the cut ,
thus clogging it dulling the cutter and marring the finished s urface
I
, .
I
t prevents the splashing O f lubricant when used in large quantity .
ncidentally it is also a milling cutter g uard guarding against

, ,
accidental injury to the operator

EFF S LB H S I
.
E CTS OF TREAM U RI CATI O N A ND IGH PEE DS t is .
instructive to consider in brief fashion the possible effect of these

high speeds and lubrication upon the various limiting factors that
enter into milling m
I
achine practice .
P ower of machine : ncreased speed in milling means a slightly

increased power consumption per cubic inch of metal removed .
Tests made by the Cincinnati Milling Machine Company indicate

that an increas e of 100 percent in speed means an increase O f about
1 0 percent in power consumption per cubic inch of metal removed .
A
Thus increased speed means more powerful machines .
bility of the cutter to remove metal : The ability O f a cutter to

cut is increased with an increase of speed the feed per minute ,
remaining unchanged for the reason that the chip taken by each
,
tooth is decreased This means a decrease of strain wear and heating

.
,
effect The total or final heating effect is increased but this can be
.
,
S
counteracted by copious lubrication .
i z e of arbor and its spring : The si z e of the arbor is one of the

limitations in present milling practice being governed by the S i z es ,
of commercial cutters The feed per minute is a measur e of the

.
strain on the arbor ; thus an increase of speed giving a lessened ,
pressure per tooth reduces the arbor strain and tends to do away
’
with the limitation O f arbor siz e To illustrate if a given s et of.

,
conditions permit of a feed of 2 per minute then by maintaining

”
p
,
this rate er revolution but multiplying the revolutions per minute

,
by 1 0 we get a permissible feed O f 2 0 per minute with the same

,
”
H
arbor stress .
eating of the cutter : The heating of the cutter is O ften THE

limitation This can be removed by using a quantity of lubricant
.
or coolant sufficient to remove the heat as soon as it is released and

keep cutter and work cool .
Wear of the cutter : The wear of a milling cutter is dependent

upon the number of linear inches milled if the depth of cut and feed
per revolution are kept constant Thus increase of speed increases
.
,
wear per unit of time When the speed is sufficiently high so that
.
by the aid of c opious lubrication the chips are completely washed

134 THE CIN CINNATI MILL ING MACH I NE C OMPAN Y
be redu c ed H
owever th e frailty of fixture or work revents th e
.
, p
use of qui c k a cting clamping d evi c es as e cc entrics cams le vers
-
, , ,
and the like Thus if the pressure per tooth in cutting is redu c ed
.
, ,
the pressure re quired for holding may be reduced and clamping ,
devices may be made to operate more quickly T hus the influence .
S
of speed in this respe ct should be to in c rease produ c tion .
S pring in the ma chine : The ar guments presented under pr ing

”
in the fixtur e apply here
I
.
D istan ce of re v olution marks on the work : t is claimed that

output today is controlled in perhaps 9 0 per c ent of c ases by the
distance between re v olution marks P olishing or some foll owing .
A
operation limi ts this distan c e These marks must be near together .
,
or th e following operation c an not be properly p e rformed n .
in c rease of speed with unchanged feed bringing these marks closer ,
S
together is one O bvious remedy
, .
moothness of c ut : One feature in high speed milling is the -
throwing away of the c hips which resembles nothing so much as ,
y
the throwing Off of shavings and chips in planing wood T his .
c omplete removal of the chips both b the effects of spee d and ,
c opious flooding with lubri c ant do es away with the grinding eff ect ,
I
on the finished surf ace Thus with a fixed distan c e between revol u .
,
tion marks high speed tends to give a smoother surfa c e

, t is .
possible that th e flyw heel effe c t of t h e rapidly rotating parts c on

n e ct e d to the arbor influen c es this a c tion .
Cleaning fixtures and work : The washing effect of the lubricant

on the work and fixture when the lubricant is used in great quantity ,
and under c onsiderable pressure may aid in in creasing production

H IGH SPEE
.
,
C HIPS F M ILLING The illustrations Figs 12 1

RO M -
D .
,
.
,
1 22 1 2 3 S how chips from high spee d milling and the notes below
, ,
-
,
A
indi c ate the c onditions under whi c h each was produ c ed
p
.
Fig 12 1 .
( ) F r om machinery .ste e l c utter s iral mill 3 1
2 ,
”
diameter by 6 long 1 M arbor C ut 5 wid e M deep c utter

S
” ” ” ”
,
.
, ,
spe e d 5 0 0 r p m feed S OM per minute

A
tream lubric ated ”
p
. . . . .
,
( B ) C onditions as for except d e th of c ut

( C ) Fr om ma chinery steel c utter heli c al m ill 3 M diameter
”
, ,
6 long 3 teeth 1 M arbor c ut 5 wi de de ep C utter speed

” ” ”
p
.
, , , ,
5 0 0 r p m feed S OM er minute stream lubri c ated

. . .
,
”
,
.
( D ) Conditions as for C ex c ept d epth of c ut M

”
E p
.
Fig 1 22 .
( ) Conditions as for C ex c e t depth of cut
.
cutter speed 8 6 r p m feed 2 0 per minute . . .

,
”
.
A T EA ISE R T ON MILLING AND MILLING MACHINES 13 5
y
F
( ) F r om ma c hinery
steel keywa c utter
, ,
diameter 1 fa c e 1 2 ar1
,
”
,
”
bor c ut a slot 1 wide 1 6 —

3 ” ”
, ,
deep C utter speed 5 0 0 r

p p
. .
m feed
. .
, er min
ut e S tream lubri c ated
G
. .
( ) C onditions as for F ,
ex c ept depth of cut M ”
H
.
Fig 1 2 3 ( ) From ma. .
ch inery steel 7 pitch spur ,

-
gear c utter 4 diameter ,

”
,
cutting full depth Cutter

p
.
S
Speed 2 2 0 r m feed 1 12 . . .
,
per minute tream l ubr i .
ca t e d
I A
.
( ) C onditions as for
except depth of c ut 1 5
S
c utter spe ed 86 r p m feed . . .
,
20
”
per minute tream .
lubri cate d The removal .
of metal was at the rate O f

3 1 c ubi c in c hes per minute
I
.
( J ) C onditions as for
except that the c ut was
mad e dry t ran for only . I
about 2 M when the cutter ”
S howed signs of distress

p
.
These c hi s were colored

dark blues and purples in
c ontras t to all O f the other
chips whi ch were bright
,
and without any dis c olora

tions .
T he
differences of all
these chips from ordinary
p
chi s are ev ident One fea .
ture of th ese chips is that

wh en they are rodu c ed p
Fi g . 12 1
136 THE CIN CINNATI MILLING MA C HINE C O MPANY
with sufficient lubricant
H
they are entirely devoid of
color . ere is one of the
radical differences between
I
high speed milling and high
-
A
speed turn ing n the origin
.
a l article in the ME RI CAN

MA CHINIST describing the
,
announcement O f high speed -
steel occurs this sentence :

,
‘
The chips themselves left
the tools at a temperature
which drew them to beauti
ful blues and purples ; this
coloring of the chips is a
practical shop test of the
’
correct speed of the work
I
.
n contrast the absence ,
of color in high speed mill -
ing chips is a practical shop

test of the pra c ticability of
the feed and speed in use
LB
.
KINDS OF U RI CAN T .
These tests seem to show

that the nature of the l ubri
cant does not aff ect the cut
ting speed provided the
quantity is su fficient That .
is the principal action is one

,
O f cooling and with e ven

,
the cheapest cutting com

pounds there is su ffi c ient
lubricating effect provided ,
the quantity used is great

enough to produce the
”
necessary cooling .
T HE PU MP
The pump .
is of the centrifugal type

and is capable of delivering
Fig . 1 22
138 THE C INCINNATI MILL I NG MACH I NE C OMPAN Y
deli very pipe and p artly enclos es the cutter . T he fun ctions of
the hood are
1 To c onfine the large fl o w of lubricant dire ctly to the cutter
.
and work thus se curing an invert e d bath and making all the l ubr i
, ,
y
cant take part in the c ooling of the cutter .
2 To wash the chips from the teeth s o that the c an not be

.
c arr ied back into the cut c ausing the cut to be c ome clogged and the
,
cutter to be dulled .
A
3 To pre v ent splashing of lubricant
. .
drain table ( patented ) consisting of a light steel frame is pro

vide d to c onfine the lubricant to the table This drain table is
p
.
ro v ided with a strainer of large area and is so designed that a ,
A
tight fit to the table is not re quired
p
.
flexible metal return tube of ampl e c apa c ity is ro v ided to

return the lubricant to the reserv oir .
S yH
This cutter and work c ooling system c an be applied to all sizes -
of Cin c innati ingle P ulle igh P ower Millers P lain and Vertical
I
-
,
( but not Universal ) t should be atta ched in our fa ctory before

p
.
t h e machine is sh ip ed
E UIPMEN
.
T he ST AN A D RD Q T includ es
1 centr fugal p ump
i
4 piping gate v al ves flexible hose etc
1 set of 3 ”
, , , .
1 standar d hood
1 drain table
1 flexible r eturn tube
Th e stan dard hoods furnished as art of the e quipment are p
as follows :
N
o 2 Plain and . O 3 Standard Ma c hines : Nood for s iral
. H p
mill 3 diam eter 3 fa c e 1 M hol e
N N S H
” ” ”
p
.
, ,
o 3 P lain and o 4 ta ndard Machines :

. ood for s iral mill
.
3 M diameter 4 fa c e 1 M hole
N N H
” ” ”
.
, ,
o 4 and o 5 P l ain Machines :

. .ood for spir al mill 4 diam e ”
ter 6 fa c e 2 hole
,
”
,
”
.
For Vertical Machines Face M illers and D uplex Millers the , ,
y S
hoods must be made up spe c ial to suit the cutters and work and can
onl be furnished when we have definite inf ormation ometimes .
work is of such a nature that the hood can not be used wi th a fa c e

or end mill .
The pra cti c al valu e Of being abl e to use faster spe eds wi th the ,
resulting faster tabl e travels is c l ear On a numb er of regular , .

AT RE A TISE O N M IL LING AND M ILL I NG MA CHINES 1 39
p
mill ing o erations in our manuf a c turing de artment the increase p
p
in feed b ec aus e of th e fast er s eeds with stream lubri c ation av erages
,
p
, ,
1 2 5 % faster than the best previous racti c e
L L y
.
i gh t C u t s wi t h S t r e a m u br i c a t i o n The ver large ma .
j ori ty of al l milling work allows only relatively light c uts This is .
either be c aus e th e c utter is of deli c ate c onstruction or the arbor is

p p
y y
small ; or the i ec e itself is frail or of such a sha e that it is not
y
feasible to hol d it r igi dl in a fixture or be c ause heav feeds would
p
,
h eat or s ring th e work too mu ch ; and finall be c ause the revolution

p
,
marks may have to be c los e together in order to get a resentable

fi nb h
Runn ng the cutter at very high speeds makes it p ossible to take
.
i
light c uts at a high rate of feed per minute with the following a dvan
tages
p
Th e r essur e on t h e work is light
p
.
Th e work does not s ring .
Th e spring in the arbor is redu c ed allowing the us e of smaller
L
arbors and smaller c utt ers .
ighter fixtures c an be used

I p
.
rr egular ie ces c an be held in fix tur es with less danger of being

p ul led out
p
.
y
Th e r essure betwe en c utter and work being slight there is not
p
,
th e danger of s ringing t h e arbor and c onse quentl the finish is

b etter and the pie c e is finished to closer a cc ura c y as to size
, .
There is no heating of the pie c e and in many instances it is

p
,
oss ibl e to finish a piec e with one c ut where heretofore t wo c uts ,
were re quired
S L Not only is this
.
He a v y C u t s w i t h tream u br i c a t i o n .
large fl ow of lubricant v ery benefi c ial on light c uts but it also makes
p
,
y
it ossible to take the heavier c uts at v ery mu ch higher cutting
sp eeds thereb permitting a smaller cut per tooth thus redu c ing
, ,
the strains on work and arbor The volume Of lubri c ant also car
.
ries away most O f the chips thus redu c ing t he n ec essary c lean ing
,
of th e j ig to a minimum .
14 0 THE CIN C INNA TI M ILLING MA CHINE C OMPANY
HAP T E I X C R
M I LL I N G C U TTERS
I n Chapter V milling cutters and the fundamental principles

,
of their a ction were dis c ussed but without going into the details
I
,
of c utter c onstruction n this chapter we will discuss the desi g n

.
of cutters in detail We will first consider the simple case of

.
A
ordinary milling c utters .
n ordinary milling cutter is a cylindrical body of steel with a
I
hole through the center and with teeth running parallel or at some
angle with the axis f the teeth are parallel wi th the axis the cutter
.
,
is called a plain mill and if they are at angle the c utter is called a
, ,
spiral mill .
When cutters are of relati vely small si z e they are made of a ,
solid piece of steel When of sufficiently large size the body and
.
,
teeth are separate and the cutters are then called inserted tooth
mills
So
.
M i l l s The most important things about the body of the

lid .
mill are the material of which it is made and the thickness of the ,
metal between the keyway and the bottom of the teeth The metal .
is either c arbon tool steel or high speed steel Carbon steel cutters
‘
-
.
are used less and less nowadays but stream lubrication discussed , ,
in the preceding chapter makes it possible to use them to better ,
advantage than before C arbon steel cutters are often used for
.
finishing operations on extremely exa cting work while high speed ,

-
steel c utters are used for roughing C arbon steel acquires a finer .
edge than high speed steel Th is latter material is more or less

-
.
brittle and the edges O f a high speed steel cutter under the mag -
n if yin g glass sometimes show small serrations which affect the ,
quality of the finished surface when an extremely fine surf ace is

to be produced .
The end surfaces Of the body Of the cutter should be as nearly

.
flat parallel and at right angles to the axis of the bore as it is possible
,
to make them The result of defective ends of the cutter is that the
.
arbor will be sprung when arbor collars and cutters are clamped
1 42 THE C INCINNATI M I LLING MA CHINE C O MPANY
y
When milling c utters were first inv ented they were made with
a ver large number of teeth The cutter was merely a rotating file .
,
but as su c h was a great improvement o ver a hand operated file

G
-
.
,
radually the number of t eeth was diminish ed but it was soon

p
,
y A
found that if the teeth were relati v ely far a art ea c h tooth would ,
have to take a fairl h ea vy chip t that time .
cutters were either not ground at all or ground ,
by hand and of c ours e this made it imp oss i

, , ,
ble to have the teeth on an approximately

F MR
on e un iform diameter Under these c onditions .
some teeth would not c ut at all and others

‘
would hav e to take twic e or three times their
N
legitimate share of th e work or maybe more , .
ot until c utter grinding ma c hines were regularly used for sharpen

ing cutters was it possible to us e the milling c utter for reasonably
,
heavy work .
F a u l t s o f C u t t e r s w i t h To o M a n y T e e t h Until quite
p
.
y
re c ently teeth of lain mills and spiral mil l s were spaced about
,
apart and e v en n ow cutters ma be found in use on whi ch

,
the teeth are even closer together These teeth were made wi th
R
.
adial Fa c es as in Fig 1 2 5 so that their a c tion was as shown in Fig

.
, .
90 The tooth was forced into the metal caus ing spring in the
I
.
,
arbor or in the work

, magin e a cutter cutting steel at a speed O f
.
7 0 fe et p er minute with teeth spaced 8 apart then teeth will

3 ”
,
work e very minute and if we further imagine that the feed is 2 per
,
”
minute then ea c h tooth

,
takes a chip of whi c h

the greatest thi c kn ess is
Ti 9 of an in c h or less ,
than one thousandth of

an in ch I
t will be r ea di
p
.
l y seen that this c hi is

so thin that as a rule , ,
the tooth will refuse to

bite into the metal thus ,
leaving a chip of double F ig 127 .
y
thickness for the next
tooth . This tooth is perfectl c apable Of taking this double c hip ,
but it is c ompelled to do this extra work be ca use of spring in the

arbor In other words som ething whi c h is wrong must happe n first
. -
,
before th e cutter wi ll cut at all .

AT RE A TISE O N MILLI NG A ND M ILL I NG MACHINES 143
g A
p y
C o rr e c t D e s i n o f S p i r a l M i l l s f ew years ago Th e . C incin
nati Milling Ma ch ine C om an c arrie d through a series of exp er i
It
y would
ments as to th e best spa c ing of th e teeth of milling cutters was
p
.
found that a mu c h wi d er s a c ing than was then customar

gi ve v ery mu ch b etter results and from thes e ex eriments a set of
, p
dim ensions for v ar ious styles of cutters was develop e d Fig 1 24
p
. .
S hows our latest design of S ir al Mill in diameter This mill , .
h as 10 teeth c orr espond
A
ing to a spacing of about
t first we followed
usual ra cti c e with an p
angle Of spiral of about
°
10 or but this was
soon increased until now
th is angle is made
unl ess th ere should be
en d teeth as in end mills , ,
when the angle is kept

down to T he fa c es
F ig 128 .
of the teeth are not mad e
V
radial but are under cut ; ,
in other words THEY HA E RAKE

,
The amount O f this rake .
should be about 1 5 for steel and this is the way the c utter
°
,
S hould be made if us e d for steel only but as a standard cutt er may ,
be used for either steel or c ast iron this rake angle is kept down ,
y
to D ue to this under cut the se ction of the tooth would be
y
mat eriall weakened and for this reason the ba c k of the tooth is
,
y
milled with a double angle as clearl shown in the illustration .
T his a ctuall gives a stronger tooth than on the older mills made
wi thout rake T he bottom of the tooth is made with a large fillet
I
.
,
for two reasons : n the first pla c e this fillet streng th ens the tooth
p p
, ,
and in the se c ond pla ce it re vents c hi s from lodging between the

,
teeth
I
.
t was found qu ite early in the inv estigation of milling c utters

that a long cutter that is one with wide fa c e would cause c on
, , ,
s ider abl e spring and chatter and that this c ondition might be
,
partly rem edied by making nicks in th e teeth Fig 1 2 5 thus cutting , .

,
H
down t h e length of the chip These nicks or ch ipbreakers have
.
, ,
long been a regular feature of milling cutters owe v er it was also .

,
found that a milling c utter with ch ipbreakers would not produce as

fine a finish as one wi thout them so that quite O ften an additional
,
144 THE C IN CINNATI MILLING MA C HINE C OMPANY
cutter without had to be us ed for finishing

c h ipbr ea kers n . A
analysis of this condition showed that this rough finish w as due to
the fact that one side of the c h ipbr eaker had negative clearan c e .
Fig 1 2 7 will S how this clearly This side of the chipbrea ker there
. .
,
fore could not cut but was dragged over the metal and this pro
, , ,
duce d a torn finish and besides this point of the ch ipbre aker became
, ,
the weak point of the cutter ; in other words it was the starting ,
point for the breaking down O f the cutter when at work To over .
come this ch ipbr ea kers were made as shown in Fig 1 2 8 They were
,
. .
produced by milling two notches crossing each other at the front

edge of the tooth The same result was obtained later on by con
.
s t ruct in g the c h ip br ea ker as S hown in Fig 1 2 6 These ch ipbre akers

. .
°
were necessary when the angle O f spiral was 10 or 1 2 and were °
kept until this angle was gradually increased to The chip

breakers with clearance O n both sides do not produce the torn
H
finish caused by the ordinary kind of ch ipbrea ker s so that the same ,
style O f cutter can be used for roughing and finishing cuts ow .
ever the corner of the c hipbre aker still remains the weak point of
,
I
the cutter and begins to
dull first . t w as also
found that the edge of the
tooth fol l owing dulled
faster immediately be
hind each c hipbr eaker
A
than the other parts of
the cutting edge ll .
this goes to S how the de

s ir a bil it y of doing away
with ch ipbr eakers

g
.
Ag S
Tw e n t y F i v e D e r e e
-
n le p i r a l M i l ls .
°
The angle of 2 5 is a
great improvement over
the old angle for with , ,
this angl e n o ch ip
breakers are needed as will be clear from what follows There
,
.
is an other reason why this angle of 2 5 is preferr ed The wide

°
.
spacing of the teeth allows one tooth O f a 1 2 spiral mill to get entirely °
I
out of action before another tooth enters and this causes more or ,
less hammering f the cut is deep then this hammering is not

.
,
noticeable because one tooth is still in the cut when the next one
,
.
146 THE CIN CINNATI MILLING MACHINE C O MPANY
A
to leave the work but the other extreme poi nt of this tooth A I has
,
AA
still to travel before it is in the same relative position .
S imple calculation will S how that the angle O , is 2 8 3 0 minutes °
and therefore that the angle A 1 0 0 is 1 1 3 0 minutes We have

, ,
°
.
found that any point of the c utter travels through the work through
°
an angle of 3 1 1 5 minutes which is more than 1 1 3 0 minutes ,
°
,
H
so that the point A I of the tooth OA is still in the work when the point
C of t h e tooth OC enters owever we s ee also that it is in the work
.
,
for only a short time longer and consequently if the depth of cut , ,
I
were less than M the tooth OA would be completely out o f the
”
work before the tooth 0 0 would enter f now we should make .

, ,
°
the spiral angle 25 instead of we would have the same general
A
conditions but the actual figures would be changed
, The angle .
AA
°
OB Fig 12 9 would still be 3 1 1 5 minutes but the line A I C Fig
,
.
, , , .
13 0 would now be
,
instead of 7053 2 and the angle O , .
,
I
°
would now be 3 2 1 5 minutes so that the angle A I OC would be only ,
°
7 45 minutes n other words the tooth 0 0 would be in action
.
,
long before the tooth OA would leave the work and consequently , ,
I
the depth of cut might be very much less than 4 and yet there
1 ”
would be always at least one tooth in the cut t will of course .

, ,
also be clear that the part O f the tooth which fir st enters the work
I
will be entirely clear again before the farther end O f the same tooth
enters even in a cut M deep
,
n a shallower cut the se ction of
”
.
tooth in engagement at one time will of course be less This fact , , .
together with the free cutting action due to the shearing effect O f
the wide angle combine to produce a smoother a c tion and the removal
of more metal per horsepower than is possible with the older cutters
g
.
T e s t s o n M i l l i n C u t t e r s The results of exp er i

R e su l t s of .
S
ments on milling c utters referred to in the previous paragraph are
summarized in the several test records printed below pace does .
not permit of giving all the details here but the data given will ,
indicate quite clearly the g reat advantages possessed by cutters of

the Cin c innati design .
Three series of tests will be considered here as follows ,
a To S how the influence of wide spa c ed teeth

.
-
.
b To S how the influence of rake or undercut teeth

. .
c Tests on cutting capa c ity O f face milling cutters

All of these cutting tests were made in a machinery steel bar
. .
having pounds tensile strength containing 20 carbon and 5 0 ,

. .
manganese . Because of the g reat variation in the cutting qualities

A T EA ISE R T ON MILL I NG A ND MI LLI NG MA CHINES 147
of different pie c es of c ast iron it is difficult to formulate exa c t data , ,
and the results published herein will therefore be c onfined to milling

tests on uniform steel bars as abo v e
I S A
.
e n c e o f W i d e p a c e d T e e t h The tests given in table

nflu -
.
were made with three spiral mills all of whi ch were 3 in diamet er ,
”
,
wi th a 1 M hole 2 5 angle spiral t eeth ground with 5 c learan c e

”
,
°
,
°
,
A
but with the faces of the teeth radial that is no under c ut or rake , , .
The cutters di ff ered only in th e spa c ing of the teeth C utter had .
2 2 teeth spacing about , C utter B had 1 6 teeth spa c ing about ,
.59 C utter C had 10 teeth spacing about The cuts were ,
taken in a machinery steel bar 2 4 wi de and the cuts were exactly

3 ”
,
the same depth in ea c h c ase .
Ta bl e —
A Sh o wi n g I n fl u en c e of Wi d e S pa ced Teet h
C tter u —
A 22 Teet h B— 16 Teet h 0 — 1 0 T ee t h
W dp hh
i t o f cut 2 M 2 M 2 M 2 M 2 M 2 M 2 M 2%
lu
.
3
3
t t
3 3 3
De t O f cut
3
t
ch u
.
1 9 99 i 99 i i 19 19 1 9
Re vo ti o ns 80 80 82 68 67 69 68 68
ub c ch l d
A ct ua l f e ed i n i n es p er m in t e
C i i n es o f m e t a r e m ove
pe r mi n ut e
.
VAc lu l h p ch
ts
t a
o
p
Am eres
at ma ine
60
2 00
70
2 00
74
1 98
54
19 6
56
1 98
64
198
46
195
52
1 97
60
19 6
ubbyc hchp
co r
d
. .
re cte d f or m o t o r
1
l
u
C i in es o f m et a
. . in o ne mi n t e
re m o ve
. 442 . 4 84 . 577 . 5 22 . 63 1 . 674 . 62 5 . 684 . 73 1
The above figur es show very c onclus i vely the advantage of wide
A
spa c ing alone Cutter B for instance remo v ed an a v erage of 2 1 %
.
, ,
A
more metal than c utter and c utter C removed an average of 3 6 % ,
more metal than c utt er

I
.
n flu en ce o f Un d e r c u t T e e t h Tables B C and D
Ra k e or .
,
S how the results of cutting tests made on a steel bar 5 wide with ,
cutt ers 3 M diameter 6 fa c e used on an arbor 1 M diameter

A
” ” ”
.
, ,
Cutter Cin c innati D esign S piral M ill as in Fig 1 24 2 5 spiral

,
.
,
°
angle 10 teeth ,
spa c ing with 10 under c ut or rake This is
, ,
°
.
shown in operation in Fig 13 1 . .
C utter B a Cincinnati D esign C utter S imilar to the above but

, ,
wi th radial tooth faces that is without rake This is shown in , , .
H
operation in Fig 1 3 2 . .
Cutter C a elical Mill as shown in Fig 1 51 This is shown in

p
. .
,
o eration in Fig 1 33 . .
148 THE C IN C INNATI M ILLING MA CHINE C O MPANY
All of these tests were made on a No . 5 P lain H igh Power Cin -
c i nn a t i
Miller direct connected to a 3 5 h p motor and fitted with
, . .
our stream lubrication system The feeds and speeds as given in the .
tables are corrected for loss of speed in the motor and the horse
power delivered to the machine is corrected for motor efficiency .
u
Sp i l ra mi l l 3 M
”
di
Fi g .
a m e te r .
131 .
25
C tte r A
°
s p i ra l . 10 t e e t h . 10
°
ra k e.
T a bl e B — S h o win g th e In fl u en c Of Ra ke
u f
e
d p M hi d
lh
m in ute
'
” '
C ts 1
3
g ee . ac n e se t for 1 6 ee p er .
C u tter
A — 25 °
10
10
°
S pi l B
Tee
ra
th
R ak e
—
25
10
NO
°
S pi
T eet
R ak e
ra
E — He l l
ica Mil]
dth f t
v
Wi cu
ul v c du l
o
pt h f t
. .
De o cu
l ti
up
Re o u o ns
F ee di i h
n n c es p er m i n te ( a t )
l lh p
a
bi i h
.
C c nc e s o f m e t a re m o e p er m i nu te .
Am e re s
V o ts
h d
.
u b hh v d by
T ot a a t m ac i n e c o r r e c t e f or m otor
y
. .
e ffi c i e n c 12 58 18 88
C ic i nc es of m e t a re m o el 1 h p . .
a t m a c i n e i n o ne m i n ut e .
THE C INCINNATI MILLI NG MACHINE C OMPAN Y
Table C shows similar tests but with cuts deep . Here it will
be seen that the c utter with rake remo ved more metal per horse
p p
H
ower minute than in the re vious c as e when taking a 1 6 cut
3
.
owever the cutter without rake did n ot do so well on the deeper

I
,
cut n fa c t in this c ase the c utter with rake removed appr oxi
.
, ,
mately 60 % more metal than the one without rake

.
.
Fi g . 133 . C utte r C
l l
H e ica m i ll 396 di °
am e ter . 66
°
h li
e x a ng l e . 3 t e et h . 15 ra k e .
—
u
T a bl e D S h owi n g I n fl u en c e of Rake
C ts d p M ac h ine set f or 2 0
'
f dp m inute
c
ee . ee er .
A —2 5 °
S i l
E —H e i
ra
C u tt er 10 ee th l al M i ll
10 °
R k
a e
W i dth of c u t 5
c
p
D e t h of c ut
bc
l
R e vo u t i o n s 62 6
F eed in in h es p e r m 1n u t e ( ac t u a ) l 17 40
l d
.
C u i i n c h e s o f m e t a re m o ve p e r m i n u t e 3 2 62
c
p
. .
A m ere s 140
V lts 1 92
bc h
o
Tota hl . at m ac h i n e o rr ec t e df m t or o or
e fli c i e n c y 29 52 3 2 60
Cu i i n c e s o f m e t a r e m o ve l d by 1 h p at
h
. .
m ac i ne i n o ne min ut e .
h k ld k wi t h t h f d
‘
* Th i s c u t t er Wit o ut r a e cou not ta e th is c ut e ee se t f or p er m i nut e .

A T EA ISE R T ON MI LLI NG AND MILLING MA CH I NES 1 51
T able D c ompares these same cutters again but with th e ma chine

p
,
set for 2 0 feed er minute This c omparison is not entirely fair

”
.
,
becaus e the c utter with no rake c ould not be made to take the c ut
at this fas t feed and the figures gi ven in this tabl e therefore com
, ,
pare the results O btained from the c utter with rake with the ma c hine
s et at 20 per minute and the c utter without rake
”
ith the ma chine W
set at 12
2
1feed er minute
”
p .
The results of th ese tests are v ery illuminating showing sepa ,
ra t el y as they do the great ad v antages ; first of wide spac e d teeth ;

, ,
-
se c ond the still greater advantage of rake Of course it must be

,
.
borne in mind that the ordinary form of ni c ked tooth high spe e d
p
-
steel s iral mill which is c onsidered standard and regularly c ar

,
ri e d in sto c k could not suc c essfully take some of the cuts shown
,
in tables B C and D , .
F a c e Mi l l s T he tests in table E were mad e with a

H
Tes ts on .
10
”
igh P ower Fac e Mill as shown in Fig 1 3 9 and the coolant was
p p p I
-
.
,
ap lied with o ne of our standard O il pum e qui ments n th es e

p p
.
tests rop er c orrec tions have been made on feed and s eed to c om
p p p
,
ensate for th e loss of s eed in the motor and the horse ower delivery
to the ma chine is c orre cted for motor e ffi c ien c y .
T a bl e E—C u t t i n g T es t s on F ace Mil l s
A cu l
t a
Me ta l
l
Rem o ve d by
T o ta C u In 1
Amp eres
fi a ffim:
I
. .
a
Cu In p er H
. . in 1 . P .
p e r M in Min . .
p
The above fi g ures are c om arative only in relation to the cubic
in ch es remo v ed per horsep ower per minute w ith this mill at dif
f erent depths of c ut They indi c ate that this mill showed its high est
.
e fficiency on c uts deep and that th ere was a de c id e d falling O ff

p
,
of e ffi c i en c y with c uts dee .

1 52 THE C IN CINNA TI MILLING MA C HINE C OMPANY
D e p t h a n d Wi d t h o f C u t a n d Fe e d t o ffi c i e n c y E
A
Rel a t i on of .
This relative efficiency applies to this cut only t some other .
I
width of cut and some other feed the relative efficiencies of cuts of
different depths will show different results t must be remembered .
that the e fficiency of the cutter that is the metal it will remove with
, ,
A
one horsepower in one minute depends on three factors : width ,
of cut depth of cut rate of feed

,
s proof of this we need only call
, .
attention to extreme cases :

1 . An extremely wide cut
For instance a cut in steel 1 0 .
,
”
wide 3 7 deep will not prove efficient as compared with the above
5
,
II
,
cu fi x 5 at the same rate of feed although the cut h a s the same

”
.
”
,
area O f section
A
.
2 .n extremely deep cut For instance a Saw 3 7 wide can

5
.
,
”
not possibly take a cut 10 deep although this will again have the
“
,
same area O f section .
The above figures will prove very valuable when estimating the
capacity O f a Miller for a given piece of work or when estimating ,
production on a given piece of work to be done on any particular

machine While the above tests are confined to the use of spiral
.
mills and face mills they will indicate that similarly good results
,
S I
may be expected from end mills side mills and other cutters when ,
made in a cc ordance with the C incinnati design ( ee Chapter X

R
.
,
P ower e quired to D O Milling )

S
.
ome examples of these different styles of mills are shown on
H
the following pages and will serve as a guide for anyone desiring
W
to make his own milling cutters owever we recommend THA T .
,
C U TTE R S AL AYS BE B O U GH T from a reliable cutter maker This .
is a S pecial business and those who have made it a study and have a
fully e quipped plant and men experienced in this work can i nvari
ably furnish a better cutter than can be made in a shop that is not
specially equipped for doing this work Besides when all the exp ense .
,
V
is figured in the purchased cutter will be found to be cheaper
,
.
WE DO NO T MA KE CU TTE RS O U RSEL ES but will always gladly refer ,
others to reliable concerns who make that their business

S E
.
I
M i l l s w i t h h a n k Fig 1 3 4 S hows nd M ills with taper
En d . .
S hanks t will be noticed that on these the angle O f the spiral is

.
A
°
20 instead of This is done because the spiral angle also
A
2 5 angle would be too
°
becomes the rake angle of the end teeth .
A
great t the same time it is desirable for the reaso ns given above
.
, ,
to keep the spiral angle as wide as is practical compromise .

revolution then each of the teeth will take a bite of t may se em I

p
,
that this is a v ery small c ut for this size end mill but at a s eed of ,
7 0 fe et per minute the cutter will make 1 3 5 re v olutions per minute ,
and as we have 8 feed per revolution the feed per minute will be
1 ”
,
This illustration also S hows that it is the peripheral teeth O f
y
the end mill and not the fa c e or end teeth which do the cutting and ,
it further shows that onl 31 of the edges of the fac e teeth come
1 ”
i nto lay p
I
.
n th e end mill S hown the body is counterbored T h is is done .
mainly to provide for many reg rin ding s The c orners of the teeth .
A
are rounded or be v eled These extreme c orners if made sharp
.
, ,
are the weak points Of the c utter rounding or be veling Of this .
c orner adds much to the life of the cutter .
C UTTERS
HAV E 12
-
°
gA N D WIDER
S IDE C LEA RA N
ON EA CH S IDE
12 TEETH HS S
- ‘
Fi g 13 5
S A
A
Mills
ide modern S ide M ill 5 diameter is S hown in Fig
.
, ,
.
13 5 S practically all O f the work done by a S ide millin g c utter

p
.
is done by the eripheral teeth it is important that these teeth ,
S hould be under cut .
When side milling cutters are to be used for milling S lots in

whi c h the periphery and both S ides are in a ction and if the c orre c t ,
width of the slot is known then a cutter may be designed with rake
,
in all directions by simply building t h e cutter out of two S imilar

A T EA ISE R T ON MILLING AN D MILLING MA CHINES
. 155
cutters placed S ide by S ide with the peripheral teeth cut spirally ,
one half being right hand and the other half being left hand ( see
- - -
Fig . The cutter as S hown is made in such a way that the proper
I
width O f cut can be maintained by placing spacers between the two
halves f the two halv es of the cutter were flat where they j oin
.
each other then the spacing out would leave an opening between
,
them and this would leave a ridge in the work For this reason .
they are made interlock ing and the teeth of one half overlap those -
ON Fl-F
l
Fi g . 1 36
of the other The construction as S hown h as another advantag e

.
,
namely that though the teeth are wide spaced there will be no
"
-
, ,
hammer blow be c ause the teeth O f one h alf are in action befor e -
those O f the other half are out of a c tion

S E S
.
M i l l s Fig 1 37 S hows a 2 2 S hell nd M ill

h e l l En d . . hell 1 ”
.
end mills are in all respects S imilar to the taper shank end mills ,
I
except that the angle of the S piral is 15 instead Of This style of °
cutter is seldom used as a spiral mill ts action is the same .
as that of face mills described later These cutters are driven .
by S hrinking them on to a S hort arbor about 0 00 5 larger , .

”
in diameter than the standard S ize O f the hole in the cutter .
I
'
P lacing the cutter in boiling water heats it sufficiently to

let the arbor enter n addition the arbor is provided with a dr iv
.
,
ing key .
R eference is made to the action O f this style of cutter in Chapter

V The action is entirely different from that of a plain or spiral
.
1 56 THE C INCINNA TI MILLING MA C HINE C OMPANY
mill The face mill makes a chip like that O f a planer tool the only
.
,
d ifference being that the tooth of a face mill sweeps in a circular

path whereas the planer tool removes the chip along a straight
,
line the side of the tooth doing the cutting

, .
ROUND CORNERS
10 TE ET H -
HS .
O F KEY S EAT m RELAT IO N To

TEETH
RO ED DETA l L S HO W l N G MA N N ER
OF RO UNDING CO RN ERS O F TEETH
Fi g . 137
H
F a c e M i l l s Fig 1 3 8 shows a
. .C in c inn a t i S ta n dar d Face M ill ,
H
and Fig 1 3 9 the corresponding size of igh P ower Face M ill They
.
-
.
are similar in most respects the diff erence being that the igh P ower
,
Face Mill is especially built for the heaviest kind of duty B oth styles .
consist of a body in which slots are milled for the insertion O f the
blades These bodies are made of steel The slots for t h e blades
. .
°
are milled in the body at an angle of 7 with the center line The .
blades themselves are made out of rectangula r stock ground to a ,
driving fit into these S lots The blades are hel d in place by pins
.
which are flattened on one side thus making a wedge as clearly ,
S hown in the illustration This brings the backs O f the bl ades up

.
A
against so l id metal and the amount of this metal is su fficient to
p
,
su port the blades under the heaviest cuts heavier sto c k is .

H
S
used for the blades O f the igh P ower Face Mill than for those O f the
tandard Face Mill Th ough the blades are driven in and held by
.
the taper wedge it is possible to take such h eavy cuts that the
H
,
blades will move endwise and it is for this reason that the igh P ower
Face Mill is provided with a backing ring which is bol t e d on to the

-
,
body of the mill This backing ring holds screws su p p ortin g each
.
-
blade individually This arrangement also permits of setting th e

p
.
blad es forward as wear takes la c e .

A T EA ISE
R T ON M ILLING AND M ILLING MA CHINES 1 59
P articular attention should be paid to the angles The rake .
angle that is the angle which the face O f the blade makes with
, ,
the rad ial line is The clearance angle on the peripheral edge
is That portion of the blade which h a s this cl earance angle
°
is only 37 wide and the blade is ground away at an angle of 2 5
3 ”
,
°
back O f this narrow l and ; that is at 1 0 with the tangent at this ,
A RRANG E KEY WAY s o

T EET H A R E S TA G G ER O
8 TEETH
A di a
F ig
m e t e r i n t er
. 140
l ck d p l i
o e s ni ng c u t te r .
point This is done mainly to avoid unnecessary grinding when

.
°
regrinding the cutter The face edges have a clearance of 10 and
.
°
are ground away at an angle of that is 1 3 with the body of ,
the mill The blades are s e t at an angle of

. with the axis
of the mill so as to provide some rake at the point where the face
,
edge O f the blade S lides over the finished work Though theoretically .
,
speaking this face edge does no cutting in reality it does remove a

, ,
I
small amount O f metal which is left there due to the spring in the
work the fixture or the machine
, ,
t should also be noticed that the .
fa c e edge O f the blade is not left straight as it is in taper S hank end ,
.
—
mills There is first a rounded corner with a 71 6 radius then a
3 ”
,
A
flat par wide and then the rest O f the face edge O f the blade is
,
ground away with an angle of 7 to s there are 1 6 blades in

the 1 0 fa c e mill and as these blades are
”
, wide there would ,
I
be 2 0 of cutting edge resting on the work if these blades were not
”
ground back f the width of the work is somewhat less than

.
somewhat less than 2 0 of blade would be resting upon it but in ,
either case this would have a tendency to chatter .
TO O much stress can not be laid on the necessity of making both

the body of the cutter and the blades as heavy as it is practical to
make them We can only give here sufficient information to enable
.
L
the toolmaker to comprehend the principles on which correct cutter
design is based ack O f space forbids us to go into detail and we
.
will only show here a few additional examples Of milling c utters

with notes as to their principal features .
Fi g . 14 1
S gC S S g
S
pl in in ers a ws
u tt l o t tin
,
Cu t t ers e t c
,
Fig 14 0 , . .
shows a plining Cutter made interlocking and particular atten tion ,
is called to the S imple method of interlocking the entire half of each ,
part being made thinner than the other half This design works .
well for cutters from face up

S
.
Fig 14 1 S hows a aw arranged to be drive nnot only by the key

. ,
S
but also by tw o pins which are held in a flange keyed to the arbor .
Fig 1 4 2 S hows a thin lotting Cutter These thin slotting cutters

. .
are quite capable of doing very rapid milling except for the fac t ,
that the body is liable to break through the keyway and even if ,
THE CIN CINNA TI MILLING MA CHINE C OMPANY
of the tooth where there is no rake because it is the rake side only
that is expected to do work
R
.
Fo rm e d C u t t e r s Fig 14 6 shows a Form elieved Cutter for

. .
,
finishing parts to an exact outline These cutters are sharpened by .
grinding the faces of the teeth and they retain their original outline
, ,
providing the teeth are always ground radially and straight Cutters .
for cutting the teeth in gears belong to this class

G S
.
Fig 1 4 7 shows a ear tocking Cutter on which the alternate

.
teeth are provided with right and left hand S ide rake all teeth -
,
°
having 1 0 undercut This cutter has proven extremely satis
.
factory for roughing out gears

E
.
I
Fig 1 4 8 shows an inserted tooth nd M ill made in one piece
.
with the shank n the smaller sizes this makes a stronger mill
.
than when the body and shank are separate since in that cas e ,
.
BEVEL t au-q
TO P VIEW O F TEETt LHE G ED s an e: V IE W
Fig . 144 F ig . 145
the end of the shank must be q uite s m a l l in diameter because the
A
x
body of the mill will not admit of a large bore

E
.
Fig 14 9 S hows an ngular nd Mill made in one piece with the

.
A
shank .
Fig 1 50 shows an ngular Milling Cutter for us e on an arbor

He H
. .
Mil ls
lical Fig 1 5 1 shows what we call a elical Cutter
. .
,
because its most striking feature is that the teeth are formed in a
helix around the body This cutter has several peculiarities which
.
A T EA ISER T ON MILLING A ND MILLING MA C HINES 163
make it capable of doing some work which can n o t be done with

ordinary cutters and whi c h on the other hand limit its usefulness
, , ,
in other directions This cutter is made as sho wn in the illustration

.
Fi g . 146
I
as a single cutter or sometimes as an interlocked cutter right a n d
, ,
left hand
-
t might be supposed that the end thrust must be con
.
S TRGGER RLT ER NRTE

T O O T H R I G HT H A N D
4 5
x KEY WR
Fi g . 147
with such a c utter and for this re ason the fi rst cutters O f
s i derabl e ,
this n ature were made right and left Tests hav e shown howe v er .
, ,
164 THE CIN CINNA TI MILLING MA CHINE C O MPANY
3 22-3
3
11 2 "
6 LO N G
OR s o p m s
EN L R R G EO V i e w o r
:
CO RN ER o r s m
og .
S E CT I O N O N g
c pm
B-TEET H
whh
Fig . 148
A n i n se r t e d t th
oo end mi ll it S an k .
°
O RHK E
Fi g . 149
166 THE CIN C INNATI MILLING MA CHINE C O MPANY
feed temporarily ceased The only indication of the stopping of

.
the feed will be that a somewhat different gloss will be observed

at that point This property of the cutter makes it possible to
.
start a cut by feeding the work upward and then changing the dir e c
tion of the feed sa y to , ,
the hori z ontal without ,
causing a depression where

the change O f direction
took place Thin plates
.
,
springy work copper bars , ,
test pieces O f boiler steel ,
etc have been very suc

.
,
cessf ul l y milled with this
A
cutter .
n example of work
that this cutter will do
successfully and which is ,
practically impossible with

any other equipment is ,
shown in Fig 1 5 2 This . .
consists of milling steel
A
test bars to S ize Fig 1 53 ,
. .
F i g 15 2
s is well known these
.
I
bars must have an accurate section and the sides must be parallel and ,
to si z e . n the illustration S ho wn a number of pieces were clamped

together for convenience in holding The total width of the cut
.
was the depth and the feed per minute .
The work is first fed vertically to the cutter then the horizo ntal
,
feed is thrown in and the cut is taken the proper distance Because
, .
of the free cutting action of this

cutter the work can be fed first
vertically then stopped and fin
,
ally fed horizontally without leav

ing an offset thus insuring bars of
,
the same sectional area throughout -

S4 B L
the entire length with S ides paral
.
,
F i g 1 53 .
lel and accurate for S i z e

A
.
ny other form of milling cutter will dig into the work and leave
a groove in the work at the time when the vertical feed is stopped
A
and before the table feed can be engaged .
nother illustration of this c utter at work and one which also

A T EA ISE
R T ON M ILLING AN D MILLING MA CHINES 1 67
shows the nature of the chip is S hown in Fig 1 3 3 n even more . . A

definite idea of their form may be O btained from the chips at D
in Fig 1 2 1 and at E in Fig 1 22
.
,
. .
S
Fig 1 54 S hows a modification O f this cutter milling the steel
.
Universal J oint hafts for Cincinnati Milling Machines These .
S hafts are turned with a head the diameter of the head being equal ,
to the largest diameter seen in the illustration The cross feed .
Sp d
ee
Fi g
,
. 1 54
94 re
.
o
No l
v lu F d w
. h cul
t io n s u
.
a ch
3 V e r ti c
ee
a
,
it Cir
p er
ar A tt
m in te .
m e nt and
T i m e , p er p i e
He ilc c l u
e,
a Mi l l
7 m i n t es .
bri ngs the cutter into proper depth ; the longitudinal feed then is
used after which the circular feed forms the rounded end ; the
,
longitudinal feed is then used once more on the opposite side of the
H
piece and this finishes the operation .
A
Fig 1 55 shows another modification of this elical Mill as used
.
for milling out the end s of connecting rods single hole is drilled .
,
the cutter inserted and the table is fed first hori z ontally and then
A
vertically so that the cutter traversing a rectan g ular path cuts the , ,
desired opening into the end of the rod final finishing cut then .
brings the opening t O si z e and proper finish R ods 5 thick have .

”
been successfully milled with a cutter diameter at a roughing .
feed of and a finishing feed of per minute

gS g
.
Makin p i r a l M i l l in Cu t t er s The Milling Machine is .
shown s et for making spiral cutt ers in Fig 1 5 6 The table is swi v eled . .
1 68 THE C INC INNATI MILLING MACHINE C O MPANY
Fig . 155
to the proper angle and the D ividing Head is geared , all as gi ven in
the table page 1 7 0
Se g
.
,
S
t tin The cutter should be s e t before the table
t h e Gu t t e r .
ince sp ira l m ill s are always cut with a double angle

'
is swiveled .
cutter usually one that has a 12 angle on the side which forms the
,
°
k
T a i ng o ne of t h e t wo c u u d wh
ts r eq
Fi g
ire
. 1 56
en k
m a ing a mo d er n s p ira l mi ll .
17 0 T HE C IN C INNA TI MILLING MA C HINE C O MPANY
L ea d s , C h a n g e G ea rs an d An g l es f or Ma kin g S pi ra l Mi l lin g C u t t ers
A ng l e f o r
I
l st
n ter m e i
at e
d I
2d
d
n t er m e i
a te
S e t t in g
chbl
ll
Mi i n g
M a in e
G ear G e ar Ta e
48 40 72
64 48 72
64 56 72
40 28 64
56 28 48
32 40 72
40 32 56
32 48 72
32 48 72
28 48 72
32 48 64
32 40 48
32 56 64
28 40 48
48 56 32
64 72 44
28 56 48
48 64 40
32 64 56
32 64 44
32 64 44
24 40 48
24 64 72
28 44 40
28 44 40
Lea d s ,
G ea rs an d An gl e s for Ma k i n g S p i r a l En d Mi l ls
A ng le fo r
S e t t in g
Ta
chbl
Mi ll in g
Ma in e
e
T REA TISE ON MILLING AND MILLING MAC HINES 17 1
Th e N O . 12 C i n ci n n a t i U
n i ve r s a l C u t t e r
a n d T o o l Gr i n d er
( Pa t e n t s R i g h ts F lly v d
u R e s er e )
172 THE CIN C INNA TI M ILLING MA C HINE C O MPANY
C HAP T E R X
C UTTER SH A RPE NING

Exhaustive experimen s made by The Cincinnati Milling Machine
t
Company show that the clearance on the cutting :edge of a cutter
plays an important part in the output of the machine N O arbitrary .
I
clearance angles for given materials can be laid down because other
conditions also influence the matter t has been found by keeping
.
Fi g . 159
a careful record that it is possible to decide on a correct clearance

for a given piece of work which will increase production as muc h as
5 0 % over the best average practice .
We can not emphasi z e too strongl y t h e importance of N O T O N LY

SHA RP cutters but P RO PE RLY SHARPENE D CU TTE RS
,
ven a milling
. E
d epartment which keeps its cutters sharp and does not em pl oy
proper clearan c e angles may fall as much as 20 % S hort O f the ossi p
1 74 THE CIN CINNATI MILLING MAC HINE C O MPANY
screw D . After this the work is again adj usted v ertically until the
same point of the cutter tooth rests on the tooth gauge as before and
the cutter Is In position for S harpening The t o ot h r es t is now placed
.
against the tooth at this same point immediate l y in front of the
Fig . 1 63
emery wheel and secured in position We are now ready to grind

.
,
after first unlocking the spindle and removing the setting dog F .
The three positions which the cutter occupie s in relation to the

grinding wheel are shown in Figs 160 1 6 1 1 62
. eading the clear
, ,
. R
ance angle direct is a new featur e in grinding machines and is one ,
of the greatest importance since it not only makes the setting of

,
Fi g . 16 4
the machine a much quicker operation but in addition it makes

, ,
positive the accurate determination of the required angle The .
importan c e O f grinding to the correct clearance angle can hardly

be overestimated .
A T EA ISE
R T ON MILLING AND MILLING MA CHINES 17 5
I f a cutter is ground with too much clearance it is certain to be ,
unsatisfa c tory because of its tendency to dig into the work and cause
chattering On the other hand if it does not have enough clearance
.
, ,
the heel of the cutter blade will drag and of course the cutter can , ,
Fi g . 1 65
A
not cut The correct relation of either a cup wheel or a disk wheel
.
A
to the cutter is shown in Fig 1 63 is the clearance angle
. . .
fter that angle which h as proven best for a given piece O f work has
been determined by experience a record should be kept and then
, ,
by means of the above described device this clearance angle can be ,
duplicated exactly every time the cutter is sharpened

,
.
Fi g . 166
H owever care must be taken to keep the land that is the nar
, , ,
row edge O i the blade immediately back of the cutting edge the ,
proper width about , Repeated grindings widen this surfa c e ,
as S hown In Fig 164 with the result that although the c learanc e
.
,
THE CIN CINNATI M ILLING MA CHINE C OMPANY
A
angle may be correct the heel of the blade will drag as indicated at
,
Such cutters usually give rise to the belief that there is not enough
.
clearance and the c utter is reground with a greater clearance angle

as shown in Fig 165 When it is again reset on the milling machine
. .
the heel will not drag but the cutter will have too much clearance
and be unsatisfactory .
GR IN D W ITH FLRT
OF WHEEL
R en ewi n g Wo
C u t t e r s Fig 1 66 Shows the proper method
rn . .
to pursue The cutter S hould be placed in the grinder and set at a

.
sufficient angle to grind the entire heel of the blade away pretty
I
,
much as we would do were we to anneal and remill the cutter n .
this way we can practically renew the cutter by restoring the land
to the proper width For this work it is best to use a cup S haped
.
-
A
wheel and the cutter can be raised up high enough so that the blade
next to the one being g round will clear the wheel f ter this has .
been done the cutter can be ground to the correct clearance as S hown
in Fig 1 63 By this method O f renewing cutters their length of
. .
life can be very much increased

A Co S A
.
ec t l y h arp en ed Cu t t er
rr n example of correct cutter
.
sharpening is S hown in Fig 167 This is one O f a gang of side mills

. .
that were sharpened for milling c ast iron The sketch shows a land .
178 T HE CIN C INNATI MILLING MACHINE C OMPA NY
end A
O f the side teeth than at the outer end B N O fixed rules can .
be g iven f or the clearance angles on cutters This depends on the

'
I
material being milled the depth of cut the style of cutter etc
, , , .
° °
n general practice 5 to 7 for cast iron and 3 to 4 for machinery ° °
I
steel will be found quite satisfactory for spiral mills .
n Fig 1 68 the machine is S hown sharpening the end teeth of a

.
shell end mill The mill is held on its S hank in the spindle of the
.
Fig . 170 . P e ri ph e ral Tee th , La rg e F ace Mi l l
grinder exactly as it is held in the spindle O f a milling machine t . I

can not S hift endwise and is freely revolved by turning the spindle .
The clearance angle which experience h as shown to be correct is
H
read direct from the graduated dial on the grinder head .
and reamers are sharpened as shown in Fig 1 69 For such . .
work the face O f a cup S haped wheel is used The setting for clear
-
.
ance is the same as for a milling cutter For all this work the same .
t oo th re s t is used There is only one universal t o o thr est ne c essary

.
for the range O f work done on this machine The blade is s et in a .
c lapper box which e a sily yields when the cutter is revolved to bring
-
the next tooth in position and the heavy gauge steel blade forms ,
a solid support for the cutter when grinding .
For the sharpening operations the machine IS provided with a

lever feed The lever can be adj usted to any position around the
.
S
machine that is handiest for the operator The swivel head has a .
NO 12 B
. taper hole with collets to bush down to the other
. .
standard tapers used on milling cutters so that all cutters can be
I
held on their own S hanks as when in place on a milling machine .
n Fig 1 70 the m achine is shown S harpening the peripheral

.
teeth of a large face mill The mill is held on a shank which fi ts into
.
the taper hole O f the spindle in exactly the same wa y as the end
A T EA ISE R T ON M ILLING AND MILLING MA CHINES 17 9
mill in Fig 1 54 is held and the same principles as described in the

.
,
prec eding paragraphs are f o l l o wed in setting for the proper c lear
‘
ance .
Fa c e mills should have the corners O f the blades ground a pp r oxi

mately round to a radius as shown in Fig 1 7 1 This is done by
, . .
°
first grinding to a 4 5 angle and then again grinding O ff the corners
°
by first setting the machine to 2 2 2 and then to
1 The face
edges of the blades O f face mills should have a land about 1 5 wide
3 “
”
and the balance of the blade S hould be ground O ff at an angle Of

°
about 7 or 10 towards the center of the cutter
°
.
Ge C u t t e r h a r pen i n
ar S g G
ear cutters are all made as patent
.
H
relieved c utters and can be ground on the face without changing
A
their shape owever it must be remembered that the S hape O f
.
,
the tooth is preserved only if the cutter is g round radially s .
soon as the face of the tooth has been ground away from radial then ,
it will cut a gear tooth O f a different
I
shape than the original section O f the
gear cutter n order to have all
.
1325
9 59 9
teeth O f the cutter do an ap pr oxi

mately equal amount of work they ,
must all be at the same distance from

the center of the cutter TO grind .
such cutters properly we must not ,
depend on the correctness of the

sp ac Ing of the c utter teeth for , ,
though this spacing may have been

indexed accurately when the cutter
‘
was being milled it may have ,
changed somewhat in hardening .
In order to g rind gear cutters cor

‘
r ec tl y we should grind the back O f

Fig 17 1
each t ooth before using the new cut
.
ter This back should be located from some section of the tooth
.
curve and it makes no difference from whi c h section We should .

,
therefore place a stop somewhere on our grinding device place the

, ,
top of a tooth against this stop and grind the back of that tooth .
Then l ift the cutter away from the stop turn it one tooth and locate ,
I
the top of the next tooth against this same stop ; then grind the
back of this tooth and s o on n this manner we get the backs O f
, .
all the teeth in the same relation to a normal Section of the tooth .
18 0 THE C IN C INNA TI MILLING MA CHINE C OMPANY
Now when want to resharpen the cutter at any time we simply

we ,
place the back of the tooth against the t o o th r es t while we are

grinding the cutting face and all we then need to take care of is to
,
grind these fa c es radially

S I
.
C o rr e c t W a y t o h a r p e n
Th e ear C u t t ers n order to G .
sharpen gear cutters correctly it is necessary that the feed O f the ,
S A
cutter to the grinding wheel should be a rotary or circular feed
G
.
I
This is provided for in the P atented ear C utter harpening ttach
ment of the Cincinnati N O 1 % rinder t is sho wn in operation
. G .
in Fig 1 7 2 The gauge B is swung around to line up with the fac e

. .
Fi g . 172 . u
T h e C i nc i nn a ti P ate nte d G e ar C tte r Sh arpe ni n g A tta ch m e nt
of the tooth and the cutter is s et to this gauge t the same time .
‘
A
we adj ust the spring pawl to the back of the tooth Then during .
,
A
the grinding process the cutter is adj usted radially to the grinding
,
wheel by means of the adj usting screws The effect of this is .
clearly shown in Fig 17 3 . .
With this device the faces of the teeth will always be ground
radially no matter how much is taken O ff at one grinding The
,
.
only variation from the radial line will be that due to the wear of the
I
grinding wheel when cutters have been very dull re quiring a great
, ,
deal of g rinding n such extreme cases after the teeth are ground
.
,
S harp it is best to reset the cutter to the gauge as in the beginning

,
and then grind all of them once more taking only a light cut ,
.
The ordinary gear cutter sharpening machine or attachment

provides for radial setting when putting the cutter in position for
HA P T E X I
C R
P O W ER RE Q U I RE D T O D O MI LL I N G
I
When a given piece of work is to be milled we must first decide
upo n the machine on which the work shall be done n order to reach .
this decision we must know the cutting capacity of the machine The .
normal hors epower O f the machine is usually given in the sp e c ifi

c ations printed in milling machine catalogs When this is not given .
we can very easily figure the horsepower of a C one D riven Machine -
H
if we know the size of the cone steps and the back gear ratio and ,
that of a igh P ower Machine if we know the width an d speed

-
of the driving pulley .
Th e D ri v i n g P o w er of a Mi ll i n g M a c h i n e
Ma ch in es
C o n e - D r i ve n EX
AMPLE : To figure the horse
.
power O f a C one D riven Machine assuming a N O 3 P lain Cone Type

-
,
.
Cincinnati Miller that is to run at 7 4 revolutions The speed plate .
shows for 7 4 revolutions
S
Belt on large cone step .
econd ba c k gear in .
Countershaft 260 revolutions .
We have the following data to go by

Diameter l arge cone step 12
S
Width of belt
econd back gear ratio to 1 .
The S peed of the driving cone is therefore

x 74 ( the speed O f the spindle ) rev .
As suming a belt pull of 5 0 lbs per inch width of belt our formula
.
,
n ow is
D iameter Ofcone step in inches x x speed
of pulley x 5 0 lbs x w 1dt h O f belt
12
.
X
H . P delivered
.
to machine .
Substituting our values in the above equation ,

we get
12 x x x 50 x
horsepower delivered
12 x
to the machine
I t must be remembered that for a C one D riven Machine the

.
horsepower must be figured separately for each speed .
H g P o e M c e E XA PLE To figure the horse

a H igh P ower Machine The horsepower delivered to a
i h w r a h in s. M :
P lain H igh P ower M achine is found from the following data

power Of :
NO 2
. :
D iameter pulley Of 18
Width of belt
S
Belt pull 50 lbs per inch width . .
peed of pulley 3 2 5 re v .
Substituting in the above formula , we hav e

18 x x 3 2 5 x 50 x 3
7 horsepower .
12 x
The catalog motor rating of this machine is 7 horsepower ince . S

H
the belt runs at constant speed we can safely assume for present pur ,
poses that the igh P ower Machine delive rs the same horsepower
a t the cutter for all speeds .
g
C u t t i n C a p a c i t y o f M a c h i n e i n C u bi c n c h e s The next I .
thing to be determined is the amount of metal the machine equipped

with the cutter to be used may reasonably be expecte d t o remove
per horsepower per minute This will determine the feed that the
.
A
machine can pull on the cut to be taken We must now turn to
E
.
tables , B C D and
, , on pages 14 7 148 1 4 9 1 5 0 1 5 1 The cuts
, , , 0 , ,
.
shown there are maximum cuts and will serve as a safe guide
if we reduce them by about M and are sure to also take into consider
,
atio n the depth and width of cut the style of cutter used and the ,
quality O f material being milled

Example Assuming a N H igh P ower M achine is equip
.
: O . 2 P lain -
ped with a modern C incinnati design spiral mill and that it is to

wide in machinery steel H as this machine
,
take a cut deep , 3

”
.
A
the capacity to take this cut and if so at what maximum feed ?
, ,
Table B page 1 4 8 shows that for a cut fi deep 5 wide cutter ” ”
m
, , , ,
re oved cubic inches per horsepower a minute This is some .

what less th n the metal removed in the deeper cuts shown in tables
a
.
C page 1 4 9 and D page 1 5 0 We will assume that for all practical

, , ,
.
purposes c ubic inch is a safe figure for a cut

H
.
S
The N O 2 P lain igh P ower Ma chine h as a catalog motor rating
.
-
of 7 % horsepower even and one half horsepower at th e machine

.
-
should on the above assumption remove 5 % cubic inches of steel

per minute Our cut V8 x 3 has a
. section and the machine
” ”
,
working within its normal rating will therefore pull this cut at a
feed O f 5 % divided by or 1 5 per minute ”
.
Therefore any feed up to 1 5 per minute may be used The

, .
actual feed to be used must be determined by the other conditions

under which the work must be milled
g I I
.
Cu t t ers f or M i l l i n Ca s t r on
Ca pa c i ty of t is well known .
that the c utting qualities of diff erent c astings vary considerably ,
but as a basis for estimating we will assume castings having the

tough close grained free c utting quality O f the better grade O f
,
-
,
-
A
iron used in machine tools For such iron we recommend that the
E
.
,
figures in tables B C D and after being reduced by about

, , , ,
one fourth as abo ve be multiplied by

-
,in each case to determine
the cubic inches O f cast iron that can be removed by one horsepower
in one minute For harder grades of iron a smaller factor must be
.
used
Applying this to the above example we get
.
cubic inch x cubic inches 5 —

113
5
A horsepower machine will therefore remove cubic inches

-
.
cast iron per minute S ince the a section it is clear that

. out h as ,
the machine h as the capacity to pull this cut at about 25

”
per
minute feed
g p S
.
C u t t i n C a a c i t y O f t a n d a r d C u t t e r s Tables B C D and
E
.
, ,
are based on t he use of modern design cutters When estimating .
on milling work that is to be done with standard high speed steel -
A
spiral mills as carried in stock by dealers it may be best to us e the ,
results O btained in table as a basis taking into consideration the ,
number Of teeth in the cutter to be used

G g A
.
O t h er
Fa c t o r s o ve r n i n P r o d u c t i o n ll O f the above of .
course applies to maximum cuts When the cut to be taken is known .
to be well within the capacity O f the machine there is no need of ,
going through the above calculations and the feed rate to be used ,
must be sele c ted to suit the following factors .

1 86 THE CIN CINNA TI MILLING MA CHINE C OMPANY
HA P T E X II C R
VA R I O U S M ETH O D S O F MI LL I N G
I n the maj ority O f shops the milling department is one O f
g reat
I
the most important departments This is especially s o in S hops
.
that manufacture a large number of duplicate parts n such a .
shop any reduction O f the time required for a milling operation is an

important item of economy and j ustifies the management in spend
ing some time and effort to determine the best way in which such a
milling opera tion might be carried on This refers not only to shops .
where thousands of similar pieces are made every year but applies ,
equal l y well to the ordinary manufacturing machine shop where

lots O f 2 0 or 3 0 are the rule and large lots the exception,
.
When we have to do a milling operation on a piece of work we ,
I
know of course that we must have a suitable cutter and some device
, ,
to hold the piece f the number of pieces j ustifies it we make a sp e

.
c ial holding fixture and perhaps a special cutter and then we are i n
, ,
cline d to think that we have done all that can be done
H
.
owever in a large number O f cases a more thorough examination

,
will reveal the fact that the operation can be done in various ways ,
and a little study of the elements O f the operation will soon S how
which method is the quickest Take for example a little bracket O f
.
,
cast iron the foot of which is to be milled flat for bolting it to the
,
frame of a machine One cut will be enough to give the desired finish
. .
A S
N O particu lar fixture is required to hold the piece as it can be easily
I
held in an ll teel Vise N O special cutter is required as the operation
-
.
is straight slabbing t would seem that this operation is S O S imple

.
in all its elements that one method should be as good as another

Y
.
et this operation can be done in several di ff erent ways and with

,
different degrees of economy We may us e a S ingle vise as the .

-
average man would probably do ; or we might use two vises one ,
behind the other using the same kind O f cutter ; or we might design
,
a special fixture which will hold a number of these pieces one behind ,
the other ; or we might make a fixture which will hold a couple

O f pieces side by side and perhaps two or three series of these pieces
,
in tandem ; or we might put the j ob on a Vertical Miller with one

A T EA ISE R T ON MILLING A ND MILLING MA C HINES 1 87
A
vise or with two vises or with a special fixture ; or we may build
, ,
a special fixture and mount it on the Circular Milling ttachment

H
.
ere then are a number O f methods for doing this simple operation
, , .
A
To more easily analyze this let us select a piece of cast iron 2 x ”
with straight sides S O that it can easily be held in the vise

, ssume .
a cutting speed O f 60 feet and a feed of 0 8 0 for the desired finish . .
Further assume ,
of material to be removed With these data .
before us we will analyze some of th e methods above mentioned

g
.
—
F i r s t M e t h o d Us i n On e Vi s e . P lace one vise on the Millin g
A
Machine table and use a spiral cutter 3 in diameter and long enough
to cover the 4 width of the piece S the thickness of stock to be
”
.
remo ved is 1/ the c utter must travel practically

,
before the
A
Center O f the cutter comes to the edge of the work S O that the total
length of the feed will be 3 cutter running at 60 feet per
”
m inute runs 7 6 revolutions per minute and as the feed per revo l u , ,
tion is 080 it will feed practi c ally 6 per minute so that t h e time
.
,
”
,
required for the cut is { 3 O f a minute or pra c tically 2 6 seconds , .
A
The machine must now be stopped the piece removed the table , ,
returned and a new piece put in place llow for stopping the ma .
chine 5 seconds for removing the piece 10 seconds returning the

, ,
table 5 seconds inserting a new piece 10 se c onds starting the machine

, ,
I
3 seconds altogether 33 seconds This added to the 26 seconds for
“
.
, ,
milling makes 5 9 seconds for the ent ire operation

, t should be .
kept in mind that all figures given here a r e merely assumed and are
only used for comparison
S eco g
.
U s i n Tw o V i s e s
nd M eth od —
Us e two vises facing .
each other and placed lengthwise on the table The operation is as .
follows : P ut a piece in first vise ; start machine While milling the .
first piece put a piece in the second vise When first pie c e is milled .
throw out feed and advance table s o as to bring the second piece to
cutter Throw in feed and while milling second piece remove first
.
,
piece When second piece is finished stop machine remove second

.
,
piece,return table and start the cycle over Keeping the same ele .
I
ments as before we will find the time required for two pieces as
,
follows : nserting first piece 1 0 seconds start machine 3 seconds , ,
mill first piece 2 6 seconds disengage feed 2 seconds advance table

, ,
8 seconds engage feed 2 seconds mill second piece 2 6 seconds

p
, , ,
sto machine 5 seconds remove piece 10 seconds return table 1 0

, ,
seconds altogether 1 0 2 seconds or 5 1 seconds per piece C onsider

, , .
ing that we gained 8 seconds per piece this second method is ,

1 88 THE C IN CINNA TI MILLING MACHINE C O MPANY
better than the first when we have a large number of pieces to

,
mill
g S g
.
—
S
T h i r d M e t h o d U s i n a t r i n J i g Us e a special holding .
A
device in which pieces are placed tandem uch a device is usually .
A
called a string j ig rrange the j ig so that the pieces are very close
.
together with only about between them ssuming 1 0 pieces .
in the j ig we proceed as follows : P ut first piece in j ig advance the

, ,
table start machine and while milling put in all the other pieces A s
, , .
soon as the last piece is put in the j ig start removing pieces at the other ,
end and stop the machine when the last piece h as j ust passed the
A
cutter Time it S O that only this last piece h as to be removed when the
.
machine is standing still s each piece requires one extra 1

.
1
allow -
A
27 seconds for the milling time ins tead of 2 6 seconds But this is onl y .
for the first piece ll other pieces a re milled in a shorter time

.
,
I
because the cutter is still on the first piece when it is entering the
A
second n other words we do not need to make allowance for the
p
.
,
a proach on each piece ltogether the length to be milled is .
A
1 0 times 2 plus 9 times T g plus approach for the first piece
”
l ”
.
ltogether 2 1 1 3
This will be accomplished in 2 10 seconds We .
must now also consider the fact that the first piece is s o short that it
H
would be dangerous for the operator to insert the second piece while
H
the first is being milled e will therefore insert two pieces before
p
.
he starts the machine e will also leave two ieces to be removed

.
when he stops the m

I
achine We now find the time for ten pieces .
as follows : nserting first two pieces 20 seconds starting machine ,
5 seconds stopping machine 5 seconds removing two last pieces

, ,
2 0 seconds returning table 1 5 se c onds ; altogether 65 seconds

, ,
'
plus t he 2 1 0 seconds for milling or 2 7 5 seconds This is 27 %3 ,

.
seconds per piece or less than half the t ime requir ed by the first
I
method .
A
t might be asked here if it is possible for the operator to
insert and remove 8 pieces during the milling time S we allow .
10 S econds for inserting and 10 seconds for removing one piece it ,
will take 160 seconds to insert and remove 8 pieces whereas the cut ,
ting time is 2 1 0 seconds The operator h as therefore a margin O f .
I
50 seconds The time required to place the j ig on the milling
.
machine is no greater than that required for o n e vise f therefore .

, ,
the quantity of pieces to be milled per year is large enough to
I
j ustify the expense O f the fixture this method should have the prefer ,
ence over the first and second methods n considering the gain made .
we S hould not only consider t h e saving in labor cost but also the im ,
seconds advan c e table 3 seconds remove piece 1 0 seconds ; total

, ,
63 seconds which is S lower than on the hori z ontal machine
g
.
,
Fi f t h M e t h o d —
V e r t i c a l M i l l i n w i t h Tw o V i s e s Use two .
vises on a Vertical Machine T his method will be exactly l ike the .
previous one except that we remove one piece and insert the next
,
one while the piece in the other vise is being milled We find for
,
.
at
NO 2
th e
. V c
e rt i a
r ate o f
l w hh u c u l
2 20 pe r
it 20
o
”
C ir
r .
ar
Fi g
A t ta
.
ch m
176
ent , ll
m i i n g g ra y iro n c
as t i ng s x
I
the complete cycle covering the two pieces the following keeping ,
in mind that the machine never needs to be stopped : nsert first

piece 1 0 seconds advance table to cutter 5 seconds engage feed 1
, ,
se c ond mill 3 0 seconds ; while milling remove

, ,
and insert piece in other vise ; disengage feed

1 second advance table 5 seconds engage feed
, ,
1 second mill second piece 3 0 seconds dis en

, ,
gage feed 1 second advance table 3 seconds ,
and start new cycle Total time for two pieces .
g g
87 seconds or time per piece 4 3 % seconds
,
.
A
Th e R e l a t i o n o f F a c e M i l l i n t o U s i n
a Cu t t er o n a n rbo r t will be noted that . I
we always put the piece in the vise or fixture with its broad side
toward the cutter This seems quite natural because the feed will
.
then be along the s h ort side ; in other words we will have to feed ,
2 instead O f 4
”
There is absolutely no doubt about it that this
is the quickest way when we use the hori z ontal machine and a
spiral cutter but when we use th e vertical m achine and an end
,
mill conditions have been changed and it may be well to analyze

,
NO .
s a d I ro ns
2
4
V
'
x
cl
e rt i a Mi
re a
ll
d
er w
y lh it 20
”
h
fo r p o i s i ng ,
r
Fi g
ci c l u
at
.
ar
177
at t a
the
ch m
r a t e of
ent an d S
2 p er
p
mi n
e
u ci l
a
te .
fix t u re ll
m i in g
this somewhat closer Offering the broad side to the cutter requires
.
a cutter : O ffering the narrow side to the cutter requires only a

cutter The 4 3 cutter requires an approach of
. 4 1 ”
Plac
ing the piece with the narrow side to the cutter requires an approach
of only The 2 2 cutter can run
1 times as fast as the
”
4 / 2 cutter or 10 2 revolutions Using

”
l .
the same feed of 120 per revolution we .

k ”
get feed per minute The lengt h .
O f cut on each piece is the approach of
p lus the lengt h of 4 or The ”
A
time for the cut will therefore be 2 2 , ,
seconds . ll the other factors remain

the same The time for two pieces is
.
,
Fi g " 8
therefore 7 1 seconds or 3 5 % se c onds per
’
,
1 92 THE CIN C INNATI MILLING MA C HINE C O MPANY
piece showing that it is actually more econo mical to mill the long
,
way across this piece when using a Vertical Machine This is better .
H
than the time required when using two vises on the hori z ontal
machine owever the gain due to the faster feed has been O ffset
.
,
to a g rea t extent by the greater travel required because of the

diameter of the cutter
I
.
e n c e O f D i a m e t e r O f F a c e o r En d M i l l Figure 17 5
nflu .
shows the relation O f the 4 l é diameter cutter to the work and also ”
“ ”
how the approach distance must be figured when estimating on
A
face milling When the cutter first touches the work its center is at
.
I A
.When it has moved to B it will have covered the full width of
I
the piece n other words it is necessary to travel from
. to B to ,
bring the cutter fully into the work This is n order to .
traverse the work completely the cutte r must move from B to C ,
which is the same as the width of the piece The tota l travel ,
”
therefore is the width O f the piece plus the approach or
, ,
The quality of finish required makes it advisable in many cases to

continue the travel until
I
the cutter h as entirely
c l eared the work f we .
wish to do this then the

additional travel will be
the width of the piece
E
.
plus the distance D or ,
2 plus or ”
making the total travel

for milling the piece
“
Because of t h e long ap
”
proach and the long
overtravel required on
m ost work face milling ,
on a single piece like this

is not economical even
though i t does permit of
faster feeds .
w u ul uu l
Fig 17 9
g S
.
L c ti g
o a k i fi t
n f ci c
or c ti
n mi i g
x
C o
re
n t
or
i n u or
u s V e r t i c
ar o r
a l on n o s n .
Mil lin till another .
A
method which might be employed for this piece would be to place a
special fixture on a Circular ttachment somewhat like the illus
t r a t i o n s Fig 1 7 6 or Fig 1 7 7
,
.With such an arrangement the .
1 94 THE C IN CINNATI MILLING MA CHINE C O MPANY
is room for further study There are various things which affect
.
the time required to complete a piece such a s for instance the , , ,
S ize of the cutter the diameter of the holding fixture the distance
, ,
between the pieces in the holding fixture and even the way in which
we place the pieces whether lengthwise or crosswise The space
, .
O f this book forbids us to go into all these points in detail but we ,
will illustrate how the placing of the piece and the diameter of the
fixtur e be c ome elements of final economy
Let us assume again that we want to mill a little bracket
.
A
x2 ,
4
and that we employ a fixture bolted to the Circular Milling ttach
A
ment as shown in diagram Fig 1 79 The outside diameter O f this
,
. .
device is 3 0 and the piece is to be placed as shown at and B For

”
.
I
the purpose of chucking we will allow between the inner edges
A
of the two adj acent pieces n that case there is a distance of
.
A
between the points and B so that the cutter h as to travel ,
in order to finish one piece complete ssuming a cutter and .
I
the same feeds and speeds as in the previous examples we find that ,
it takes 3 7 seconds to mill one piece f we had placed them as .
sho wn at C and D of the diagram again allowing between two ,
adj acent pieces for the purpose Of chucking we would find tha t there ,
is a distance of between the points C and D and as we now ,
use a cutter we would do the milling complete in 3 0 seconds

,
.
I
This S hows how the placing O f the piece in the fixture influences the
time required f we had chosen a fixture 18 in diameter then the
.
”
,
distance between the points C and D would have been and the
time per piece would have been 3 4 seconds This shows how the .
diameter of the fixture influences the time at least to a certain ,
extent
I n many cases the time of chucking is conside ably more than the
.
time of milling I n all such cases an attempt should be made to do

"
the milling continuously because then all the time of milling is

,
I
saved and the time O f the entire O peration becomes merely the time
,
required by the operator to do the chucking n such a case it makes .
absolutely no diff erence h o w we do the milling whether with a ,
larger or smaller cutter because we have to make the milling time

,
S
sufficiently long to permit the operator to chuck a piece Fig 180 . .
I
shows a case of this nature teel pole pieces for a self starter are
.
-
being milled t will be noted that the surfaces to be milled have

.
considerable idle space between them but this is O f no importance , ,
a s it takes the operator longer to chuck than it takes the cutter

R T ON A ND
'
C 19 5
to mill I t should be noted that in this case a pair

. interlocking Of
helical mills is used

A o g e e s g F x Sometimes
.
ut m a tic
C l a m pin e an d R l a in i tur .
it is practical to make a simple automati c clamping device part O f

the fixture in which case the operator would do nothing except
,
are
Co n t in
pro
u
d uc de
u o s
at
ll
m i ing
t he
w h u u c cl
it
rat e o f
an a
20 p e r
Fi g
to m a t i
m i n te
. 18 1
.
a m p i ng l
a n d r e e as i n g fi xt u re . P ie c es
A
remove a milled piece and put a new piece in place leaving the clamp ,
ing to the fixture itself Fig 1 8 1 shows such a device . s the . .
attachment rotates a hardened

steel plate passing under a roller
bears on the clamping device and
S
holds the piece securely while it
passes under the cu tter hortly .
after it h as passed the cutter the

clamping is released permitting ,
the operator to remove the piece

F i g 18 l A -
when It arrIves at the load i ng p osI

196 THE CIN CINNATI MILLING MA C HINE C O MPANY
t ion Under those conditions it takes more time to mill than to

.
handle a piece and the total time be c omes exceedingly short The .
I
pieces shown in the illustration are regularly milled at the rate of
2 0 per minute t will be seen that in this case the distance
.
between two adj oining pieces is as short as it can be made and yet
I
take care of the unavoidable variations in the size of the pieces .
n other words the cutter does not have to travel over idle spaces
, ,
I
and all the time consumed is actual cutting time .
t will be seen from the above that there is room for study as
to the best method to be employed when milling and that a great ,
many points must be considered before reaching a conclusion One .
O f the main points to be considered at all times is the quantity of
pieces to be handled both the quantity of pieces to be made per

,
I
year and also the quantity O f pieces which are made in one lot .
f a piece is made in such quantities that one operation keeps a

machine constantly employed for months at a time it does not matter
if it takes a few hours longer to s et up the machine and fixture ,
but if the pieces come through in relatively small lots requiring , ,
sa y ,
only a day to mill then it becomes necessary to select some
,
method which requires only a short time to s e t up the machine ,
because all of the setting up time must be charged to this one lot ;
in other words to one day s work What would be c ome a negli
,
’
.
g ibl e time for several months work might become prohibitive for
’
,
’
a day s work .
The above brief dis cussion shows clearly the importan c e O f the
careful selection O f the P RO PE R ME TH OD O F MILLING .
1 98 THE C IN CINNA TI MILLING MA CHINE C O MPANY
with the first named method and least with the last method ow . H
ever if there are not more than 100 pieces to be made in each
,
N
lot and not more than 1 2 lots to be handled per year the question ,
of cost O f equipment becomes important ow if we will assume .

,
that the rotary method produces the piece in one third O f a minute -
,
the total time for the 1 0 0 lot will of course be minutes The , , .
—
square method produces the piece in one half minute giving a time ,
of 5 0 minutes and the reciprocating method in two thirds O f a

,
-
minute giving a time of

, minutes per lot Obviously if we .
,
were considering continuous production or even production of such ,
quantities as would permit the machine to run for a week without

changing the j ob there could be no further thought given to the
,
question O f cost of initial equipment or for that matter to the ,
question of cost Of upkeep But under the conditions we have laid.
down we must in addition to the items above specified consider the

H
,
S
time taken in setting up ere again we will use arbitrary figures
. .
etting up the rotary attachment including the mounting of the ,
circular table on the machine connecting the rotary feed mechanism ,
and mounting the fixture on the rotary attachment would consume

40 for the s quare method of milling which merely needs ,
the setting of the fixture on the table 2 0 minutes ; and for the ,
reciprocating method 2 0 minutes also ; S O that it is apparent at

,
once that there is no gain in the total time of the rotary method
with its higher individual productivity as compared with the square
method Therefore since the square method is the simpler of the
.
two from the standpoint of fixture design and cost it would take
, ,
precedence .
Comparing the square method with the reciprocating method

we have a total time of 7 0 minutes as against the total time of
minutes This repeated twelve times during the year would
.
give us a balance in favor of the square method of 2 19 minutes or ,
approximately hours We are therefore really only j ustified

.
, ,
in spending 3 % hours more on the construction of the square fixture
A
over and above that we would spend on the construction of the
reciprocating fixture ll this again on the assumption that it is
.
I
desired to make the fixtures pay for themselves in the course of a
year f a diff erent standard is adopted then this
. hours may ,
increase to 7 1 0 V or even 14 hours

upd w h b pp u ud l u d d ch clud
.
, ,
k
T h e t er m
*
s e tting as a o ve se is a so n e rs t o o to in e the
lc d
t im e t a en f o r t e aring o n t is a ar a t s a n d re s t or i n g th e ma ine t o i t s
n o rm a on it io n .
A T EA ISE R T ON M ILLING A ND M ILLING MA CHINES 199
S ki l l Wo r k m e n a s a F a c t o r Th e above comparison deals

of .
I
only with the influence of the cost of the fixture on the selection of
the method n addition to this there is o f course to be c onsidered
.
, ,
the question of how the S kill O f the available workmen affe c ts the
de g ree of complexity permissible in the fixture
I
.
’
t is O bvious that the simplest arrangement from the operator s
point of view is the rotary method in which his functions are con
fined to those of releasing and removing finished work and inserting
and clamping the unfinished work so that here decision would tend ,
to wards the rotary method .
The next S implest method would be the re ciprocating method in ,
H
which the table merely travels from left to right and from right to
left
. ere in addition to his work handling functions he must exer
,
-
,
cise that O f reversing the direction of the table feed and possibly
moving the table a certain distance either through the hand or
power quick return .
’
The square method calls for most in the way of the operator s
activity since he must continue to change the feeds S O as to em
,
gage alternately the cross and longitudinal feed and must also r e
member to reverse such feeds every half cycle .
Ma in t en an c e C ost A
nother item to be consider ed is the cost
.
of maintenance or percentage of productive hours of the fixture .
This must always be in favor of the simplest fixture no matter how

carefully the desi g n of the others be worked out The above com .
parisons have been limited to three methods N O attention h as been .
paid to the S imple method O f holding one piece in a simple vise like -
fixture which would in all probability be the most suitable method

, ,
I
to employ for a j ob that is run through in the quantities we have
selected .t is largely because this method would be so O bviously
the correct one that we have omitted it from the comparisons ,
the only purpose of which is to indicate the different points to be
S
watc hed in arriving at a correct decision as to the selection of methods .
ummari z ing the above therefore and leaving the question of the
, ,
S imple fixture out O f consideration it appears that from the point ,
of view O f production the decision lies between the rotary and square
methods From the point of view of cost of fixture the decision
.
favors the reciprocating method The quality of help again favors .
I
the rotary method and the maintenance cost the reciprocating
method .t is reasonably O bvious that the simplest or reciprocating
method wins most points in this contest and the fixture will probabl y
be made along these lines .
20 0 THE C IN CINNA TI M ILLING MAC HINE C O MPANY
I t is of course understood that all of the foregoing analyses

, ,
should properly be made by the time study department in con

j unction with the fixture designing department .
I
Much of the matter discussed does not properly pertain
to a discussion of fixtures t has been found desirable however
.
, ,
I
to insert it at this point since there is really no exact point O f sever
,
ance between the tool designing and time setting departments t .
will further be understood that immediately the quantities that have

been used in the above illustration shall change they being made ,
larger or smaller a completely changed s e t of figures have to be con

,
A
s id er e d which will probably lead to entirely differen t concl usions .
part from the classifications of fi xt II r es according to methods

'
there is an additional classification that can be made between those

fixtures which must locate the work with reference to a cast surface ,
either plain bosses or cores and those which must locate the work
, ,
S
from some surface or surfaces previously machined these surfaces ,
again being either plain circular or formed

, till another classi .
fi cat io n may be made between those fixtures which are c oncerned

only with the production of one surface at an operation and so call
for no relative motion between the work and the table and those
which must produce two or more separate surfaces or else a con ,
t in ua t i o n of the first surface either with gaps or proj ections between .
There is still another classification which is that of fixtures in which

the feeding mechanism is contained in the fixture the milling ,
machine table itself merely being regarded as a means for the
I
preliminary adj ustments between cutter and work .
I
n addition to these classifications there must be considered t h e
question of the capacity O f the machine t may very well happen
.
that the limitations of power in the machine are such as to render

the chucking time a very negligible portion O f the total time con .
sumed so that if the operation is scheduled for such a low power

,
-
miller a different method O f chucking the work will be used than

,
that which would be proper if a powerful machine with adequate

feeding facilities were employed Of course under ideal conditions
.
, ,
the power of the machine should always be su fficient to feed the

work past the cutter at a rate governed only by the ability of the
work to withstand the feed pressure or by the degree of finish that is
,
required .The next governing factor may be the ability O f the

cutter to withstand these strains but outside of these factors there
,
ought to be no limitation imposed on productive milling through

any weakness of the machine .
F
FI TEEN TH S
upporting points and clamps to be accessible to
’
.
the O perator s hand and eye

SX A
.
I TEEN TH dequate provision for taking up end thrust s o

.
that this will not be dependent upon friction between work and
clamp
A
.
ll O f the above axioms are applicable to almost every type

of fixture
A
.
s an example O f some O f the axioms Fig 18 2 is of interest This . .
I
does not show a fixture but does show a built up construction of
,
-
AA
clamps supports and blocks for an experimental c ut
, t will be .
noted that the proj ecting arms O f the work have a solid s up
port B between the lower arm and the table ; also C between the
upper and lower arms ; that the clamps D are set so that their
pre s sure is directly over the supports and that the distance from the
I
clamping bo l t t o the fulcrum is from three to four times the distance
‘
from the bolt to the point of clamping t is of course j ust as .

, ,
important to Observe these principles in temporary set ups as it is -
in the design of the finished fixture .
Th e othe r desiderata for good fixture design may be summarized

a s follows :
Fir s t : R a p i d i t y O f C l a m p i n The maj ority of fixtures g .
employ for holding mechanism standard clamps secured with ,
screws or nuts To facilitate the insertion and removing O f the work

.
,
the clamps may be provided with a S lot so they can be easily slid
back and forth The hole in the clamp may be large enough to pass
.
around the nut so that a split washer used in conjunction enables
I
the clamp to be immediately removed as soon a s the nut h as been '
slightly slackened n certain cases p articul ar l y wh ere a proj ecting

.
,
boss has to be clamped the swinging O f the clamp around the clamp
,
ing stud through 9 0 O ften provides su fficient clearance °

This .
swinging movement should be controlled by a pin s et in the clamp

'
ing bolt and a 90 segment milled around the hole through which
°
the clamping bolt passes When the quantities j ustify the added .
expense the screws S hould be replaced by cams which can of course , , ,
be designed to give an instantaneous release with suffi cient space
A
for easy withdrawal O f the work all in conj unction with a very firm ,
gripping e ff ect gain when it is desired to operate several clamping

.
points S imultaneously compressed air can very well be used This

, .
system h as the merit not only of rapid and S imultaneous clamping

all around th e fixture but does away with the possibilities of lifting
,
.
A T EA ISER T ON M ILLING A ND MILLING MA CHINES 203
I
the work from its supports due to undue pressure being exerted at
any one point t can also be so regulated as to give a certain
.
desired pressure sufficient to hold the work and need not be suffi cient
to create any distortion .
h o u .
si n g u w
h l
N O 5 H i g - Po
d
C tt e r s 6
w
”
h er
and
Mi
4
”
er it vv ldu h ld f dd v c
i m p r o i se
i am e t e r , 3 2 r e o
.
Fi g
o
.
t io n s ,
182
i ng
ee
e i es
p er
fi i hi
n s
m in u
ng
te
c a s t s tee l p as se n g er car a x el
Seco A ce I g g
. .
nd :y f o r n s e r t i n a n d R e m ovi n Wo r k
c ss i bi l i t .
Th is point must O f course be watched in all fixture design but it is

, , ,
particularly important where the production is governed solely by

th e chucking time as in practically all rotary and most reciprocating
,
I
j obs or when the operation c onsists of the rapid milling of a small
,
sur face in a comparatively large and hard to handle casting t is - -

.
not easy to give any particular indications as to how this end is to

be a chieved since the conditions will v ary with almost every piece
G E
.
L
T h ir d : en er o u s D u c t s f o r t h e s c ap e of Ch ips an d
u br i c a n t There are two functions served by the proper o bser
.
v an c e of this rule ; first the lessening Of the time required to clean

,
the fixtur e after the work h as been removed which O f course , , ,
directly influences produ c tion ; and se c ondly the elimination of ,

the danger attendant upon chips remaining on the locating surfaces

on which the work rests which of course would throw the work
, , ,
out of its proper chucking position and where the location is from a ,
previously finished surface would result in spoiled work

g S p g
.
Fo u r t h : R e m ova l O f t h e C l a m p i n a n d u p o r t i n Me m
be r s f r o m t h e Gu t t e r Z o n e The great thing to be considered in
.
A
this is O f course the safety O f the operator One of the great reasons
, , .
why the utomatic type of machine has met with so much success
is that due to the automatic quick return from and traverse to the
, ,
cutter the work can be handled at a very safe distance from the
,
A
cutting teeth This principle should be observed in all j ig design
.
,
whether used on utomatic or Knee and Column machines and if , ,
necessary extension handles should be provided S O that the opera

,
’
tor s hand never approaches near the cutter When a string fixture .
is used it is often desirable to have a space between the first and

second pieces considerably greater than is required for the actual
dimensions of the j ob in order that the act O f chucking the second
H
,
piece can be accomplished With greater safety ere again the exact .
proportions must be worked out having in mind the length of time ,

'
required f o r the chucking and cutting operations the ideal con ,

’
dit i o ns being reached when the operator s maximum chucking and
removing effort consumes a time equal to that required to take the
A
cut over the complete number O f pieces in the fixture .
nother item to b e considered in this connection is the lessened

danger of the cutter striking the hardened clamps or nuts which ,
results either in breaking or dulling the teeth

gS
.
A S
Fi f t h C l a m pin
El i m i n a t i o n oft r a i n s f r o m T a bl e O f
‘
M a c h i n e a n d bs o r p t i o n O f a m e i n F i x t u r e While there are .
certain cases where it is not always proper to follow out this rule ,
yet it is in a great maj ority of cases very applicable Milling Machine .
tables by virtue O f their necessarily shallow section are not well

, ,
I
fitted to withstand the buckling strains that can be s et up by clamp
S
ing . t must be remembered that even the heavy table of a planer
can be buckled by clamping work to it uch strains being constantly
.
transmitted will ultimately result in the distortion of either the

T slots or true plane O f the table both of which conditions imm e di
-
,
ately affect the accuracy O f the work produced The fixture should .
,
therefore be designed with su fficient depth to withstand and absorb

,
all the clamping strains This frequently and in fact generally

.
, , ,
means that the base of the fixture should be of a box section Those .
I
fixture is j ust strong enough to withstand the feed pressures and
cutter pressures the chatter is likely to be accentuated
, f the fixture .
be from four to five times as heavy as is really necessary much of ,
this chatter will be absorbed There is no reason other than that .
connected with the cost O f the cast iron in the fixture why a milling ,
s tee
a
No 2 Pv
.
ars
l cu
lv lub v d u f chd h ld ba
l c
i n C o n e D ri e n Mi e r
-
T w o i se s i n t a n e m e a
tt i n g r e e s s e s
o t wo rs
Fi g . 1 84
d eep ,
ong
w
l u hc u
d b h d
1 6
”
i e on
t i k
ot si es O f
C t ters 3 / 2
two
dai
a 60
mt
c b r
e er ,
on
50
,
c
. .
, ,
t io n s (3 4 p e r m i n t e ) ee Ti m e p er p i e 2 2 m in
”
re o , . . e . tes .
fixture may not be very heavy S In c e there is but seldom any vertical ,
a dj u st ing o r handling Of the fixture which throws a muscular strain

é
on the O perator The difference between drilling j igs and milling

'
fixtur es in f t his respect is very marked and the tool designer must
approach the design of a milling fixture with an entirely di fferent
conception O f proportions than he would use in connection with a
drill j ig . I
t is impossible to over emphasi z e the need for extra -
N
weight in all milling fixture bodies .
ow if we keep all the above factors in mind we can then con

, ,
sider the different types Of fixture in more detail .
V i s e s Us e d
F i x t u r es Wh erever possible we should O f
as .
,
course us e standard equipment To this end it very frequently

,
.
A S
happens that one or a pair of standard vises can be utili z ed to good
advantage Fig 1 83 shows the use of two Cincinnati ll teel V ises
. .
-
which with the addi tion O f supporting blocks laid on each side
,
~
,
A T EA ISE R T ON MILLIN G A ND MILLING MA C HINES 2 07
I
form a highly efficient pair of fixtures for this particular operation .
t will be noted that these vises having a swiveling movable j aw , ,
adapt themselves easily to the irregularities of the casting and ,
further that the j aw plates being angled at the back tend to pull
, ,
the work down firmly on the fixed supporting points which it ,
will be noted are as close to the clamping points as is possible The .
additional adj ustab l e supporting point is brought out to the extreme
l v l l cu l w d l l ba
w h hcul cal l v lu c cf d l
Fi g 18 5
u u
.
c b h ick
u
N o 2 P a i n C o n e D r i e n Mi e r i e 9 o n g i n t o 60 a r o n s t ee
" "
-
tt i n g s o ts 1 rs , t at
h hi
.
.
, ,
end m i p e r m i n t e ) r o g i n g , 068 fi n i s
”
o n e c ut it e i 1 60 r e o
, t i o n s , ee
. 0 15 . ng .
T i m e fo r two t s , t w o c h u c k i n g s , p e r p i e e , o m p e t e , 7% m i n t es .
end of the piece I n the manufacture .rifles typewriters adding Of , ,
machines and similar parts very great use is made of a standard

,
vise fixture th is fixture being provided with false remo vable j aws
,
which are made to suit the contour of the pie c e to be held S uch .
vises are usually provided with a cam movement for rapidly opening
and closing the vise j aws which movement also gives the maximum
,
of gripping effect at the conclusion of the stroke

An example of the
.
of the machine vise is found in Fig 184

us e .
,
I
which illustrates the us e of two plain cast iron v ises with plain j aws -
,
A I
holding in each vise two tamp racks n this cas e a spacing block .
is used t is loosely attached to the v ise to prevent its being

.
mislaid or tend to work over into the position o c cupied

,
by the work This arrangement is of course applicable only to

.
, ,
work that comes within reasonably fine limits O f parallelism and

thi ckness The us e of two vises permits O f the removal of the work
.
2 08 CIN CINNATI M ILLING MA C HINE C O MPANY
Fi g . 186
2 10 THE C IN CINNA TI MILLING MAC HINE C O MPANY
and isalso a preventive against the plunger being lost when the
fixture is in or being transported to the toolroom The plunger is
, .
clamped in position by either a sleeve directly operated on by a

screw or by a split sleeve both halves of which are pulled together
, ,
I
with a screw the first of these methods being shown in the illus
,
t r a t io n .t will be evident that in both methods of clamping the

support is entirely dependent
upon the friction between the side
O f the plunger and the clamping
member For heavy work or work

.
where a j arring effect is produced ,
it is desirable to have a more
F ig . 18 8
solid form of adj ustable support standard construction for this .
is S hown in Fig 1 90 and consists O f a vertical plunger guided and

.
,
restricted in its movement by the point of a screw and having its

lower end beveled at an angle of This end rests on a similar i
surface on the end O f a hori z ontal sliding plunger which is moved
I
forward by a screw in the fixture This construction h as the merit O f
.
being cheap simple and self locking

,
t is not usually considered
-
.
I
desirable to put a spring on this plunger to force it down when the
adjusting screw is released t is rather better to rely upon the
.
operator forcing the plunger down with his finger which operation ,
insures the cleanliness of the top O f the supporting point .
CLAMPS The standard constructions of these can again be

.
divided into two types : those which press the work directly down
on to the supporting member and those wh ich hold by a S ide pres
sure as i n the case of vise j aws The general principles of clamps
,
.
have been touched on on page 20 2 and the illustrations here given

, ,
A T EA ISE
R T ON MILLING A ND MILLING MA CH I NES 211
Fi g . 189
Fig . 19 0
Fi g . 19 1
2 12 T HE C IN C INNATI MILLING MA CHINE C O MPANY
S
clearly S how the application of some of these principles The .
simplest form O f lotted Clamp Fig 1 9 1 is provided with a round , .

,
heel and beveled gripping portion The rounding of the heel is s o .
that the clamp may adjust itself on a three point bearing two of -
,
these points being on the work the third on the supporting part ,
O f the fixture Theoretically such a clamp S hould be used in con

.
,
j unction with a ball washer but practically the ordinary flat washer
,
S
serves .
The wiveling Clamp Fig 1 92 having the same gripping portion

,
.
,
and heel is restricted in its swinging by the pin sho wn in the clamping
stud .
The S winging Clamp Fig 1 9 3 is used only when the work is

,
.
,
so large and unwieldy as to require a good deal more space for

insertion than is usually necessary This construction consists of .
a clamp swinging around a hori z ontal axis having provision at the

gripping end for a one point contact only and since its plane of
-
,
swinging is fixed the clamping bolt swings into the clamp from
,
the side S O that when the clamp is released the bolt fal ls down below
the work and the clamp is swung back entirely behind the pivot .
The Cam Fig 1 94 h as an angled surf ace and in the one move
,
.
, ,
ment effects three pressures ; it tends to force the work down on

to the support o ver against the side stop and up against the end
stop .
Clamps which hold by gripping the work sidewise are shown in

Figs 1 9 5 and 1 9 6
. The heel of the clamp is angled s o that the grip
.
I
ping o f the piece tends also to pull it
down on to the supporting points t .
is usually desirable to serrate or fi l e

cut the gripping surfaces and the hole
must of course be S lotted in order , ,
to allow of slight vertical adjust

ment The heel is again rounded .
and a compression spring provided

to keep the heel of the clamp up
against the undercut surface of the
Fi g 1 92 .
fixture .
S
The simplest and one O f the most satisfactory stand ard forms
of ide Clamp is S hown in Fig 1 9 6 and consists of a simple screw .
having a hardened pointed end said screw being set to point down
, ,
ward to an angle O f approximately so that its advance also

produces a downward pressure This of course puts certain .
, ,
2 14 THE CIN CINNA TI M ILLING MACHINE C OMPANY
in dentations in the work but where these are not O bj ectionable

,
this form of clamping has much to commend it on the score of

)
S implicity and strength

S L
.
FOR I DE OCATI O NS there are practically no standard con
S
s t r uc t i o n s The usual practice is to press the work against flat or
.
pointed screw heads ometimes .
it is desired to locate from some

surface in conjunction with a boss ,
in which case flags may be utilized .
The flag consists O f a swinging

member the end of which termi
,
nates in a profile which ag rees
A
with t he b oss from which it is
desired to l ocate fter the work .
has been chucked in the fixture

the flag is swung into position
over the boss and the operator by
,
means of various screws and

clamps wedges the work over
,
A
until the flag and boss are in
I
agreement good example of
.
this is shown in Fig 1 9 7 n other . .
cases the location must be from

the surface that is to be machined ,
F i g 19 5
A
so that the locating member must
.
be removed before the cutter passes over the work comparatively.
simple way O f doing this shown in Fig 1 9 8 entails the us e of a

, .
,
bracket having either a formed locating piece or two screws which

may be s et in any desired plane This bracket can be slid along the
.
front of the fixture s o that

the work having been lined
up by it will be left free
for the cutter when the
bracket has been slid to
,
the next pie c e or out to ,
the end O f the fixture .
There is with this con

F i g 196
struction O f course the
, ,
.
danger that the operator may forget to remove his locating piece ,
and for c ertain high production j obs a method similar to that shown
in Fig 1 9 9 can be followed
. .
A T EA ISER T ON M ILLING A ND M ILLING MA CHINES 2 15
The fixture is S O arranged that the sid e locating points are auto
A
m a t ica ll y removed from the path of the cutter by the advance of the
A
table The illustration S hows the details O f this construction
.
.
pair of swing brackets carrying the locating p o Int proper are

, , ,
min
a
u fi h
NO
te ,
.l w h a d fi u
u f c ca
4 Pl i n Mi e r
”
it t
n i s i n g t h e 13 x 1 1
”
n
s
em
r a
xt
e of a
re a n d
Fi g
12
s t-iro n
.
”
197
di
cr a ca f
nk
c l
a m e t er
seu v lu
a e
in
fmi , 2 6 re o
m i n t es.
t io n s , ee di ng 20 p e r
”
caused to rotate around the pivot by the movement of the plungers

B which are in turn actuated by the cam C that is fastened
,
to the stationary headstock

SE
.
ING P IE CES are O ften used in milling fixtures to insure the

TT
proper relationship between the machined surfa c e and some other

rough or previously machined part These setting pieces may be .
divided into those that are hardened and placed in such a position
as to be entirely free from the action of the cutter and those which ,
are soft and can not be s o placed The first type is well illustrated .
in Fig 2 00 which shows a large angle bracket fixture carrying a

.
,
casting which is to be operated on by a comparatively complicated

gang On the fa c e O f this angle bra c ket and well remo ve d from th e
.
2 16 THE CIN CINNA TI MILLING MA C HINE C O MPANY
cutters will be noted two hardened gauges having one flat and ,
A ,
one angular S ide These correspond with the important surfaces

.
to be machined
I n setting up a j ob the cutter s are placed on the arbor and the
.
fixture brought up s o that the cut ters are between the setting points ,
pieces O f tissue paper bei ng used to determine their proximity The

*
.
cutters being set in the p roper relationship the table is moved back ,
Fi g . 198
I
to the chucking position the work insert e d and the pieces all milled
,
.
I
t is possible for the operator to test the continue d accuracy of
alignment at any time by simply repeating this process t is not .
,
of course intended that he S hould do this for each piece

,
.
A
The other type of setting piece shown in Fig 20 1 is based on the .
use of a soft steel piece fastened to the end of the fixture and
, ,
having stamped on its surface a dimension which dimension is ,
I
supposed to be measured by the t o o l keep ing department as soon as
pl h cck c u u u d pd d ud
the fixture is turned in after use f by any accident the setting
.
,
I n o ur o w n r a t i e t h e g a ges
*
an d a 0 1 0.
”
stee t i n e ss g a g e 1 S
o r s e tt i n g
se i ns t e a
o i n ts ar e
of t iss u ppe
ma
a
e
er
.
.
0 10
”
n e r s i ze ,
218 THE CIN CINNA TI MILLING MAC HINE C O MPANY
side pressure the finishing cut is taken at the same feed resulting
, ,
in a very flat surf ace with a degree of smoothness sufficient to meet

the requirements This fixture is of about as simple a construction
.
as can be evolved for such a j ob as that illustrated
S g g
.
Ta n d e m Fix t u r e s tr in Ji s Following the simple fixture

, .
to hold one piece only comes either two such fixtures s et in tandem
,
hw
p er m in te
l
u c ca
-
a c
N o 5 H ig P o e r
Pi e
.l u Mi
e,
er
st
.
.
L
I ro n
r g es t
, 18
”
t t e rs 8
o ng .
”
Fi g
di
.
Tim e for t he
2 00
a m et e r , 35
c ut
re v lu u
o
3V
t io n s
2 m i n te s
C ut
.
wd
i e, 1 35 ”
d ee p . Fd
ee
for either gang or reciprocal milling or a string fixture which a cc o m ,
p l is h es the same results

I
Fig 2 04 illustrates such a fixture arranged
. .
A
to hold s ix pieces n this case the work rests on two fixed points
.
,
, and on two additional points B which are carried on each end , ,
O f a lever so that the depression of one end of the lever results in an
elevation of the other end and a consequent automatic lining up

O f all four support poin ts in one plane This does away with the .
need for individual adjustment of the fourth support point for each
piece and is made possible largely by the rectangular shape O f the
A
piece and the even distribution O f the cut The details of this device
p
.
are shown in Fig 2 0 5 ll three ieces at each end of the fixture

. .
A T EA ISE R T ON MILLING A ND MILLING MACHINES 2 19
are clamped by the one cam lever C which first brings o ver the
E
, ,
clamp D nearest to the central fixed portion O f the fixture , , ,
following up with the closing O f the second clamp F and finally

G
, ,
with the end c lamp which it will be noted is made very much
, , .
heavier than the intermediate clamps S ince this end clamp must ,
at
No
73 f cu
.
eet
a
2 P l i
n C o n e-
t t i n g s p ee d
D ri
, .
v f dll w hv l u
en
033
”
Mi
ee
er it
p er r e
s tr i n g
o
Fig
t io n
.
j ig
20 1
fi i hi
n s
p er m i n
lu
n g s t ee ma
te) i n
ch i
7
1 5
ne
u
p arts
m in te ea ch .
l ong ,
1 ”
11 5 wd
i e,
take the whole of the feed pressure t will be noted further that . I
the arrangement O f the clamps is such that their continued forward
movement results in a downward pressur e This point must be .
A
continually watched and has been emphasized in axiom 5 page 201 , .
I
ttention is also drawn to the pro v ision for taking care of any lack
of parallelism in the piece to be clamped n Fig 20 5 the details . .
of the swinging c lamp show that on one side it is provided with two
gripping edges and on the other side with o ne edge only The piece .
is therefore held between three points S O that its lack O f parallelism

has no effect on the piece behind The same result is sometimes .
O btained through side c lamps of the constru c tion shown in Fig 1 9 5 .

,
which have their heel or fulcrum arranged S O that an advance along

the line of the clamp bolt is accomplished by a downward move
ment along the inclined plane .
220 THE C IN CI NNATI MILL I NG MACHINE C OMPAN Y
I t is
H
of c ourse understood that either O f the fixtures above
, ,
described c an be used e qually well on a Vertical or oriz ontal

Machine and no attempt will be made in this chapter to di ff erentiate
between the us e of different typ es Of machines .
u vu w y Fi g . 20 2
u w dh u f fu d
F
V c l Mi ll ll h c t g l 18 3 h
l cu u
m i i n g t h e p er i p
”
No 4 er t i a er er of a re an e x it o t s to p p i n g e i t er ee
d d W th t l h d R g hi d 20
. 4
m i n te
3 ” ”
o r s p ee an i o ea i n g a n o ff se t er e t h e c ut en s o n g c ut 1 5 ee p , ee per
h
. .
,
i n is i n g c ut 20
”
per mi n te . Tota tt i n g t i m e 9 m i n t es .
The first of the illustrations gi ven abo v e refers to a fixture that

may be used either singly or in tandem with the feed press ur e in the
same dire ction I
t can e qually well be used for a re c iprocating
.
j ob except that in su c h a case it would be desirable to put the fixed

,
stop for re c eiv ing the c utter or feed thrust

on the other side of the fixture so that
the left hand fixture when feeding towards
p
-
the right would take the feed ressure on

the solid stop on the left hand end of the -
fixture and the right hand fixture when -
feeding towards the left would take its
I
thrust on the fixed stop located on the
Fi g 20 2 A .
-
right hand side - t will then be seen that .
with the exception of the location of the end stop the fixtures for ,
individual gang or re c ipro c al milling may be the same .

Lo ad in gFx i t ur es . I n certain limited fields the loading fixture

can be very advantageously employed P articularly is this the .
case where the length O f cut or time taken for the cut is extremely
I
short and where the chucking of the piece consumes a very large
,
proportion of the total time n such cases a pair of fixtures can be .
used one of them being on the table of the milling machine the
, ,
l a cu v d l w h a vd lu ul f l dcla Fi g . 2 04
fi u lu l u duuc
u
NO 2 P i n C o n e- D r i en Mi er it t n e m m tip e m ping xt re , m i in g a m i n m m ag n e t o
b
.
L a r g es t i a m e te r , 23 6 t io n s , m in te) Pr o t io n 3 t o 4
”
as es t te rs re 0 71
c
. o ee .
p er .
p ie es p er m in te .
other on a convenient bench where either the operator or a helper

can be removing the finished and inserting fresh unfinished pieces
Fig 20 5—
.
,
A shows an arrangement for milling spark plugs in which

.
this method is utili z ed There are two work holders each provided
.
,
with a number of collets for gripping an individual piece The work .
holder proper takes care of 3 7 plugs The plugs are chucked in the .
fixture which is lifted to the table dropped over a locating pivot ,
I
attached to the table and clamped with bolts sliding in the T S lots .
t is lo cated accurately by means of a plunger fitting between the

S ides of the T slots and sliding in a bush carried in the fixture The .
work is then milled indexed through 60 by means of other bush

,
°
ings in which the plunger fits and then r e indexed making three -
,
A T EA ISE
R T ON MILLING AND M ILLING MA CHINES 223
22 4 THE CIN C INNA TI MILLING MAC HINE C OMPANY
passages in all which completes the milling of all six sides O f the 3 7
,
plugs The fixture is then released lifted O ff the table and the
.
, ,
other fixture containing new plugs dropped in its place The opera .
tion is then repeated With this arrangement the helper can be

.
working all the time on the fixture that is O ff the milling machine
table and he can further be assisted by the machine operator in
,
the intervals between reversing the feed removing and inserting ,
l a w h l ad fi u a u
fi u c l hl l
Fi g 2 0 5 -A
lu u
.
lu
N O 2 P i n C o n e- D r i v e n Mi l l e r i t ch h ld k pl h d
u
o ing xt r es , e o i n g 37 s p ar gs T ree in e xi n g s
d d c th c
. .
o m p e t e t h e S i x S i es o f t h e p O ne m a n o m p et e s p a r k
O
of the xt res gs . and a e p er p ro e r ee
p g s p er m i n t e .
the fixtures For the successful operation of this method reason

.
,
ably quick devices must be used for the clamping O f the loading
fixture to the table cams and compressed air having been success
,
g Ag S
fully applied for this purpose .
I
. Ri h t n l e or q u a r e Fi x
Q
22 fl ture
_
n all of the above cases we .
only us e the table feed of the machine

in one direction with a consequent
idle return stroke which may or may
not be utili z ed to give a finishing
cut To eli minate this return stroke .
Fi g 205 B
we can where the work is small
-
,
S
enough use a right angle or square fixture as referred to in the
,
comparison of methods previously made uch a fixture as shown .
y
in Fig 206 does away with any idle travel whatever and O ften will
p
.
,
y
from the point O f view of production com are favorabl with the ,
rotar method .
THE CIN CINNATI MILLING MAC HINE C OMPANY
turned down and provided with a screw head so that while the crank
handle can e a sily be slipped O ff the square it can not be entirely
removed from the screw and lost This arrangement means that .
the operator can always set the crank handle in an easy position for
gripping the work and still make allowance for variation in the
thickness of the casting
A
.
nother point to be O bserved on this fixture is that all of the
S
four handles for gripping the work are brought either to the front
or side O f the fixture uch an arrangement is of course absolutely
.
, ,
necessary if any kind O f speed in cl amping is to be maintained

‘
‘
One of the advantages O f this type of fixture as compared with

the rotary fixture is that a more solid un i on is effected between the
,
fixture and the milling machine due to the abolition of the extra
,
rotary attachment members This method c onsequently lends

.
itself rather more to those j obs that call for a reasonably heavy
material removal in addition to a high production
g
.
R o t ary C o n t i n u o u s M i l l i n F i x t u r e s The rotary method

or .
of milling gives a high rate of production on certain classes of

work This h as been dealt with in the earlier chapter on Milling
.
Methods and we now show in Fig 2 0 8 a fixture designed for holding

.
pole pieces while milling the b ase surface The location of this .
piece is rendered simple since a previous grinding operation provides

a finished surface on which the piece may be located The only .
points to be watched then are the method O f gripping and the d is

position Of chips For gripping the piece reliance is placed on a
.
,
central ring this ring having a number of facets to correspond with

,
the number O f pieces held in the fixture These facets are undercut .
a t an angle which corresponds approximately with the curvature of
the piece and they are additionally provided with fil e cut surfaces -
which embed slightly into the surfaces of the pole piece and make a
very e fficient gripping device The outer or movable gripping
.
member is a cam provided with longitudinal serrations and pivoting

around studs carried in the frame of the casting The end Of the .
cam proj ects in the form of a lever which is either tightened by hand
or by blows from a lead hammer The fixture itsel f is practically .
in two halves the central half carrying the locating ring and the
,
I
outer half carrying the gripping cams these two halves being j oined ,
A
together by a series of ribs n between these ribs the chips fall
.
clear O f the top surf ace of the Circular tta chment into a trough sur
rounding said attachment from where they may be easily remove d
,
.
A T EA ISE R T ON MILLING A ND MILLING MA C HINES 227 .
H
The foregoing illustrations cover practically the full line O f stand
ard methods O f milling with face mills on both ori z ontal and
Vertical Machines .
R e c i pr o c a l Fi xt u r e s When it is desired to mill either .
one or two faces parallel to each other the reciprocating ,
u d
No
x
l l. w hc 2 u u
V l
v lu f d fi u h ld
e rt i
C t te r 4
c
u duc
a f
”
w
iau
Mi l e rh ufc it
m e t e r 68,
o nt in
re o
o s
t io n s ,
Fig
m i ing
ee
. 2 08
xt re
p er
o i n g 12 p o l e p i e c e o r g i n g s ,
m i n t e Pr o
.
it
t io n 4 p e r m i n t e .
s r a es
A good example of this is shown in Fig

method is ften used in conj unction with a gang of side
O
mills . . 20 9 ,
where a gang of four milling cutters machine at one passage two
sides of two large hexagon nuts To make the fixture comparatively .
universal the studs on which the nuts

,
( they have not been previously threaded )

rest may be removed and substituted by
other sizes The nut is g ripped to these
.
A
studs by means of the t wo angular plates
,which mo ve in slots B B set at ,
right angles to the surface to be gripped .
These plates move downward through the

right and left hand s crew D operated Fi g 2 0 “
-
,
by the crank handle C S hown on the right hand side O f the fi x ,

- -
ture By this means two pieces are g ripped with one movement
.
22 8 THE CIN CINNATI MILLING MAC HINE C OMPANY
Of the lever and a wide range of sizes c an be easily accommodated

with the one fixture There is nothing special to be noted in the
.
construction of this other than the arrangement of the gripping
A
pie c es above described .
n elaboration of this method is found in Fig 2 10 whi c h shows .

,
I
a pair of hand indexed fixtures arranged for cutting slots in the
-
flanges of automobile hubs t is of course O bvious tha t this .

, ,
u h w ll
N o 4 H ig Po e r Mi er i t r e i p r o wh c c fi al u u l Fi g . 2 09
h u ch u cfac clud chwuc h

u
m i ing 3 it
”
-
xt re exa g o n n ts ( ea s r e x
c d d
.
i a m e te r , 2 6 re v o l ut i o n s f ee d l fi m in te, lg T im e p er p ie in in g
' ”
k
t t er s 1 0
” , p er c ut ee p . e
i n g 1 % m i n t es .
method leaves a curve at the bottom of the slot corresponding to

the diameter of the cutter The work is gripped by a contracting .
A
collet or split end of the spindle of the attachment the circular ,
surface of the work having been previous ly turned ttention .
is drawn here to a device that should more O ften be applied to

milling fixtures ; that is the e j ecting mechanism
.
t very O ften
,
. I
happens that a v ery well designed fixture that is entirely satis -
fa c tory in every other point fails in th at the c loseness O f fit between

the gripping device and the work renders it diffi cult for the operator
I
to remo v e the piece wi thout a cert ain amount of manual labor that
ought to be avoided n this fixture a lever is provided lo c ated
‘
.
,
conveniently at the rear of the fixture which on being stru c k or ,
pushed ej e c ts the work The details of the indexing are not par
p
.
t i cul arl y im ortant and will be dealt with in that part of the chapter
de v oted to indexing fixtur es .
A o c C ut g e ea g
m ati E e g F xl a m pin
es , R l sin an d
“
j ctin i tur .
I t designed for milling flats on the ends terminals for storage

The fixture shown in Fig grips releases and ej ects automatically . 2 13 , .
wa s Of
batteries and is arranged with two inner rows of fixed V blocks O p .
posing these blocks are a series of movable V blocks carried on the

ends of plungers which are held against the work by very heavy
l v l w Sh ud cv lul ffi du Fig . 2 11
fi i hi d
u al u u
u
NO 2 P ain C o n e- D r i en Mi er it a t o m at i r e eas i n g xt re n s n g s ix s i es o f min m
c
.
as t i n g s s e tt i n g s tio n s , m i n te ) T i m e 57
”
x x t wo pee 225 r e o ee 0 20 p er
c
. . .
min t e p e r p ie e .
springs the containers or car tridges for these springs extending

E
, ,
I
outside the fixture as seen In the illustration ach of these movable .
V blocks is arranged to hold two pieces mmediately beneath the .
extension of the fixture which carries the V blo cks is a support which
A
is attached to the headstock or tailstock O f the machine and con
sequently does not move with the table ttached to the head .
and tailstock O f the machine is a cam ( this being made in sections )

which first imposes a rel a tively light pressure on the spring plungers
and later at that part immediately beneath the cutters imposes a
,
sufficiently heavy pressure to hold the work against the cut The .
cam terminates immediately at the ba c k of the cutters .

A T EA ISE
R T ON MILLING AND MILLING MAC HINES 23 1
The pieces having been dropped into the V blocks rest on the
stationary base and are carried along by the feed O f the machine .
A s they approach the cutters the second portion of the c am grips
A
them firmly while they pass under the cutters and after this they are
entirely released t this point the stationary base ends and the
.
pieces which have hitherto been S liding along on this base drop
C UTTERS
S EC T IO N T HRU A A .
Fi g 2 12
.
A
out of the O pen V blocks into a chute whi c h carries them away .
t the c onclusion of the stroke the table and fixture automatically

return to the starting point ; the operator loads up enough pieces
to aff ord him a su fficient degree of safety engages the table feed
, ,
and as the table moves forward finishes loading up the fixture

, .
This operation is with the exception of the idle return one O f almost
, ,
continuous production .
To approach closer to the ideal condition would entail the use

of a swinging or indexing fixture which would duplicate the details
O f the one illustrated with this exception : that the work holding
,
-
portion would be split up into two hal ves one on each side of a ,
vertical axis The stroke O f the machine would be shortened to

.
agree with only that number of pieces held in the one half of the
A
fixture S O that the operator would be able to entirely load one end
,
while those pieces in the other end were being milled t the end .
23 2 THE CIN CINNATI MILLING MACHI NE C OMPANY
of the cut the fixture would be swung around 1 8 0 and the cut °
immediately started on the new pieces This would reduce the idle .
time to approximately one tenth of a minute per half cycle which

-
,
loss need hardly be considered

H I g I
.
an d
ex i n F i x t u r e s nd
ndexing either hand or automatic.
,
can of course be applied to almost any type of fixture The index

, , .
ing may be for any of the following purposes

a TO cut a number O f faces or slots in a single piece
.
.
b To provide means for milling both ends of a piece

.
.
c To remove the loading and unloading position from too

.
close proximity to the cutter and ,
d .To provide continuous cutting and loading .
Fig 2 14 S hows a Clutch Cutting Fixture that illustrates classi

.
-
fi ca t i o n a in which a number O f interesting features are found

, .
uh h c l ll fi d w h uu Fi g
c cl
. 213
f l cti u
u cc u cy
u u
A t o m a t i P ai n Mi er tt e it a t o m a t i a m p i ng re e as i n g a n d e e j ng fi xt re , m i l l i n g fl at s
ig d
ee p , o n ar s b d
i a m e t e r C tt i n g spee d 3 15 ,
ee t F d6
ee
”
p er mi n te A ra
o
Wi t h in
d c c
.
, . .
Pr o t i o n 11 p ie es p e r m i n t e .
These are shown clearly in the drawing Fig 2 1 5 This fixture was , . .
designed for cutting the teeth in clutches O f different sizes which ,
had a rather widely varying number of teeth The clutches are .
A
held by means of an expanding collet the expansion being secured ,
through a taper headed drawbolt which is engaged by the

-
,
lever B shown proj ecting from the lower center of the fixture
,
.
This lever carries a seg ment of a nut which segment is thrown ,

2 34 THE C IN CINNATI MILLING MAC HINE C O MPANY
the cam proper and the stud Son whi c h it rotates s o that the ,
commencement of the withdrawal stroke and the conclusion of the
A
locating stroke are una c companied by any rotation of said shaft .
N
fter the c am h as been partially rotated and the plunger released ,
a continued movement of the cam will through the p in and slot

,
P cause a rotation O f the S haft but this without any rotation

, ,
of the gears through which the work carrying spindle is rotated

-
.
Fig . 2 15
When the cam h as been rotated as far back as the stop will permit
‘
and a return stroke commenced the roller clutch J which will be

, ,
noted at the lower end O f the cam carrying shaft engaging with
-
the gear K which forms the roller clutch causes through the
, , ,
intermediate gear a rotation of the index or work carrying spindle

,
-
.
This spindle is then indexed through the required number of degrees

and the conclusion of the cam stroke forcing the index plunger home
, ,
e ff ectively locks the work in the required position ; in other words ,
a single lever moved first to the left and then to the right unlocks ,
-
and withdraws the index plunger rotates the work and locks the
,
index plunger home again within the required slot so that the
operator works entirely independent of the sense of touch and sight
and can with the greatest ease secure the desired indexing .
A T EA ISE
R T ON MILLING A ND M ILLING MAC HINES 23 5
The fixtur e is extremely low so that no undue twisting strains

are imposed on the machine table and it is thoroughly prote cted
against the bad e ff ects of chips entering the indexing mechanism ,
this being effected through a cover which completely envelopes

the outer part Of the fixture ( The illustration Fig 2 14 was made .
, .
,
hP w l u w h y ccl u dwl h d
Mi
F ig . 2 16
fit u l haf l d h f ywh
di
u ch
N o 4 H ig -
i t t ri p e sp in i n exi n g m i ing in e ts m e t er ,
l
o er er e x re sp s a
di t b tt
.
a
”
18 F d
ong
T m 18 m
p
.
i
ee
e in
er m i n te
te s ea
.
.
Ke s a rat e it i n a m et e r o f s ts a o o m of ke s, it in
with this c over removed but it is shown in place in Fig 1 1 9 page

, .
,
This prin c iple can of c ourse be e qually well applied to a multi

, ,
A H I
spindle indexing fixture .
nother typ e of and ndexing Fixture in this c ase with three

H
,
spindles is shown in Fig 2 16

, ere all three spindles are indexed . .
A H
through the one lever which is atta ched to one of the index plates ,
. owever to get accuracy in the indexing individual index

, ,
plates and plungers are fitted to each spindle the withdrawing of ,
the plunger and releasing O f the same being effected through cams
and loose gear c onne ction between the three spindles This arran ge .
ment h as the ad v antage of giving accurate indexing undisturbed ,

23 6 THE CIN C INNATI M ILLING MA C HINE C OMPANY
by the in accuracy O f the gear transmission betwee n spindles and

also has the speed that com es with the use O f a single indexing lever .
The particular j ob for whi c h this fixture was designed is that of ,
milling splines in g as tractor sh af ts This method Of milling suc h .
parts is not recommended where a high degree of a c curacy is required ,
on account of the practical impossibility of getting all three cutters
ufac alal yc la l
A to m t i
e, o
P
s t ee
in Mi
rin g
ll er
ge
wa hw ah l l da d hacud
it
rs
p
it
ra e t n e
ia m e t er
Fi g
m
. 2 17
n in d fi
ex
t t e r s , 180
uf cu u h
xt
e et
re ro g i n g o ut
tt i n g s p ee d in u h — ch
52- to o t , 6 p i t
13 m i n t es e a ch .
.
to be first O f the same diameter second to all run true ; and

, , , ,
third to be all pitched with perfect relationship to the centers

,
O f the work on which each one operates For roughing out and for .
I
certain grades of work however it is perfectly feasible , ,
.
t will be noted that with this fixture supporting brackets were ,
supplied in addition to the support given by the headsto c k and tail

stock These bra ckets c arry spring V blo cks B whi ch have to
.
,
be loosened and reset af ter each indexing as otherwise the lack of ,
straightness in the work would Of course aff e ct t h e accura c y of , ,
A H I
the slots and keys produced .
nother and ndexing Fixture shown in Fig 2 17 is desi g ned to .
mill four bevel gears at one setting arranged parallel in pairs , ,
placed tandem The fixtur e is to some extent universal in that the

.
A
number Of divisions can be varied but the angle of c ourse can
,
, , ,
only be changed through the insertion Of taper S hims

- beneath
23 8 THE C IN CINNA TI MILLING MA CHINE C O MPANY
to the face of the column carrying a cam sh aft B which engages

,
with a ratchet controlled cam C which withdraws the plunger D

-
.
The plunger h as one straight and one angular side and is lifted out
of engagement with the slots in the index wheel through a E ,
movement of the cam in a clockwise direction caused by the traverse

of the fixture away from the cutter The returning of the table to .
u uh u u wh auh d ubbl l dl u c d u u d af fFu dcu

Fig . 2 19
h u day d h v b a d h w cu
c
A t o m a t i D p ex Mal ch
u
in e it e sp i n o m at i in exi n g fix t re and n g of
o e a
t g o r t t er s ,
r o g i n g o u t 7- 9- p i t ch 33 -
to o t t o m o i e t r a n s m i ss i o n g e a r s C t tin g spee 61 ee t ee 8
”
p er
d c
, . .
m i n te Pr o
. t i o n 100 g e a r s p e r t e n - o r . ( Hoo s a e e e n r is e to S o t te r s )
.
bring the work again in touch with the cutter causes a reverse
action of the pawl which has of course been sliding along over the
, , ,
teeth of the ratchet and this is accompanied through a ratchet

clutch by a clockwise rotation of the index plate and at the con ,
cl us i o n of the stroke a release of the index pin which falling into , ,
the slot takes care O f the indexing With certain slight variations
, .
this type of automatic indexing can be almost universally applied

and is incorporated in most of the automatic index fixtures shown
A I S
hereafter .
Fig 2 19 S hows an utomatically ndexed D ouble pindle Fixture

.
for roughing out spur gears and Fig 22 0 shows the rear view of, .
this same fixture and gives a clearer idea O f the means provided to
secure rotation of both spindles through the one stationary
R T ON A ND C 23 9
cam sh t A and the ratchets R and also secu e accurate indexing

Attention is
af , r
through the of two plungers B and index plates C

'
use .
also drawn to the use of four work arbors s o that the operator c an
I
be loading up two of them while the machine is milling the pie c es
hel d in the other two n this particular case gears have been
.
roughed out with a maximum pitch variation of 00 1 which of .

,
Fi g . 22 0
co ur se would not be practical if the transmission from the first

,
to the second work spindle through gearing was also the means for
indexing the second spindle
S g Fx I llustrating
.
w i ve l i n i tu res class b type of indexing

.
( swi v eling ) fixture we show Fig 2 2 1 representing a fixture used

.
,
for milling connecting rods Two of these rods are held S ide by side
.
,
and S ince the width of the ends is not the same they are placed
A
with the large end of o n e at the S ide of the small end of the other
'
By first feeding in one large and one small end is milled

,
fter swivel .
°
ing the fixtur e 1 80 the Operation is repeated and the remaining two
ends are finished so that both rods are machined at one time doing ,
A
away with the danger attendant upon a second chucking and the
consequent lack of ali g nment The indexing tooth . carried in
the base plate O f the fixture is hinged at B proj e c ts over the edge ,
24 0 THE C IN CINNATI MILLING MAC HINE C O MPANY
of the table and c onsequently can be placed lo w thus r educing the

'
total height of the fixture For support ing the end of the connecting
.
rod the angular adjustable support points ( Fig 1 9 0 ) are used and .
can be seen proj ecting from the left hand side of the indexing plate -
at C .
uc No 3 P
C t t er s
.
”
la
10 a n d 8
”
d
v f dll w h w dv l vfi luu
i n C o n e- D r i e n
i a m e t er ,
Mi
ee
er it s
sp ee
i e
Fi g
ing
4 1 re
. 22 1
xt
o
re
t io n s
fi i hi
n s
.
ng en d
Tim e , i n
s Of a u bl c c
c l u d ch u c
ing u
to m o d
i e o n n e t i n g ro s .
k i n g , 3 m i n t e s p er
pi e e.
Another simple t yp e
of hand indexing fixture shown in Fig 2 22 .
I
dispenses with the use O f a base plate There is on this particular .
operation no need for extreme accuracy O f indexing f the j ob were .
being handled in suffi c ient quantities to

j ustif y a special machine for this opera
A
tion it would without doubt be handled
H
on an utomatic D uplex Miller .
owever the quantities not warrant

,
ing this the simple e quipment shown

,
proved eminently satisfactory The .
base plate to which the cylinder is

clamped is bored out in the center to
receive a stud the lower part Of this
,
stud being flat to fit the T slot in the table This stud is then .
clamped to the table by a bolt passing through its center and the
THE CIN CINNATI MILLING MA CHINE C O MPANY
better methods than that used in the fixture sho wn in Figs 2 2 3 .

,
2 24 2 2 5
,
.This is a fixture designed to hold a piece Of cons iderable
height which was subj ected to a very heavy hammering or inter
I
mittent cut imposing great strains on the locking mechanism O f
,
the fixtur e t was also necessary to get great accuracy O f indexing

.
between the two extreme positions which positions were used when
,
milling the angular sur faces of a piece a section of which is shown ,
Fi g . 223
atA .
'
TO a c complish these results th e ind ex ing was made through

a pair of hardened plungers being brought into contact with similar
hardened plungers in a block fas tened to the stationary portion of
the fixtur e B These plungers which were set up solid when in
.
,
final position also were arranged so that adj ustment could be made
,
by the toolmaker when assembling the fixture To insure perfect .
contact between the fixed and indexing plungers cam C was us ed , ,
this c am being mounted on the bracket or fixed plunger support ,
and s o being self contained as far as the strains s et up in insuring

-
this contact were concerned By this means the danger of a cl ose

.
and hard alternating with a light and easy contact were overcome
, ,
.
The indexing mechanism was therefore made to serve but one func
, ,
tion that of indexing and had no connection with the rotating

, ,
A T EA ISE
mechanism which takes the form of a semi circular dovetail slide

E
-
,
D rotating around a corresponding complete dovetail in

,
the base plate ( Fig. E

ntering into and forming the other
.
half O f the bearing or dovetail is a dovetail slide F Fig 2 23 which

G
.
, ,
is forced forward and released by means of the cam shown at ,
the rear The effect O f the angularity of the S liding member and
.
y
the angularity of the circular dovetail portion is to pull the rotating
member firml on to its seating over its full surface which ar ,
Fi g . 224
r angement can hardly be accomplished by any combination O f
A
horizontal and vertical locking mechanisms since in this design the ,
hori z ontal and vertical adj ustmen ts are made simultaneously n .
unusual rigidity in the locking mechanism and unusual mainte

nan c e in correct bearing i s secured with this construction which ,
can be strongly recommended for work where accuracy and long life
are desired
Sp S g I g
.
e a r a t i o n o f w i v e l i n f r o m n d ex i n F u n c t i o n s It is .
a l wa ys p ar ti cu l a r l y desi r a bl e i n accur a te i ndexi ng mecha n i s ms to
A
sep a r a te those p a r ts whi ch are res p onsi bl e f or the en ti r el y defi erent
fu ncti on s of swi vel i ng a nd i n dexi n g comparatively simple and

.
extremely rigid indexing fixture is that S hown in Fig 2 2 6 This . .
fixture was designed for cutting groo ves either straight or angular
in cutter blanks When cutting the straight g rooves the fixture
.
A
was mounted dire c tly on the table of the machine and when cutting
angular grooves on an angled raising blo c k as S hown in the ,
244 THE C IN CINNATI MILLING MA CHINE C OMPANY
illustration The interesting features Of this fixture are the extremely

.
I
liberal index teeth and the arrangement of the index plunger The .
details of this are shown in Fig 22 7

. t will be noted that the index
.
plunger proper is a separate piece of hardened steel fastened to a
Fi g . 22 5
pivoting member B the pivot being placed S O that it is as nearly

,
as possible in a line perpendicular to the straight side of the index

tooth and starting from the end of that tooth With this arrange
.
ment it is impossible to cause engagement between the tooth and

index slot until the index plate shall have rotated past the desir ed
position The driving home of th e index tooth therefore caus es
.
, ,
sliding action b etween the angular surfaces O f the index tooth and
SP RING IN CO MPRESSI O N is used th is spring being let one half into

,
-
the fixture and one half into the index plunger or pivoting plate
-
.
The details O f this are clearly sh own in the drawing and it is r eco m
mended as a very convenient and satisfactory spring arrangement
in that the spring can be given a small travel with less likelihood O f
permanent s et and at the same time is thoroughly concealed and
Fi g . 227
guarded from inj ury either in us e or transit from the machine to

the toolroom .
I
The foregoing description covers most of the standard milling
fixture construction . t can not do more than indicate the different
types and it must not be understood that these standard typ es will
cover all classes O f milling
For every individual j ob a different s et of conditions arise ,
demanding a separate study The proper designs for fixture and

.
L
cutter are essential if the milling machine is to be an efficient tool .
acking these there is but little chance for any satisfactory results
,
to follow its installation .

A T EA ISE R T ON M ILLING AND M ILLING MA CHINES 247
HAP T E X I V
C R
THE S I Z I N G A ND C U TT I N G OF
SP UR GEARS
I f two smoothly turned rolls are mounted on parallel shafts
I f the
with their surfaces in close conta c t shown in Fig ,and one is
as . 228,
turned through an ar c then the other will also revolve
,
.
circumferences of the end faces are divided into equal parts and ,
at the start two division lines are placed opposite each other then , ,
I
as we turn the other division lines will come in line with each other
,
.
I
n other words the circumference of the driven rol l moves as many
,
inches as the c ir cumference O f the driver f the driver has 6 .

”
circumference and the driven 1 2 then it takes t wo entire turns O f

“
th e dri v er to bring the driven roll around once We s ee therefore .
, ,
the number of turns of the two rolls are in inverse ratio to their
cir c umferences and consequently ,
to their diameters This is O f .

,
c ourse only theoretically true as

, ,
in actual practice there would be

slippage .
I
To prevent slippage both rolls
A
Fi g 22 3 .
are provided with teeth t would .
not be safe to provide roll alone

with teeth on the outside as these teeth would have no place to go un
,
less we cut c orresponding grooves into roll B To make all such re .
A
volving parts of similar construction we provide them with teeth
,
above and grooves below their friction surfaces lthough the friction .
surf ace itself h as then disappeared entirely it remains the most im ,
portant factor in the design of such parts The diameters Of these two
.
friction surfaces determine the ratio O f the number of revolutions

of these rolls
R
.
olls with teeth are called gear wheels When the rolls are c yl in
.
A
ders as shown the gear wheels are c alled spur gears The original
, , .
friction surfaces are called pitch surfa c es or pitch cylinders .
section of the pitch surface at right angles to the axis is called a

pitch circle or more generally the pit c h line
, .
As there is no slippage possible between the teeth Of these wheels ,
our rule n ow becomes absolutely fixed . The r el a ti ve n umber of r evo
l uti ons o f two ma ti ng g ears i s i n i n verse ra ti o to thei r pi tch

spur
f
ci rcum er en ces , a nd consequentl y to thei r pi tch di ameters
I
.
n order to get a smooth uniform action Of one gear on the other

the teeth must be O f a certain definite shape t is possible to make . I ,
I
the teeth of one O f the rolls of almost any shape provided the teeth ,
of the mating roll are S haped to suit t i s desirable however to .

, ,
make gear wheels in such a way that a given wh eel can run with
many others and not solely with the one with which it is mated ,
because in many mechanisms gear wheels mus t be interchangeable .
The experience O f a great many years has gradually limited the shapes
O f gear teeth to only one system ; namely the involute S hape of ,
tooth
I
.
Circu l ar Pi t c h f the rolls shown in Fig 2 2 8 were provided

. .
with a tooth at every point where a mark appears the distance ,
between these marks would be called the PI TC H of the gear wheel .
We say therefore that :

, ,
The p i tch of a gea r wheel i s the di sta n ce from cen ter to center
of two adj oi n i n g teeth measur ed a l ong the pi tch ci rcl e
, Thi s pi tch i s .
ca l l ed the CI RC ULA R PI TCH .
C h or d a l Pi t c h Y
ears ago when practically all gear wheels
.
,
were cast and when the patternmaker had to constru c t the gear
wheel he used his dividers to space the teeth of h is pattern The
,
.
dividers were s et to the length O f the chord and not the arc between ,
the centers of t wo adj oining teeth This distance was therefore .
“
called chordal pitch This c hordal pitch is not used in metal gear
.
cutting and will not be considered here .
Di a m e tra l Pi t c h When the diameter O f a circle is an even

.
number O f inches or some simple fraction the circumf eren c e of

, ,
that c ircle becomes a decimal fraction which never expresses exactly

the length O f the circum ference however many decimals we might
I
,
us e . f the diameter is then the circumfere nc e is

Of course it would not be practical to us e all these figures nor would ,
it be practi c al to work to such a degree of accuracy and there fore ,
the c ircumference of the 1 circle is O ften exp ressed by ”

and
sometimes even by There are also common fractions which
express the len g th Of the cir cumf erence very closely such ,
as ,
teeth and the pitch The system most common at the present time
.
makes the height of the gear tooth above the pitch line ( pitch sur
face ) equal to 1 divided by the pitch For a 5 pitch gear this height .
-
would be it 1
For a 1 0 pitch gear it would be 1 17 etc This is -
.
called the ADDEN DUM .
I
The depth of the tooth below the pitch surface is made equal to
the height above the surface This is called the DE DEN DU M f . .
gears were actual ly made this way they would have to be absolutel y
perfect and their center distance would have to be absolutely cor
rect otherwise the top of a tooth might interfere with the bottom
,
of a groove of th e mating gear For that reason the grooves are cut .
somewhat deeper than this theoretical depth This add itional .
W
depth is called CLEA RAN CE The sum of addendum and dedendum .
is called O RK ING DEP TH The difference between working depth .
and the full depth is called CLEA RAN CE

I f we have a gear of
.
O u tsid e Di a m e t er .
*
20 teeth 10 pitch , ,
20
then its pitch diameter is — 2 The addendum of such a gear
10
1
—
would be and as this addendum is added to the radi us of the
10
,
gear the outside diameter of this gear will be

,
This outside
diameter is the same as the pitch diameter of a gear of 2 2 teeth ,
1 0 pitch so that we find the following rules :

,
The ou tsi de gea r i s found by

di a meter o f a addi ng 2 to the nu mber
of teeth, a nd then di vi di ng i t by the pi tch .
The nu mber of teeth gea r i s found by

o f a mu l ti pl yi n g the o u tsi de
di a meter by the pi tch a nd then subtra cti n g 2 .
S
C i rc u l a r Pi t c h C l ea r a n c e a n d Fu l l D ep t h
, We have seen .
that a gear 1 pitch diameter 1 0 pitch h as 10 teeth

”
uch a gear , , .
would have a pitch circumference of s o that the circular
pitch of this gear would be divided by 10 8 14 1 6
h p h h h u ld
. .
lcl ch h h p h h h f
m a t i n g g e ars
ch f
h w h ch u
*
If t ere are two on a ai r of s a ts , and t ere s o
a so
u e ar
be
wh
an o t
ea ot
er
er,
air o f g e ars
t en th e
ll h u d d on
o
pp t
p h
ch
ts i
e se s
d e d d d a
h ts o
i a m e t ers
o sit e e a
of t e se
ot
g ears
er , but
a e
i
t o g et
m st
er
m
g e ars
m st
st
h
u h cl ch h .w d
be so
In
e ar e a
me
ot er
at s
ot
or
er
ma
s,
m
er
st
t
u l l hf u l h
the su
be
u ban
m
at
h
th e
of
e as t
su
ub
th e n w h ch
m
o
m
of
r es s
th e
er s o f
t
it
teet
an th e
i a m e t ers
of
su m of
of
t h e t w o g e a rs
th e n
the
m
m atin g
e rs o f
i
te et
or ch k d c
the
of th e m at i n g
e nt e r is t a n
g e ars
e, w ul d c u h
As th e
hd w u l bh u h l h h
.
o a
s
f cu
i g t es t
y
e r r or m a t i n g g e a rs
in the
s e t h e o t e r g e ars to i n t er e re i t i s
s i ze o f
s t o m ar
the
,
,
to e it
g e ar s , l u h er ma
o r e se
e
t
th e
rn
s um o f
t em
t
o
eir n
n a
m e r s o f t ee t fi ve ess t a n t a t o f t h e m a t i n g
s ig t a m o nt .
A T EA ISE R T ON MILLING A ND MILL I NG MACH I NE S 251
To fi nd the ci rcul ar p i tch, di vi de by the di ametra l p i tch
I t is customary to make the

.
C LEA RAN CE at the bottom of th e te eth

equal to of the CI RCU LAR PI TC H . The total depth of a tooth
being c omposed of the addendum , dedendum and clearance is ,
found as follows
Since the circular pitch e quals then 1

7 g of the circular
3 1 4 16 1 157
x
-
that is 1 57 divided by the pitch

. .
P 20 P
Since the
Addendum 1 divided by the pit c h
D edendum 1 divided by the pitch
Clearance 1 57 d i i de d by the pitch

y
We have by adding these

1 57
1
l ‘
whole depth .
P P P
From the above we deduce these rules
The whol e dep th i s di vi ded by the p i tch .
The cl eara n ce i s di vi ded by the p i tch .
Ag
P r e s s u r e n l e s Fig 22 9 shows a pair of teeth of two mating
. .
gears in su c h a position that a p oint on t h e pitch c ircle of one gear

p
is pressing on a oint of the pitch c ircle of the mating gear The
p
.
dire c tion of this ressure depends on the shape of the teeth The .
most c ommon form of tooth

used at the present time is su c h
A
that the direction of the pres
s ure B makes an angle 1 4 %
degrees with the tangent com
Fi g 229
A
.
mon to the pitch circles at this
I
point This line B in the direction of the pressure is called the line of
.
a c tion n later years many builders of machinery ha v e adopted a s ys

.
252 THE C INCI NNATI M ILLING MACH I NE C O MPAN Y
I
tem of gearing by which this line of action makes an angle of 2 0 de
grees with the c ommon tangent t wa s formerly thought that such an .
angle of 2 0 de g rees would c ause too much pressure on the bearings ,
too mu ch wear on the gear teeth and a less smooth action between
I
the gears but recent thorough investigation h as shown that this is
,
not so t h as been found on the other hand that the teeth are
.
, ,
stronger the pressure on the bearings is not perceptibly more the

, ,
action is as smooth and the wear on the teeth is not greater

A rack belonging to the system of gears which has an angle of
.
,
action of 1 4 % degrees h as teeth with straight sides which make

,
an angle of 14 % degrees with the vertical When the angle of action .
is 2 0 degrees the ra c k teeth will also be straight but make an angle

, ,
of 2 0 degrees with the vertical

N ot all makers of gear wh els make the addendum and dedendum
.
as indicated above S ometimes the teeth are made shorter and are
e
.
called stub teeth These however will not be discussed here

I t is customary to make the tooth and the space equal in width
. .
, ,
therefore the thi c kness of the tooth on the pit ch line equals half
the pitch .
Se l ec t in g t h e Cu t t er f
The shape of the tooth changes with the
number of teeth of the gear s o that the exact shape of a tooth of ,
a gear with 1 7 9 teeth is di ff erent from the proper shape for a 180
tooth gear The diff eren c e would be extremely smal l in this cas e
.
,
but it would be somewhat g reater for gears of 2 0 and 2 1 teeth resp ec

t ivel y. Th is difference in shape becomes more marked in gears with
I
the smaller number of teeth For most practical purposes these varia
.
tions can be ignored to a certain extent t is common p ra c .
tice to cut gears with any number of teeth but of course all , , ,
of the same pitch with eight different shapes of teeth s o

, ,
that a s et of only eight c utters is required for one pitch to cut any
gear from 1 2 teeth up to a rack The eight c utters adopted are : .
No . 1 to cut a wheel from 1 33 teeth to a ra c k .
No
No . 2 to cut a wheel from 55 teeth to 13 4 teeth .
No
. 3 to cut a wheel from 35 teeth to 54 teeth .
No
. 4 to cut a wheel from 26 teeth to 3 4 teeth .
. 5 to cut a wheel from 21 teeth to 2 5 teeth .

Se g
t t in Ma ch i n e When setting up the machine for
th e .
cutting a spur gear care S hould be taken to see to it that the machine
,
I
is in correct adjustment in every respect all as disc ussed on pages
H
,
65 66 in the para g raphs on the use of the D ividing

-
ead t is of the .
S A
utmost importance that the cutter be kept sharp This is dis c ussed .
in detail in Chapter X on Cutter harpening properly sharpened

,
.
u
C tt i n g a sp u r g e ar on th e Mi l ing Ma ch i ne .
Fi g . 23 0
T h e g ea r i s h db
e l w et ee n c e n te r s i n t he uul
s a wa y .
cutter S hould be mounted on the arbor as close to the end of the .
spindle as permissible an d it may be well to use an intermediate

,
N
support as in Fig 2 3 0 to give additional stiffness to the arbor
. .
ow adj ust the table s o as to bring the dividing head center

,
up close to the cutter and then make transverse adj ustments to
S
bring the dividing head center to coincide exactly with the center.
of the face of the tooth of the cutter ince gear cutters are all .
provided with a central line on the outside of their teeth this can be
very easily done by S imply bringing the dividing h ead center to
coincide with this line on the cutter We can n o w lower the table .
,
A T EA ISE R T ON MILLING A ND M ILLING MA CHINES 2 55
place our piece of work between centers and properly sec ure it by
means of a dog to the driver making sure that there will be no ,
chan c e for back lash .
The index pin must be set to the proper circle of holes as deter
mined from the index tables ; the plate itself must be securely locked ,
making sure that there is no back l ash at this point ; the index pin
should be brought around in the direction in which the indexing
will be done which is preferably in the direction of the hands of a
,
clo c k and allowed to drop into one of the holes Then s et the .
sector for the proper spacing ; tighten the spindle clamp at the rear
of the dividing head ; start the machine ; raise the work up carefully
until the revolving cutter begins to S how the first slight evidence of
touching the work ; then s e t the elevating di a l to zero run the table ,
to the right clear of the cutter and then raise up the required amount
for the proper depth all of which may be read from the dial ; dis
,
engage the elevating crank s o as to reduce the possibility of the

adj ustment being dis
t ur be d and n o w we are
,
ready to proceed with

the milling
g L ge
.
It
C i
Ge
u t t n a r
ars . sometimes
happens that the milling
machine is called upon
to cut gears which are S O
large in diameter that
they can not pass be
tween the table in its
lowest position and the
S
cutter on the arbor .
uch work can be done

in two different ways .
A
First by using the Un
,
der cutt ing ttachment ,
described on page 2 5 Fi g 23 1
. .
This attachment makes thighs Si gn .
it possible to cut gears

of large dimensions and coarse pitches on machines of moderate S ize
Second by setting the spindle of the D ividing Head in a vertical
.
position S hown in Fig

as
,
I t will be quite clear that by holding

. 23 1 .
2 56 THE CIN C INNATI M ILLING MA C HINE C O MPANY
the work in this position a very large gear can be accommodated ,
but instead of using the l ongitudinal table feed we must n o w use

the vertical feed and we should feed U P so that the pressure of the
,
cutter on the work will be down towards the table Th is makes it .
I
comparatively simple to place a supporting rest under the rim of
the gear as close as possible to where the cut is being taken t .
must of course be remembered that although the dividing head is

made to a close degree of accuracy nevertheless as the gears grow, ,
H
larger the index errors which do exist will be correspondingly multi
plied . owever these methods make it possible to c ut very satis
,
factory gears whenever a n o c casional odd S ize gear must be cut .
T a bl e of Too t h Pa r t s
A dd du
en m
Th e
“
h dph
w l
o e e t of h
too t is th e dph
e t t o be c ut i n g e ar .
2 58 THE C IN C INNA TI M ILLING MA C HINE C O MPANY
Rul es and F orm ulas f or Di m en sio n s o f S p u r G ea r s Made to
D IA M ET R AL PI T C H
To F d
in F o rm ul a
d ub D i vi h b y p ch d
e n m er o f teet it ia m e t er . P
Mu l p l y p ch d b y d l
p ch ti it iam e ter ia m e t r a
P X
Mu l p l y u
it N D
p ch ub c it
ti d d
and s
theby o t si e
tra t 2
iam ete r
‘
the
O X P 2
Mu l p l y c d c b d
l p ch ti y
t h e e n t er is t a n e the iame
X P X
Sub c du f
tra it t im es 2 C 2
u dd o t si e ia m e te r
dd
tra t t w o ti mes t h e a en m ro m
d ub D iv i h by d l p ch
e n m er o f teet i ame tr a it . D
d dd d u
A d d t w o t im e s t h e
ia m et er
p ch a en m t o the it
by d
u
t h e s um
b l p ch
A dd 2 t o t he n m er
ia m e tra
h d d of t eet
it
a nd ivi e O
Wh l p h d b yd l p ch
of h
o e
To ot
De t D i vi e iametra it .
A dd d u
en m d by d
D iv i l p ch
e 1 iam etra it
De d duen m d by d
D i vi l p ch
e 1 i a m e tr a it .
Cl ceara n e d D iviby d e l p ch ia m etr a it .
d D i vib y d l p ch
e iam et ra it
u
d l dp ch b y b
Add the n m er h
ivi e t h e s u m
b h
d of t ee t i n o t g e ars a n d
t w o t i m es th e ia m e C
p ch d
t ra it
dp D i vi
a by e
air o f
the
g e a rs
su m of the
2
it i a m e t e rs of D D
ul dply du b yb d hl p chc k b y
M
and
ti
ivi
n
e
m er o f tee t
ia m e t ra
in ra
it
3 14 1 6 N
A T EA ISER T ON M ILLING AND M ILLING M A C HINES 2 59
R ul es an d F orm ula s f o r Di m en s io n s of S p ur G ea rs Ma d e to
C I RC U LA R P I T C H
To Fin d F o rm ul a
D i vi d
c cul p che 3 14 1 6 by ir ar it .
3 14 1 6
by d
D i vi d l p ch
e P i am e tr a it .
’
3 14 1 6
ul dply d u b p duc hbbyy c cul p ch

M
and
ti
i vi
n
e
m
the
er o f
ro
t eet
t
ir ar it
ub l hpl y b y c cul pu chb d h d

M ti t h e s um o f t h e n m er o f t ee t in
p duc b y ot
th e ro
g e a rs
t
ir ar it and i vi e C
A d d du
en m d c cul p ch by
D i vi e ir ar it
C l c
e ar a n e d c cul p ch by
D i vi e ir ar it 20 .
W
of
h l h p h ul ply by c cul p ch
o e
Toot
De t
M ti 0 6866
. ir ar it . W P ’
d c cul p ch by
D i vi e ir ar it 2 .
uplul plyby c cul p ch u b d d h

M ti the m of th e n m er o f teet
p duc b y
su
s 2 ir ar it and i vi e t h e 0
ro t
ud l dplybyp uch bd hby

M ti
i vi
P it i a m et er
m er o f t ee t
3 14 1 6 a nd
3 14 16 D
.
Sub c dd du
e n
u dd f
tra t two t i mes th e
ts i e i a m e t e r
a en m ro m
D O 2 S
ud l dply p pchducd b y c cubyl p ch

o
M ti it ia m et e r a nd 3 14 1 6 D
.
i vi e t he ro t ir ar it .
d dd du p
Ad d t w o t i m e s t h e
i a m e t er
ch a en m to the it
0 B + Z S
ubyl c plcuy l p uch b h ck

I
I
M ti the n m er o f t ee t in the ra
NP
’
ir ar it L
260 THE CIN CINNA TI MILLING MAC HINE C OMPANY
C o m p a r a t i ve T a bl e of Circ u l ar an d Di a m e tr a l Pi t c h
T able N o . 1 shows the diametral pitches with the corresponding

cir cular pitches .
T able No 2 . S hows the c ir cular pitches with the corres onding p

diametral pitches .
Ta bl e NO 1. Ta bl e No 2
.
D i a m e t ra l P it c h C ir cul ar P it c h C ir cul P ch
ar it D i a m e tr a l P it ch
2 in .
M e t r i c o r M o d u l e ys t e m o f e a r T e e t h S
The metric sys G .
y
tem of measurement does not use diametral pitches but instead
p
, ,
the dimensions of gear teeth are ex ressed b reference to the

MO DU LE of the gear T he module is equal to the pitch diameter in
.
262 THE CIN C INNA TI M ILLING M A C HINE C O MPANY
O OO N
—
QD LO
—
d‘ OO N v-t o
'
c z ce v wfi w m c b v v v
v i P 4 0 ] v l M N
N N N N N OI N N N N
N N N N N N N N
C N N
l O l O LQ LO l O l O LO LO l -O MD
‘
l Q LO IO MD L’ D l O
‘
l-O LO U D UD
CO CD O CC O CD QD CD CO CD
T REATISE ON MILLING AND MILLING MA C HINES 263
5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0
6 3 9 1 7 4 0 2 8 5
1 2 1
r-
d —————————
w t v 4 v 4 v 1 v ‘ v 4 v i v l v 1
2 64 THE CIN C INNA TI MILLING MAC HINE C OMPANY
l f k —
Ta e o r Cu t t in g Ra c s C o n t in u ed
b
( Using the C ross Screw for making divisions ) .
02 m
. C:
+3 43
"
U 13
Q £21 £1
ed <3
3 (I) (0
. 7-3 0 9 0 5 0
> o > 0 >
Qi E
-
i M E -i
fi E-
t pfi
£3 E 48 £3
s
h
+ 9 0 $ 3 + 3
"
d "
C3 TB 1: d
Ci £1
8 5
<
m
63
21
03
c:
«3
n
a
—
on
i
t
U) (I) s
s s u
—
o o 0
i > o > o > o

m
m
(D a Cl o h
i l fift -i
E h fift E
-i
tfi E
-d
cfi T
2 66 THE C IN C INNATI MILLING MAC HINE C O MPANY
I n d e xi n g T a bl e f o r U s e i n C o n n e c t i o n w i t h R a
At t a c h m en t f o r C o n e - D r i ve n
ck I
M il l er s
n d e xi n g
D I A ME T RA L C I R CU L A R
I n d e xi n g Ta b l e f o r U s e i n C o n n e c t i o n w i t h R a c k
f o r Al l
'
Mil l ers of
I n d e xi n g A t t a
H i g h - Po w e r D e s i g n
c h m en t
D I A ME TRA L C I R C U LA R
A T EA ISE
C HAP T E R XV
SH O P TR I G O N O M ETRY BE VE
— L GE A RS
The name Trigonometry h as a formidable sound to those who

hav e had no spe c ial training in this bran c h of mathemati c s bu t ,
whose work frequently re quires them to use it in their everyday

S hop work . I
t is intended here to c over only enough ground and ,
that in S imple language to enable anyone with a knowledge of

,
S
arithmeti c to sol v e the ordinary S hop problems in v olving angles ,
and we have therefore headed this chapt er hop Trigonometry

, , .
I
This word is composed of t wo other words whi c h translated in their ,
—
proper order mean triangle measurement n oth er words trigo .
,
n om etry is simply the measurement of triangles .
The b asis of all the computations is the circle whi ch as we all , ,
kn ow is divided into 3 60 divisions c alled degrees

,
.
1 degre e 60 minu tes .
1 minute 60 seconds
In
.
all mathematical cal c ulations , the following symbols are

used
°
degrees thus 3 degrees
, 3
minutes thus 5 minutes , 5
’
se c onds thus 1 2 se c onds

, 12
which is written and reads three degrees fi v e minutes

, ,
twelve se c onds ”
g Ag ge
.
Th e R i h t n le Tr i a n l
Of all the different triangles we
.
ca n make the right angle triangle lends itself best to S imple ca l c u
l at i ons by means of trigonometry .
A
One of the firs t things to be remembered is that the s um of the
I
three angles of a triangle is right angle triangle is a triangle ,
one of whose angles is a right angle f one of the angles of a triangle .
is a right angle or then the sum of the other two angles must
,
also be because the sum of all the angles is
I
From this we always kn o w that one angle of the right angle
triangle is f we kn ow a second angle it is an easy matter to
2 68 THE CIN CINNA TI MILLING MAC HINE C O MPANY
figure t h e thir d . I
f for instance a right angle triangle h as an
, ,
angle of then there must be another angle of The way we

would figure is S imply this : The three angles together are
°
One of them the right angle h as , This leaves 9 0 for the other ,
two angles One of these two is

. Therefore the other must be
I f we know that the ine B C in the drawing AB C ( Fig )

° °
90 30
long and that A C is half

l .
. 2 34 is
A C must be
16 , long as B C then know that as , we
This is trigonometry Trigonometry simply gives
8 .
the proportion or ratio be tween the sides of

right angle triangles and the problem of trigo ,
n o met r y is S imply to find one of the S ides
when you already know another S ide and the
I A
proportion between these two
‘
E
.
f we draw a line D parallel with C

E E
,
A
then B will be twice as long as D because
B C is twi c e as long as C and if we had drawn
E
,
I
D somewhere else this same thing will hold
A E
true f B C were twenty times as long as
.
E A
C B would also be twenty times as long as
,
D ny proportion which may exist between

E E
.
B and D remains unaltered no matter where

we draw the line D This proport ion is not E
B
F i g 23 4 .
changed S O L O NG A S WE Do N O T C HANGE THE ANGLE AT .
A
Very c omplete tables have been made which give the proportion
between C and B C for any S ize of angle B For a certain angle .
—
this proportion may be one half for another it may be o n e third ,
-
,
I A
for still another seven eighths for still another 4 63 5 and s o on
-
,
.
,
.
f you know that B C is 16 and you want to find C you will natu
A
”
,
I
rally want to know first what is the proportion between C and B C .
—
A I
f you learn this proportion is one half you multiply 16 by one half ,
-
and find that 8 is the length of C f you know that the propor .
A I A
tion is 54 63 5 you multiply 1 6 by 4 63 5 and find
,
is the length .
of C . f you do not know the proportion between C and B C but ,
instead know the S ize of the angle B you refer to the tables an d find
, ,
I
what the proportion is for this angle and then multiply 16 by that
figure the same as before
,
n other words knowing the si z e of the
.
,
I
angle is j ust as good as knowing the proportion provided you have ,
the table f you know the proportion and want to know what the
.
angle B is you can of course find it in the same way by using the
-
, , ,
same table .
270 THE C IN CINNATI MILLING MACHINE C OMPANY
we are familiar with in everyday life and they do not mean any
thing to us because we do not understand them They can h o w
E
.
,
ever be readily translated into their nglish equivalents which are

, ,
words that we are familiar with and the whole matter at once ,
be c omes S impler
Sine originally meant the string of a bow or the chord of an , a rc
of a circle and in its present use in trigonometry the angle sub

, ,
“
tended by that arc ; therefore so far as we ar e concerned sine , ,
"
S
“
means S imply angle What we find in the table under the heading
.
ine is S imply the proport ion between two S ides of the triangle
,
for a given S ine or angle .
—
C osine We saw above that if one angle is 3 0 the other angle
.
°
° ° ° °
must be 90 30 These angles of 3 0 and 60 are said to
’ ° °
be each other s complement ; S O are 1 0 and S O are 17 and
When the sum of any two angles is they are complementary

angles Therefore in a right angle triangle the angles at B and C
.
,
( Fig 23 4
.
) are always complementary angles .
C osine is an abbreviation or contraction for complement S ine ,
S
and S imply means the S ine of the complement angle For instance .
,
S
° °
the Cosine of 3 0 is the same as the ine of the Cosine of 1 0
S S
° °
is the ine of 80 and of course vice versa the Cosine of 60 is the
, , ,
°
ine of and the Cosine of 8 0 is the ine of and s o o n . .
Tangent a word which you also find in the table means j ust
, ,
exactly what tangent has always meant to you : a line which

tou ches a circle at one point .
Cotangent S imply means complement tangent or the tangent ,
of the c omplement angle so that the Cotangent of 3 0 is the Tangent

,
°
of 60 and vice v ersa

°
.
S ecant means a line whi c h intersects a

“ ” “
c ir cle . You w ll recognize
i
the same root in the words secant and intersect Cosecant means .
“
again the c omplement secant or secant of the complement angle ”
.
go E
A
Tr i o m e t r y xp r e s s e d a s Pr o p o r t i o n
n Af ter this short .
explanation we are ready to pro c eed The proportion between C and .
A I A
B C Fig 23 4 can be and in mathematical equations is written
A
.
, , , ,
C C 8
f B C is 1 6 and C is 8 then in exact
‘
,
BC BC 16
A T EA ISE
R T ON MILLING A ND MILLING MACHINES 27 1
a cc ordance with our first assumption . I n the triangle A B C

S S
is the ine of the angle B T he ine and the Tangent are the two
.
terms which are most us ed and we want to emphasize here that for
I
both these terms we must always look to that S ide of the triangle
A S
which is opposite the given angle f we have the angle B then
.
,
we must look for l ine C T his is the ine of the angle B and is a
.
S
fraction of which the line opposite the angle B is the numerator
and the hypotenus e is the denominator The ine of angle B is
A
.
therefore
BC
C
I.f we have the angle C we must look for the line
AB The Sine of angle C is therefore

.
The only difference in the fractions which represent the S ine
For the S ine this denominator is the hypotenuse but for the Tangent
and the Tangent of an angle lies in the denominator of the fra c tion .
it is the other right angle side ,

so that the Tangent of angle B is
and the Cotangent is
S i n e B equa l s Cota ngen t B equa l s
Cosi n e B equa ls S eca nt B equa ls
Ta ng ent B equa l s Coseca n t B equa l s
I t will be seen that the Cosecant is the inverted value of the

Sine the Secant is the inverted value of the Cosine and the Cotan
I
, ,
gent is the inverted value of the Tangent n other words the S ine .
,
multiplied by the cose c ant equals 1 ; and similarly the tangent ,
y
multiplied by the c otangent e quals 1 ; and the secant multiplied
by the cosine e quals 1 T h is is not merel a c uriosity but it c an be
.
,
made a great help in the calculations as it enables us to multiply ,
I
instead of divide and it is much easier to multiply by a large number
,
than to divide by it f for instance we find that we have to divide

.
, ,
by the S ine of a certain angle it is advisable to not do it but instead

, , ,
find in the tables the cosecant of the same angle and multiply by it
Another one of the properties of these values worth noticing is
.
that we can find wi thout referring to the tables some of these values ,
if some others are known For instance if we know the sine and
.
,
cosine we can find the tangent and all the other values thus :
, ,
AC
B B C AC
B AB AB
Sl n
tan B
cos
BC
similarly
AB
cos B B C AB
S in B AC AC cotan B and
,
so on .
BC
I f we want to make free use of trigonometry there j ust one
thing that we mu t do L earn by heart the tabulation given above
is
s : ,
and learn it s o that we know it as well as the alphabet or the multi

plication table Outside of this there is nothing to be learned for
.
right angle triangles exc ept some practice in handling the tables .
This practice will come only by DO ING the thing and d o m g it often .
go I f in Fig
AB C is
Ho w to U s e Tr i o m e t r i c T a bl e s
n . . 23 4 angle
what is the value of its S ine ?
to the table of S ines and cosines etc page 3 9 6 in

Referring ,
.
,
the column headed under the word sine opposite 0 we find , ,
.50000 which means than S in

, 5 0000 or That is exactly .
3
what we found to be the value of the proposition£
AB
‘
in our first
‘
as
sumption when AC 8 and AB 16 .
N o w suppose our angle is We follow down the S ine

°
column under 3 0 and find opposite 1 9 A T THE LE T HAN D MA RGIN ,
F
right angles to each other and of which only the number of teeth
and pitch are given Fig 2 37 shows these bevel gears in se c tion . . .
The large gear h as 4 2 teeth the small gear has 1 9 teeth both , ,
A
5 pitch We will first calculate the pitch angle or as it is sometimes
‘
.
, ,
A A
called the cone angle The pitch angl e for the pinion is OB and
, .
A
for the gear A OC N otice that in triangl e OB B is half the
.
,
A
pitch diameter of the pinion and O B being e qual to C is half the , , ,
A A
pitch diameter of the gear We find the tangent of the angle OB .
by dividing B by OB We really do not have to figur e out B and .
OB to do this ; all we need to do is to divide the number of teeth

of the gear into the number of teeth of the pinion but as we wish to ,
know the diameters of the ge ars anyhow we will overlook this ,
little short cut .
number O f teeth 42
The pitch diameter of the gear is
p It ch 5
Half this diameter ,

or the radius is ,
The pitch diameter of the
p in io n is I ts radius is half as much or , The tangent
of angle AOB is We see at once that the answer would have

‘
been the same if we had divided the number of teeth of the gear into
the number of teeth of the pinion This tangent we find to be .
S h chul d h k h c w hul du h bh l l w chl w k hh w uch

o ta e a se l
ti o n t ro g two e ve g e a rs hi or a t rig t a n g es to
ea
t r i an g l
ot
e .d h A P h ll h l d h l ld d
er ,
Th e
t en we
i a m e t er
o g e t a ri g t
o f th e s m a
a ng e t ri a n g e . Fi g
g e ar is o n e r i g t a n g e S i e , t h e i a m e
. 237 S o s s a
hS yp u w uhl d l h f w ul d d d
t er A Q
o ten
of
se
t he
.
cw
ot
T is
er g e ar i s t h e
i n e PQ o
ot er
be t h e
ri g t a n g e S i e , a n d t h e i ne P Q i s t h e
i am eter o f A GR E A T C I RC L E O F THE
w h pu d d d c
P H E RE a n d t be t h e i a m e t er of the n
bl l
o , e re ore , ro g ear .
t o ot
ro
hAs
er
hSp b y w h ch
it
a w h ch
es
r un
b s r
t og e t
ph
y
w ll
g e ars ,
pc wp ly h h h d yl k ckl c hd h pu by wh chy B h d i
er .
so
g e ars
Th e
i t h as
s
i
s te m
ee n ee me a
ar e c ut o u t o f o n e a n d
se e te is t
vi s a
at
e to
th e
se e
i
sa
t
me
a s
t h e t ee t
s
ste
ere
m
of
of
i
a
h chp cul y l h y h cup b ck l h buch

t is
ro n g e ar
e i ar i t
a ve s t r a i g
y is
ch a s stem
t Si es
of
i e ra
tt i n g
t e et
e ve
in
g e ars
a s r g e ar
means
s ste m
of a
. ase
g e nerat i n g
on
ma
O p ww hh p uchp l wbll p l duc h c lly cch c b lh f l
ine
era t i n g
an d a
it
to o
s a
a vi n g
too
th e
i
S a
ro
e of a ra
e a t
toot
e o re t i a
. S
o rre
a g e ne r a t i n g
t e ve g e ar
ma
Re
ine ,
a
uch w h y cu wh d
,
ll ch
.
t i ve l y f e S o s o ssess a e ve g e a r g e n er a t i n g m a i n e a n d t e re ,
o re , cut
s g e ars it a r o t ar tt er as en o ne o n a m i i ng m a in e .
A T EA ISE
. 4 52 3 8 ,
and we find from the table that the angle must be
We might calculate the angle A O G in the same wa y by dividing the
radius of the pinion into the radius of the gear and this woul d gi ve ,
A
the tangent of the angle A OG but this is not necessary be c ause
, ,
the angles OB and A O G together make 90 and are therefore °
4 2T .
°
S P
Fi g 23 7
AB
.
complements of each other s o that if angle O is

, the angle
A O C must be what there is left of the right angle or 90 ,
A L
For many purposes though not for all it is desirable to know
, ,
the line O which is called the pitch cone radius

,
ooking .
again at angle AOB ,
ABwe see thatA OB I f

AO
— is the cosecant of .
,
wish to find the line A O we must multiply A B by

the cosecant of angle A O B We proceed thus
therefore , we ,
.
THE CIN CINNA TI MILLING MACHINE C O MPANY
AB AOB AO Substituting our values we get

AO
cosec
X cosec
.
,
The length of A O is therefore

From the tables find c osec we We then have
that the line A F

X
From the chapter on cutting spur gears we see ,
which is the height of tooth above the pitch line and is called the
1
addendum is 1 divided by the pitch
, ,
in this case t . This
P
is also the value of the line A G the addendum of the pinion
Since the addendum and dedendum are e qual and since their
.
,
sum is the working depth we see that the line F G is the working
,
depth of both gear and pinion The space between this working .
0 57
depth and the whole depth is the clearance
£
. 03 14 and sin c e AF A G dedendum . 2 we find
that AH AK 2 0 3 14 2 3 14
. This is the depth of the
. .
tooth below the pitch line The whole depth that is the depth.
, ,
to be cut in the gear is the above the addendum or 2 3 14 2 ,

. .
H owever what are really after is the angle AO K well

the angle A O H Of cou se these two angles are alike We are also
, we , as as
interest d in the angles A O G and which are also alike I f we

. r .
e A O F, .
once have these angles it will be a S imple matter to find the angle
FO C which is the turning angle for the gear and O C which is the
,
H ,
cutting angle for the gear ; and it will be j ust as easy to find the angle
G OB the turning angle for the pinion and KOB the cutting angle
, ,
for the pinion

AG
.
AG A
To find the angle O : We already know the leng th of the
lines and O in this triangle D ividing one into the other we .
get the proportion —

fig cotan AO G .
AO AO G
AG c otan ,
therefore by c onsulting the tables

, we find A O G and A O F
also .
27 8 THE CIN C INNA TI M ILLING MA CHINE C O MPANY
Tan A O B
22
1
, therefore A E tan A GE x AO .
AO
A GE and its tangent is
Therefore the radius A E

,
x
The diameter and the number of teeth
is 5 or 1 02 teeth
A
.
I n a similar manner
A
find the length of the line D
we by multi ,
A
plying the length o f OA by the tangent of angle D O and find that ,
D equals the diameter of the imaginary gear for the

pinion would be twi c e that much or s o that the number of ,
teeth of this imaginary gear would be We would therefore

select a cutter suitable f or 2 1 teeth and not for 1 9 teeth
p
.
The pre ceding aragraphs will serve to show how S imple and .
practical a tool trigonometry really is in solving ordinary sh op

problems and also the method followed in computing bevel gears
, ,
.
P ractical rules and formulas for quick reference are given at the end
of this chapter .
gB G
S
Cu t tin eve l ears We are concern ed here with cutting
.
bevel gears with a rotary c utter on a Milling Machine uch gears .
are of course not entirely correct in their tooth forms This is n o t .
the fault of the milling machine but is due to the fact that the S ize
and S hape of a bevel gear tooth is different at every point through
S
out its length while the section through the tooth of a gear cutter
can have only one S ize and S hape u c h a cutter may be correct .
for any one se ction of the bevel gear tooth but can not possibly be
correct for all or even two of them
,
.
While such gears may not be good enough for refined machinery ,
they are in a great many c ases satisfactory for all ordinary pur
,
poses .
The following will S how how such gears may be cut as nearly
correct as is practical with a rotary cutter on a milling machine .
Th e S h ap e
Tooth Fig 2 38 S hows a tooth of a Bevel
of th e
G
. .
ear The large outline is the S hap e of the tooth at the outer end
.
of the gear say Q ( Fig and the smaller outline is the S hape of
R
.
,
the tooth at the inner end When cutting a bevel gear on a

, .
milling machine the dividing head is set in accordan c e with the

,
A T EA ISE
R T ON MILLING AND MILLING MA C HINES 27 9
computed cutting angle for the gear in other words S O that the ,
bottom of the tooth is horizontal The line representing the bottom .
A
of the tooth pass es through the apex of the cone and the cutter
forms the outline P B Fig 23 8 This outline can be made s o as
,
. .
Fi g . 238
to be c orrect for the large end of the tooth The ill ustration S hows .
at once that it is not correct for the small end of the tooth which
I
y
S hould follow the outline A PB l n order to make the gear more .
nearl correct we wdul d ha v e to file some off the small end of the
,
tooth at the top and fill it up slightly at the bottom uch filling . S
up is Of course impossible T he filing off is quite c ommonly done
, ,
.
with bevel ge ars m ade with a rotary c utter T he distan c e AA ] is a .
I
measure of the amount we hav e to file off the top of the tooth .
f we had sele cted a cutter that was not quite corr ect for the large
.
end nor for the small end but for a point half w ay between we would
, , ,
have had less to take off the top of the teeth but the undercut at ,
the bottom of the teeth would have been somewhat more pro
n o un c e d.Ordinarily a cutter is S elected which makes the correct
—
I
S hape at the large end of the teeth and that for two main reasons .
n the first pla c e we can watch the action of two mating teeth at
the large end but at no other section
,
n the second place the . I ,
pressure at the large end causes the least wear and deformation of
the teeth Therefore bevel gears are designed to have the pressure
.
,
c on centrated at that large end .
We have S hown in a pre ceding par agraph h ow to sele c t the cutter

p
for a gi ven air of be vel gears We found for instance that the .
, ,
large gear in Fig 2 3 7 S hould be cut with a cutter that will cut a
I
.
spur gear of 102 teeth f the c ir c ular pitch of a bevel gear is

.
then the thickness of the tooth on the pitc h line at the large end is
and therefore the width of the space is also The cutter
that would c ut this space would be
,
thick at the pitch line f . I

2 80 THE CIN CINNA TI MILLING MA C HINE C O MPANY
this cutter were of a rectangular S hape as at Fig 2 3 9 then it ,

A ,
.
,
I
woul d cut a space through the bevel gear of even width throughout .
n other words the space at the small end of the tooth would be
,
exactly the same width as at the large end Of course this would .
F ig . 23 9
I
not do as this space must be proportionately smaller at the small
,
I
end .n order to use a cutter of such a shape we must select one
thin enough to pass through the tooth space at the small end f .
the c utter were of the S hape shown at B Fig 2 3 9 then it would , .

,
automatically make a space of the proper width at any section of
S
the tooth and the flanks of all the teeth would converge pro perly
,
toward the apex uch a cutter might be used for instan c e for
.
, ,
cutting S av
A
V tooth clutches and the bevel S ides of these sa w tooth
’
“
- -
,
clutches w oiI ld bear over their entire length cutter of the general .
A
shape as S hown at C Fig 2 3 9 has some of the peculiarities of the, .
,
square tooth and of the triangular tooth B , Consequently .

,
we must sele c t a cutter thinner than the width of the space at the
large end ; in fa ct at least as thin as the width of space at the small
,
end .
Too th Ee l m en t s
is called the cone radius I n Fig 237 O Q
R
. . .
O is also a cone radius but whereas O Q is the cone radius for the
R
,
large end O i s the cone radius for the small end Thickness of
,
.
tooth pitch height of tooth in fact all the elements of a tooth

, , , ,
I
anywhere in the b evel gear are in direct proportion to the cone
radii f for instance O Q were twice as great as O R then the pitch
R
.
, , ,
at Q would be twice as g reat as the pitch at ; the height of the
I
tooth at Q would be twice as g reat as the height of the tooth at R ,
etc f then we know the pitch of a gear at the large end and the
.
,
I
cone radii at the large and small ends we can easily figure the ,
pitch at the small end f for instance we select the same elements .
, ,
of the gears as we found in Fig 2 3 7 and make the face of the gear .
,
R Q equal then we find the following : O Q OA OR

OQ 1 The pitch at Q is 5 or expressed as circular pitch
”
, , ,
2 82 THE CIN CINNATI MILLING MACHINE C O MPANY
S et tin g M a c h i n e With the proper cutter in place on the

th e .
‘
ar bor we bring the milling machine table into such position that
,
the cutter is exactly central with the dividing head spindle Then .
with the gear blank securely held in place we s et the dividing head
to bring the gear to the proper cutting angle
The swivel of the dividing head is graduated to read 0 with the
°
spindle horizontal and therefore 90 when vertical When set .
beyond the v ertical position the graduations read in reverse order ;

that is , 7 and so on ; in other words the complement of the ,
angle beyond the vertical This is done so that for any position of
.
the dividing head spindle whether ahead of or past the v ertical

, , ,
the graduations will always S how the angle which the spindle makes
with the horizontal position .
We therefore need merely , ,
S wing the dividing head

spindle past the vertical to
and o ur gear blank is
I
at the correct ang le for tak
ing the cut t is S hown in .
this position in Fig 24 0

I
. .
t S hould b e noted that

the gear is always s e t at the
angle past the vertical as in
Fig 24 0 so the direction of .
,
the cut will be away from

instead of toward the divid
ing head spindle One of the
vl
.
F i g 240.B G . C tti g
e e ear u
many advantages of the
n
Cincinnati D ividing ead is H
that for such work it can be s et past the vertical far enough to
obtain the cutting angle for a ll bevel gears up to and including
mitre gears .
With this setting made we set for depth of cut by the us ual
method of touching the cutter to the blank at the extreme edge
of the large end of the tooth ; i e the point of largest diameter
. .
,
of the gear then raise the table the amount required for the whole
,
depth ; in the case of the above gear 43 1 The exact relation of . .
the cutter to th e blank is S hown in Fig 2 4 1

After having made this setting we take a central cut through
. .
each tooth space . This is not absolutely necessary but it is ,

r ec o m
R T ON AND C 2 83
mended here I f we were to attempt to mill the gear by taking onl y

.
two cuts the first cut would finish at on c e one S ide of a tooth and
, ,
we would then have considerable metal left to be removed when

taking the final cut finishing the side of the next tooth This would
, .
S + A =S
Fi g . 241
tend to crowd the cutter to one S ide and would probably cause an
unevenly cut gear We therefore recommend taking first a central
.
cut and then two finishing cuts one on each S ide of the tooth
,
A
space .
fter having taken the first cut all around the gear it will be n eces
sary to make certain adj ustments of the blank in relation to the
p
cutter in order to produce a tooth of the pro er thi c kness and as
2 84 THE C IN CINNA TI MILLING MA C HINE C O MPANY
nearly as possible the correct form Two things are necessary : .
the rotation of the blank and the offset ; that is setting the cutter ,
out of c enter We will first determine the amount of offset

. .
C o m pu t i n g the O ff s e t . The formula q uite generally used is

T R
2 P
which O is the amount of offset .
T is the thickness of cutter tooth at the pitch line cor ‘
responding to the large end of the tooth

R
.
is the factor selected from the table

p
.
P is the itch of the gear

R is taken from the table for Set over We must
.
The factor -
.
first find the value Which is the ratio between the pitch cone O
radius and the fa c e of tooth .
T A B L E F O R O B T A I N I N G S E T -O V E R F O R C U T TI N G B E V E L G EA R S
R a t io of P it ch C one Ra di u s to Wi dth of F c a e
( ) i?
t
31 35 32 4 43
1 3 43
u . 254 . 25 4 . 25 5 2 5 6 2 5 7
. 257 . . . 25 7 . 2 5 8 258
. 25 9 . 2 60 262 2 64 .
w
. .
—
2 66 2 68 . 2 7 1 2 72 2 73 2 74 . . 2 74 2 75 2 77 2 79 . 280 2 83 2 84 .
w
. . . . . .
2 66 2 68 . 2 7 1 273 275
. 278 . . . 2 80 . 28 2 28 3
. . 28 6 . 2 87 2 90 29 2
. .
Mq0
!
s
)
oI O oo 30 5 30 8 3 1 1
)
0 Q
N0 . t o 2 93 2 96 2 98 2 98 302
n
t ( t so o A
m
c u . . . . . . . .
2 80 2 85 2 9 0 293 2 9 5 2 9 6 2 98 3 00 3 02 307 3 0 9 3 1 3 3 15
m
. . . . . . . . . . .
311 3 18 . 323 1 3 2 8 3 3 0 334 . . . 33 7 . 34 0 3 4 3

. . 3 48 . 35 2 3 56 3 62
. .
2 89 2 98 3 08 3 16 32 4 3 2 9 3 34 3 38 348 3 50 3 60 3 70 3 76
m
. . . . . . . . . . .
ul
2 75 2 86 2 96 3 09 3 19 3 3 1 3 38 3 44 3 52 86 1 3 68 380
v v
. . . . . . . . . .
N0 TE .
—F o r o bt a i n i n g se t -o
v
er
T
by a
fc b
a
o e ta bl
t o r f r om t a
e , u se
b l t h is f o r m
e
a
l p chu
S e t -o er
l
2 P
T
P di m
th ick
a et r a
ne s s o f c
it ofg e a r t o b e c ut
t t e r u se d , m e a s r e u .
d at pi t ch i ne
N o w applying th is to our gear : We have seen that we should

use a cutter correct for 1 02 teeth T his is a o 2 cutter We will . N . .
assume it to be 1 7 5 thick at the pitch line The pitch cone radius

. .
is the line O C , Fig 2 37 , whi ch we have found to be. long The .
fa c e of the tooth is Therefore ,
C
F 1
286 THE C IN C INNA TI MILLING MA CHINE C O MPANY
set enough ; on the other hand if the small end is too thick
an d the large end is corr ect it was offset too much
,
enerally
,
. G
speaking if the small end is too thin it indicates that the offs et
, , .
I
was not enough and if the small end is too thick the offset has been
, ,
too much f the tooth as measured is not correct then we must

.
,
correct the settings in accordance with the

above using S lightly more or S lightly less
,
offset as the case may be and revolve the

, ,
blank correspondingly
It
.
must be borne in mind however , ,
that exactly the same setting must be made ,
but in the opposite direction for both S ides

of the teeth When the final setting has
.
'
been determined it is well to make a
F 'g 2 43
permanent record of It for future us e .
When rotating the blank in accordance with the above it will ,
sometimes happen that when the tooth face is in the correct re l a

tion to the cutter the index pin will not enter the ne arest hole in
the index plate We must then loosen the index plate lock and r e
.
volve the plate being careful to not disturb the p osition of the index
,
pin handle until the pin drops into one of the holes then l o ok the plate ,
in position again
After the gear
.
been c ut it will be found that the teeth at

h as
the small end have their S ides too straight ; that is they are too ,
thick at the top and this must finally be corrected by filing a tri
,
angular area from the point of the tooth at the small end down to
its pitch line and back towards the point of the tooth at the large
end Fig 243
,
. .
F o r m u l a s f o r Be v e l G e a r C a lc u l a t i o n s
V
From the foregoing the following rules and formulas have been
deduced These like the preceding discussion apply to B E EL
F
.
,
GEAR S W I TH S HA TS A T RIGH T ANGLES which of course include , ,
mitre gears The notation used in the formulas which is easily

.
,
understood by comparing the formula with the c orresponding rule ,
is as follows :
n ud b l p chh
m er o f t eet .
P
P ’
c cul p ch
ia m e tra
ir
it
ar it .
.
7r
oc p chl c l d
it o ne a ng e and e ge
c d l
“I“
a ng e .
M um
m w
3252n
W HO LE 4 To o
T e n t er a n g e .
R oo s no um K
D
S a dd ddud du cl c
p l t Ch
en
i a m e t er
m .
.
J
Ra nc e : S 1 A
wh l d p h h p c
S A = e en m e a ra n e
hl ck h p ch
.
W o e e t of toot s a e .
T t i n es s of t oot at it
C pw dchh c f c d u
it
i ne .
one ra i s
dd hdu
.
F
3 a
i t
en
of
ll m
a
at
e .
s ma e nd of
” 15 0 mm
hl ck ll h p ch
V ERTEX
toot .
t i n e ss of toot at it
6 a ddd d dudu l cl c
in e
en
a t sm a
m a ng
e nd
e .
.
l (
l m )
il e en e aran e
8 fcuc l l
a
ang e
e ang e
.
C
K
0
a ng
o
u l
t tin g
u d dd c
ts i
dd
ar a du
e
a ng e.
ia
en
mete r
m
.
.
EDGE R N GLE N ; R oo en ov
fi NG Lf .
m mi s u s e
d c ll
“m “ W “;
J ver t e x is t a n e .
N
7
’
n u l bc cu h l whcchll d
ve r t e x
m er o f
i stan
t eet
e at s
f or
ma
i
end
to
.
Fig . 2 44
se e
l pu
“
u
n
e nt S
b m
t
h er o f
r
tt er ,
g e ar
t eet
.
”
a so a
i n e q ui v a
e
288 THE CIN CINNA TI M ILLING MA C HINE C O MPANY
g B eve G e
S g A ge
Ru l e s an d Fo rm u l a s f o r Ca l c u l a t i n l ar s wi t h
h af t s at Ri h t l
chl c
n s
Pit
pP ch c
oc p o ne
ang e o f
i ni o n ;
cc g
l
it
a ng e o f
o ne
Np N mu hb
g e ar ;
er o f
p
t ee t
i ni o n ,
et c.
in
F
F ig . 245 Fi g . 246
Us e R u l es and or m u l a s No s 1 t o 2 1 i n t h e o r d er g i ve n
d ul
.
To Fin F o rm
chl d u h
a
P it
pi
C o ne
ub D
h vi the m in the
of
dP A l
e n t ee t
er
1 A ng e by
( or b i ni o n t h e n m er o f t e e t i n t h e t an 0:
p
E ge ng e ) g ear to g e t t h e t an g e nt
of
P ch d u h
i ni o n
it
Ed
C o ne A n
u b h
D i vi th e n m er o f t ee t in the
p
e
A l
2 gle ( or ge by b g e ar t h e n m er o f t e e t i n th e t an oc g
ng e ) o f G e a r i ni o n t o g e t t h e t a n g e n t
P f lu
.
3
P ch
ro o of Ca e
p
l at i o n s f o r p ch cqu l
Th e l su m of th e it one a ng es of
A l
°
it C o ne the i ni o n a nd g ear e a s cc p cc g 90
d u h
n g es
4 P chit
b
du b l p ch h by ul pclycul by
D i vi e t h e
ia m e tr a
n
it
m er ofteet
m ti
th e
th e N NP
’
p ch d d by
; or
D i a m e t er n m er of t ee t th e ir ar D
it and ivi e 3 14 1 6
dul ply by c cudl p chl bpy ch

D i vi
m ti
e 1
the
the
ir
ia me tr a
ar it
it ; or S
d ul ply by c dcul p l chp chby

D i vi
or m
e
ti th e
th e
ir
i a m e tr a
ar it
it ; S A
1 1 57
d ul ply b y c dcul p l chp chby

D i vi
or m
e
ti the
th e
ir
ia me tra
ar it
it ;
W
D i vi
or
dd d bcy cul d p ch byl p ch
e
i vi e th e ir
the
ar
i a m e tr a
it 2
it
.
; 1 571 P ’
e
Pit chd u Cone M ul ply d u by c
ti th e i
D
th e C = C osec D x D
c p ch c
s
ra s os e
l
e
h
Ra i s 2 2
T
a nt o f th e it o ne an g e .
290 THE CIN CINNA TI MILLING MAC HINE C O MPANY
Ru l e s an d For m u l a s f o r Ca l c u l a t i n g M e B eve G ea g
it r l rin
Fi g 247 F ig 248
u F d ul
. .
d l U se R es a n d o rm as N OS .
hu d
2 2 , 4 - 8 , 2 3 , 1 0 1 3 , 2 4 2 6, 1 7 1 9 , 2 7
- - -
h and
‘
2 1 in
p
the
a ir
or
.
er g i ve n . Al l ime ns i o ns t s o b t a i ne a re th e s a me for bot g e a rs of a
To Fin d F o rm ul
chl
a
P ch c l qu l
22 Pit C o ne
Ang it 45
°
P ch
e one a ng e e a s
23 it
du
C o ne
Ra i s ul ply p ch d M ti th e it i a m ete r by 0 70 7 C 0 70 7 D
c A l Sub c dd d u l f
. . .
24 Fa e ng e tra t th e a en m a ng e ro m
°
45
u A l Sub c d d du cl c
8
25 C t t in g ng e tra t th e (° e en m e aran e ) °
angl e f ro m 4 5 t 45
A ul
.
A dd du ul ply dd du by
26 ng ar
m M ti th e m K S
Nu b
en a en
27
m
w h ch
Tee t h u l ply u
er o f
f orb M ti the n m er o f te e t h by N
’
1 41 N
S l c u
.
i to
e e t C tt e r
A T EA ISE
C HA P T E R XV I
SP I R A L G E A R C TT I U NG
Spiral gears may have their axes p arallel ,
A
the same as spur
gears or the axes may be at an angle with each other
, spiral .
gear differs from a spur gear in that the teeth are not placed parallel
with the axis but are wound spirally around the pitch cir c le The
,
.
X
”
name spiral gears is really wrong The teeth are not wound in a .
SPI RAL but in a HELI around the pitch circle

, The distinction .
between a spiral and a helix will be clear when we remember that the
H
main spring of a watch is a good example of a S piral whil e the ,
threads on a lead S crew form a helix

,
owever in our discussion .
, ,
“ ”
we will use the name spiral gears as this is the name by which ,
the average mechanic knows them This chapter will not treat
‘
of all the properties of spiral gears but only of such as need be known
,
in order to design or make them .
If we have two Shafts with a center distance of and we 7M

”
,
I
must drive one shaft from the other with a given speed ratio we ,
will find considerable trouble if we try to us e spur gears f for .

,
instance the speed ratio is 4 to 5 we will not be able to us e spur

, ,
gears except by making them 1 8 pitch The sum of the diameters .
is being twice the center distance and we must sele c t the ,
I
pitch so that the sum of the numbers of teeth of the two gears can
be split up into two numbers which have a ratio of 4 and 5 f we .
should select 4 pitc h for the gears we would find that the sum of the
,
H
numbers of teeth of these two gears is 4 times the sum of their diame
I
ters or 4 times 14 % e quals 58
, owever 58 can not be split up
.
,
I
into two numbers which have a ratio of 4 and 5 n order to do so .
,
5 8 should be divisible by 4 plus 5 which equals 9 f we should .
select 5 pitch gears then the sum of the numbers of teeth of the
-
,
two gears would be 5 x 1 4 % 7 2 V2 and this of course is i mp o ss i , , ,
I
ble as the sum of the number of teeth of two gears must be an
,
integral number f we make the pitch 18 then the s um of the

.
,
numbers of teeth of the two gears would be 1 8 X 14 % 2 61 and ,

one gear would have 4 of 261 teeth and the other gear
,
E of this num
9 9
ber . H
owever 1 8 pitch is probably entirely too fine for the work
,
we have to do so that we must choose one of two things We must

, .
either make special cutters with a n odd pitch or we must be satis ,
fie d with a compromise as to the gear ratio The first of these two .
things is costly and consumes a great deal of time and the other
S
may be absolutely prohibitive if an exact gear ratio is required .
ubstituting spiral gears for spur gears would solve the questi on
at once
Le A
.
I
De fi n i t i o n s — Pi t c h
N o r m a l Pi t c h e t c ad ,
tooth of a .
, ,
spiral gear is much like the thread of a screw t does not have the .
y
same cross section nor is it meant to do the same kind of work but
, ,
in man respects the two are very S imilar The distance from a .
point on a screw thread to the corresponding point on the next

thread is called the P I TCH The distance the screw travels in an .
axial direction if we give it one complete turn is called the LE AD

, , .
These same terms apply in the same way to a spiral gear There is .
,
however this distinction : We measur e the pitch of a screw along the

,
axis of t he screw whereas we measure the pitch of a spiral gear around

H
, ,
"
the circumference that is at right angles to the axis

, , owever .
,
there are two things which are called pitch in the spiral gear The .
pitch as we described it that is the distance between two cor

, , ,
responding points of two adj oining teeth measured at right angles

to the axis is called the REAL pitch whereas the distan c e between
p
, ,
two corresponding oints of two adj oining teeth measured in a ,
direction AT RIGH T AN GLES To THE DI RE CTI O N OF THE TEE TH is ,
called the N ORMAL pitch The normal section which would gi ve .

,
A
uS the normal pitch would S how us the true section of the teeth
,
.
section taken at right angles to the axis would give us the dis
, ,
A
t o r te d vie w _o f the S hape of the teeth as seen when looking at the
I
end of a spiral gear se ction through the axis wo uld also give a
.
distorted V iew f the spiral angle is

. then the distorted views of
I
the teeth would be the same whether we take the sections through
the axis or at right angles with the axis
,
f the angle of the spiral .
with the axis is less than that is if the spiral gear approaches ,
more nearly a spur gear then the right angle section would give a
,
less and the axial section a more distorted view This is reversed .
if the angle of the spiral with the axis is more than that is if ,
the spiral gear approaches more nearly the S hape of a w orm .

2 94 THE CIN C INNA TI MILLING MA CHINE C O MPANY
spiral gear with 1 6 teeth 5 pitch and a spiral angle of 3 7 d e g rees

, , ,
I
will have a diameter of 1 6 divided by 5 and multiplied by the secant
of 37 degrees f we were dealing with a Spur gear the pitch diameter
.
would be
°
From a table of secants we find sec 3 7 Then we
x
have X the pitch diameter of the spiral gear .
The pitch circumference is W x
I f we Should make
wooden cylinder with a diameter e qual to the
a
pitch diameter of our spiral gear and the n cut out a paper right
,
angle triangle Fig 2 50 of which one right angle S ide is equal to

, .
,
the circumference of the pitch circle and the opposing angle equal ,
Fig . 25 0
to the spiral angle and wrap this triangle around the cylinder
, ,
we will find that the hypotenuse describes a spiral line around the
I
cylinder and that the end of the hypotenuse will come in line with
,
the beginning n other words the two ends of the hypotenuse

.
,
I
will be a distance apart on the cylinder equal to the lead of the
spiral .f now we unwrap the paper triangle we have in this triangl e
all the important elements of a tooth of the spiral gear One right .
angle side is the circumference of the pitch circle the second right ,
angle S ide is the lead the hypotenuse is the length of a tooth

,
wr apped once around the pitch cylinder the angle opposite the ,
I
circumference is the angle of the spiral with the axis of the gear .
This is commonly called the spiral angle or helix angle t is th e .
angle to which the milling machine table must be s et The angle .
opposite the lead is the angle which the tooth makes with the bo dy
of the gear .
Addendum dedendum and clearance are the same as in a spur

,
gear of the same pitch as the normal pitch of spiral gear th e .
S e e g C e I t now possible to figure all the

l c tin th e utt r. is
dimensions of the spiral gear and turn up the blank in the lathe
H
.
A
owever when it comes to cutting the teeth a new element comes
, ,
in . lthough the gear may have 16 teeth 5 pitch this does not , ,
I
mean th at we can use a 16 tooth 5 pitch gear cutter for this spi ral
‘
-
,
-
gear t is true we will have to use a 5 pitch cutter but not for
.
,
-
,
16 teeth We must select a spur gear cutter for a different number

.
of teeth The rule usually given is to divide the number of teeth

.
of the spiral gear by the cube of the cosine of the spiral angle .
This gives good results for gears having a spiral angle in the
neighborhood of but anyone who has followed this rule for
°
gears with a spiral angle differing greatly from 4 5 will have found
that such gears do not run properly and the running of th e gears
becomes worse a s the spiral differs more from For such gears
we recommend the following rule :
Di vide the n umber of teeth of the sp i r a l gea r by the p r oduct o f the
s q ua re of the cosi n e mu l ti p l i ed by the si n e of the sp i ra l a n g l e .
n
C O S L x S in
2
in which
L
is the number of teeth of the N
selected gear cutter and n is the number of teeth of the spiral gear
, .
Taking the above case

n 16 16
C OS 3 7 2
x S in 37 . 79 864 2
x . 60 1 8 2 . 63 7 8 . 60 1 82
We S hould select a cutter suitable for cutting a gear with 4 1 teeth .
The speed ratio of t wo S piral gears is as with spur gears the , ,
ratio of their numbers of teeth For instance a 1 6 tooth gear .

,
-
driving a 32 tooth gear will cause this latter gear to run half as
-
many revolutions per minute as the former The center distance .
between two spiral gears as with spur gears is equal to half the , ,
s um of their pitch d iameters .
S f s P a e C omputation of a pair of spiral gears which

ha t ar ll l .
I f we have two Shafts

are to be used in place of spur gears .
apart and wish to drive one from

,
say 8
”
,
the other by means of spiral gears with a given gear ratio and if , ,
we desire to us e standard gear cutters we should proceed as i s S hown

in the following example :
296 THE C IN CINNA TI MILLING MA C HINE C O MPANY
The two gears shown in Fig 251 must have a ratio of 2 to 1 ; .
a center distance of and in order to make them of the proper

strength the teeth must have about 5 pitch A s we want to us e .
standard gear cutters we will make the pitch exactly 5

,
.
S M RL L G E R Q
U
N M B E R O F TE ETH: n = 25
5 19 m m R N G L E =Z O 2 I
° '
R I G HT H R N D
LR R G E G ER?
N U MBER O F T EETH=2 n = SO
m
°
m s n o r t: 2 0 2 i
‘
5 9 .
»
LE F T H n N O
A p a ir o f s p ira l g e ar s on par all l h f v

Fi g
e S
.
a t s to g i e a sp ee d r a t io o f 2 to 1 .
N u m b e r o f Te e t h a n d p i r a l n l Taking the number S A ge .
L
of teeth in the small gear n and the number in the large gear ,
2 n and the spiral angle of the teeth in the small gear

,
we have ,
n S C L
P itch diameter small gear
E
P i tch d i ameter large gear
2n s ec L be c ause , In a pa i r of sp i ral
5
gears with S hafts parallel the spiral angle is the same in both
,
.
The su m of the pitch diameters of the gears is therefore
L L
, ,
11 sec 2n s ec
5 5
and this sum e quals double the center distance .

The v alue using was 18 5 too small O ur new value is 3 3 2 5

, . . .
°
too large The correct angle is therefore between 2 0 and
.
, ,
By trial we find that ( sec

, gives us
25 x 50 x or . 0 02 5 too large ,
and ( s ec gives us
x X
L L
25 too small 50 or . 005 .
We will therefore cho ose as our value of , et us try , ,
this out and find what the new center distance between the gears
S
will be .
ince the gears are 5 pitch and we have taken 2 x center distance
for our second member of t h e e quation then the center distance is ,
7 9 99 50
2 x 5
which is 0 00 5 S hort which is close enough for all practical pur

.
,
poses *
Our gears therefore will have a spiral angle of
.
, ,
the small one with 2 5 teeth and the large one with 5 0 teeth .
Se e g
Cu t t er
l eferring back to the rule given o n
c t in th e . R
page 2 9 5 we have for the small gear ,
n 25
c os
2
x S in 93 7 5 9 2
x . 3 4 77 5
25
. 87 8 0 x . 3477 5
and for the large gear

50 50
. 937 5 9 2
x . 3 4 7 75 . 87 8 0 x . 3 4 77 5
Therefore the cutters should be selected for 8 1 and 1 63 teeth

,
respectively
h l dwy lld wc d kd h chc d Wc b w h fl
.
w h ch h
*
We a ve a re a e i e t at the e nt er is t a n e et een the S a ts
w ul d h c d c l h
on i t ese g e ars i or in o ur ma i n e is e re we to us e a n a ng e
w ul d pc l Wc h l f chh y w ul d w kwh ch h k h h
of 20
°
o ur g e ars o a ve a y e n t er is t a n e 0 00 2 5
”
too ar g e , a nd t e
cll
.
o not go i nto a e , or at e as t t e o or t o o t ig t i f al l o t er di m e n
w ll h u h uch c c h
w
w k l
s i o ns ere o rr e t . e t ere o re o os e 20
°
21
’
i ma es g e ar s t at are
d ma and
yw k
i
c l ccu c qu d u h ch is m T is i s s a t i s f a c
”
0 00 5 s a ve j st t or i ng e ara n e
c c dd cu l f cch y c f uu d y by l c l d
. .
y
t or f or or i n ar or . y
If o s er a ra is re ire we m st e it er ang e
o ur e n t er ist a n e in the m a i ne or o nti n e t r i ng s e e t i n g an g e s re a
i ng i n se on s n ti a s atis a t or o ne is o n .
R T ON A ND C 2 99
g L e Referring to Fig
angle L H owever we do not know the pitch circum
Co m pu t in th e ad.
We know . 2 50 :
,
ference . We must therefore first find the

PI TC H D IA ME TE RS
P itch diameter 1 ‘
P
sec L .
Then for the small gear we have

25
5
X s ec x

50
X s ec x
5
Since the outside diameter equals the pitch diameter plus twice
the a d de n d u mf O D
‘
PD 3 therefore ,
P
outside diameter of small gear
outside diameter of large gear
The PI TC H C I RCU M E REN CES are F

x
x
s m a ll g ear
large gear
Lead pitch circumference

Tangent L
1 6 754
Tangent
for the small gear and 2 x , for the large gear .
We now proceed to select the change gears by following the

G
S
instru ctions given in the chapter on Change ears for Cutting
pirals .
Our gears are as follows shafts parallel

,
Number of teeth in small gear

P itch .
Number of teeth in large gear

300 THE CIN CINNA TI MILLING MA CHINE C OMPANY
Spiral angle small gear

Spiral angle large gear right hand
. .
. left hand .
P itch diameter small gear .
P itch diameter large gear .
Outside diameter small gear .
L
Outside diameter large gear
L
ead small gear
ead large gear .
Cutter for small gear . for 8 1 teeth .
Cutter for large gear . for 163 teeth .
Center distance ( exact ) . 7 999 50

.
”
Center distance ( actual )
The above example is not at all unusual S ince spiral gears are ,
coming more into general us e for transmission members on parallel

S hafts in place of spur gears .
S h af ts at g A g es
Ri h t We will now consider the case of a
n l .
pair of spiral gears on S hafts that are at right angles with each other ,
Fig 2 5 2 using the same general data as above

.
, .
Speed ratio
P itch .
S
Center distance
S
piral angle of small gear .
piral angle of large gear .
N
N umber of teeth in small gear .
um ber of teeth in large gear
There is an important point of difference between this and the

previous case .
With S hafts parallel we prefer a spiral angl e of about 20 to

,
°
reduce the end pressure on the S hafts With S hafts at right angles .
,
we prefer a spiral angle of as near 4 5 as we c an make it for this °

,
gives the maximum e fficiency of such a gear system .
S Ag S
L
N u m b er o f Te e t h a n d p i r a l n l e ince the spiral angl e .
of the large gear is the complement of we must Use the CO SE CAN T ,
in finding its number of teeth Our equation then is

‘
.
3 02 THE CIN C INNA TI M ILLING MAC H INE C O MPANY
Since the second member of the equation should be it is evi

for L the spiral angle
80 ,
teeth I n proceeding to find the correct angle we

°
dent that our assumed value of incor 45 , , is
rect for and
19 38 .
,
will first determine whether the angle S hould be more or less than
I
°
For trial we select 44 and
, With the value of the second
member w as too large Therefore it must be reduced
. f we find ,
.
°
that 44 gives a smaller value than then we know that the
angle should be LESS than but if the value is greater then we ,
’
know that the angle must be MO RE than Of course we don t ,
expe c t that either 44 or 4 6 will be the correct value of the angle

° °
,
but making a trial with both will show uS in the first place in which ,
direction we must go and in the second place how much a change

, ,
of one degre e affects the result .
Assuming an angle of
se c 44
cosec 4 4
we then have
19 x 38 x
A
This is more than the value resulting from Therefore we ,
must select an angl e greater than ssuming an angle of
sec 46
cosec 4 6
we then have
19 x 38 x
This is closer to 80 than we found when w a s assumed at L °
but it is still too large We will therefore try an angle of 47
.
, ,
se c 47
cosec 47
we then have
19 x 38 x
L
L
This is too small whereas the value
, 4 6 was too large there ,
fore the true value of

, must be somewhere between 4 6 and °
A T EA ISE R T ON M ILLING A ND MILLING MA C HINES 3 03
L
L
We note further that the value for 4 6 is 1 7 8 1 too large and for .
L L
4 7 is 182 9 too small so that we may expect the true value of
.
,
to be very close to We will try this assuming ,
s ec
cosec
19 x 38 x
This value is s o close to 8 0 that it is worth while to try it out and

,
see what the center distance of these gears will be
I
.
n our first equation we made the second member

2 x center distance x the pitch 2 x center distance x 5 80 .
Therefore the center distance of our new gear will be

, ,
79 9 8 8 1
center distance 7 99881 .
This differs from 8 only a little more than 0 01 which is close

H
.
I
enough for all ordinary re quirements owever we do not need to .
,
stop here if extraordinary accuracy is re quired n that case we .
would note that the value of the second member is too SMALL and
°
that therefore the angle is too large We would therefor e try 46
, , .
, ,
20 or
’
and gradually narrow down until the error is inside
of the permissible limits .
By following the same methods as in the previous example ,
we find other needed data as follows
Selecting the cutter for the small gear we have

n
co s
2
S in
n
co s
2
x s in
therefore the cutters S hould be selected for 5 5 and 1 0 5 teeth respect

i vel y .
C o m pu t in g th e Le ad. P itch diameter sec L . There

fore we have for the small gear

,
sec
sec
Outside diameter small gear
Outside diameter large gear
The pitch circumferences therefore are ,
small gear X
large gear x
P itch circumference
Tangent L
We have for the small gear
Tan
S
We can now proceed to select the change gears described in
G
as
the chapter on Change ears for Cutting pirals .
Our gears are as follows —shafts at right angles
Number of teeth in small gear

P itch 5 .
Number of teeth in large gear

. 19 .
Spiral angle of small gear

38 .
Spiral angle of large gear

right hand .
. right hand .
P itch diameter of small gear

3 06 T HE C IN CINNATI MILLING MA CHINE C O MPANY
a
( ) I f the spiral angle of each gear is LESS than the angle between
the S hafts then the sum of the spiral angles of the gears will equal
,
the shaft angle and the gears will be of THE SAME HAN D SPI RAL .
I
( b ) f the spiral angle of one of the gears is G REATE R than the
FF
shaft angle then the DI E REN CE between the spiral angles e quals
,
the shaft angle and the gears will be of O PP O SI TE HAN D SPI RALS .
Nu m ber of Teeth and S p i r a l A ge

n l . Our equation is again
n x Sec L 2n S ec ( 60 — L)
°
1 6, or
5 5
n x Sec L 2n Sec ( 60 — L )
°
80 .
L by trial Let
L
We now have to find the angle . us assume
then
n X 2n x 80 , or
1 0642 n
. 2 610 8n
. 80
3 67 5n
. 80
teeth .
Suppose we select n and find the spiral angle L by assum

ing L
22
then
x S ec x Sec (
x
°
22
°
20 2 or 22 x 60 80 ,
22 x 44 80
which is too l arge .
Suppose L then
22 x Sec X Sec
21
°
44 39
°
80
which is still a trifle too large A fter trying a few more examples
we find L
.
,
with angles ranging from to 21

°
which gives
22 x S ec Sec 44 80
which is close enough for all
practical purposes .
A T EA ISE
R T ON MILLING AN D M ILLING MA CHINES 3 07
Di a m e t e r s C i r c u m f e r e n c e s
, , e tc . Then ,
P itch dia of small gear

.
22 x Sec
5
44 X 86 C 38 43
P itch dia of large gear
.
C enter distan c e V2
Outside dia of small gear

.
Outside dia of large gear

.
The pitch circumferences are :

Small gear
La ge gear
r
X
x
and the exact leads are for the
Small gear
Large gear 44 1 98
Selecting the Size of cut er we have fort ,
Small gear N C os ,
S ne 2
22
i
27 2
. teeth
Large gear N ,
Sine
Cos 2
44
teeth .
From the table of leads ( page 3 44 ) we find the closest lead

for the small gear is and the large gear and the
corresponding change gears 7 2 24 5 6 44 and 86 4 4 7 2 3 2
, , , , , , , .
This example indicate s the procedure for computi ng a pair of

spiral gears with S hafts at any other angle .
Itimportant that drawings S hould be complete with all data

is
needed by the S hop before they leave the ngineering D epartment E .
For example : The data that the drawing for the above spiral gears
S hould contain are as follows
u
P it ch cuof
h t ter
P ch d
N m b er o f t eet
u d dd c
it
O ts i e
i ame t er
i a m e t er
A dd du
C e n t er is t a n e
Whp ll d pl h
en
o e
m
e t
.
L d c
S i ra a ng e
L d
.
ea e xa t
u cub h w hc h o l c t
.
ea
N m
The ch
er
t ter
a ng e
of
cu h p l
te et
g e ars f o r
for i
tt i n g t i s
t se e
s ir a
2 7 ( N o 4 C tt e r )
. u 1 15 (No 2 C
. u tt er )
ar e
G e ar
S c d
w
on
d d
or
F irs t i n t e r m e i a t e
m
G e ar
on
cw
on s re
i nt er me i a t e
.
u
C t ti n g a s h o rt l d
ea
Fi g .
S p i ra
2 54
lg ear o n 9. P l ai n Mi ll er
3 10 T HE CIN CINNA TI MILLING MA C HINE C O MPANY
C HAP T E R XV II
W O RM G EA R I G N
I f in a pair of spiral gears the driver
, a very small number of
,
h as
teeth as f o r ins t a n ce one two three or four and the driven gear
,
'
, , , ,
a proportionately large number ; in other words if the velocity ,
ratio is very great then we get a gearing arrangement which i s com

m o n l y called endless screw or worm gearing The driver which is .
,
called a worm is a screw with S ingle or multiple threads of such a

,
f orm that its cross section is the same as that of a rack and its
teeth mus t mesh with a special form of spur gear called a wo r m wh e e l
I
.
n a worm and w or mwh eel with S hafts at right angles th e teeth ,
of the wormw h ee l f orm an angle with the S haft which is the same as
A
°
the complement of the spiral angle of the worm ; that is 9 0 minus ,
S
the spiral angle of the worm w or m w h e e l may therefore be a
.
plain spur gear with its teeth at an angle with its axis uch worm .
wheels are in common us e B ut the more efficient form of worm

.
wheel used in machinery of the better class has its teeth mad e to
fit the worm thread accurately This is the form of wo rmwh ee l that
.
should preferably be used wherever efficiency and durability are

essential .
The vel ocity ratio of a worm and wormwh eel is independent

of their relative pitch diameters ; if the worm h as a S ingle thread
the velocity ratio is equa l to the number of teeth of the worm wh eel ;
with a double threaded worm it is one half ; with a quadruple
- -
threaded worm one fourth of the number of teeth of the worm

-
wheel and S O on
, .
Careful distinction should be made between the terms pitch

“
and lead .The distance between the center of two adj acent
W V
“ “ ”
threads is termed the pitch or more correctly the linear pitch , ,
V
“ ”
while the lead is the DIS TAN CE HI C H A N Y O N E TH READ A D AN CES
IN O N E RE O L U TI O N of the worm Therefore the lead and pitch .
,
of any single threaded worm wil l be equal while for a double

-
,
threaded worm the lead is twice and for a quadruple threade d ,

-
worm four times the linear pitch and S O on , .

A T EA ISE R T ON M ILLING A ND MILLING MA C HINES 311
Worm threads that is the teeth of a worm have straight sid es

, , ,
at an included angle of Fig 2 5 6 . .
Th e Worm Cu t t i n g Too
The width at the end of the lathe l .
tool used for chasing a worm or the width of the top of the tooth ,
of the cutter when the worm thread is milled equals the linear ,
pitch P of the worm multiplied by 3 1 This is also the wi dth of

*
. .
the bottom of the space between the threads We have therefore .

,
Width of cutting tool at end P X . 31 .
°
The included angle between the sides of the tool 29
[
m e an Pc Ha ?
Ro oe uoun
NGLE O F
LE . TH Re no
Fig . 256
The full depth or cutting depth of the worm thread P x 68 66
A worm cut to th is depth with a correct tool will have a width

.
at top of thread P . 33 5 .
Th e O u t si d e Dia m e t er
‘
The outsi de diameter of the worm.
blank i s O btained by adding twice the addendum to the pitch

diameter .
The addendum S P X . 3 1 83 or
The outside diameter 0 P 2S .
The accompanying table gives the important dimensions Of
worm thread parts

l pb chd wc cul p cchcul p ch wh l h f h
.
c l cul P is i ne ar m ir it
*
it of or and ar of ee , t e re o r e , al l t ese
a at i o ns ar e as e on ir ar it .
3 12 THE C IN CINNATI MILLING MA CHINE C OMPANY
To compute the necessary dimension s for a worm

the following formulas should be used in c onnection
2 5 6 and 2 57
cl cud wp ch wh l l p ch
.
P ir l ar it of ee and i n e ar it of worm
udd b du h d w
.
l ea of or m .
n n m er o f t re a s in or m .
S
dpp chch dd a
it w
en m
i a m e t er o f
.
or m .
D
0 uh d dd it
o tsi e w
i a m et e r o f w o rmwh e el
iame te r o f orm .
.
0
O
db d
’
h p c
t ro a t i a m e t e r o f w o r m w h e e l
i a m e t e r o f w o r m w h ee l o ve r s
.
ar o r n e rs .
uwh lb d p h hw h
b o tt o m w i a m e t er o f
n m er o f t e e t
o rm
i n w o rm w h e el
.
wdh h d l
g o e e t of orm t o o t
h lh l l w
.
S i t of t re a too at en d .
W e ix ang e of or m
d u cu u h
.
g a s i ng w o r m wh ee l
qc d c
a ng e o f .
ra i s of r va t re o f w o r m wh eel t ro at
e nt er is t a n e .
3 14 THE CIN CINNATI M ILLING MA C HINE C O MPA NY
Ta bl e of I m por ta n t Di m e n s io n s of W or mTh read Pa r t s
cuL l C ir C ir c H h ph
S p c Wh l
h k Wd h
e ig
h d W d De t T ic i t of
h d IP chch P ch ph h h
ar or t
b b d
.
NO of in ea r L
in e a r o f T o o th of n ess o f T r ea i th o f
c l PL ch P ch h PL ch
. or a e o e
T r ea s it , it , l a o ve l e ow De t of Toot o n To o T r ea
pe r In . n es D e im a it it To ot it a t En d a t To p
E q u ivs . i ne L in e in e
Pra c t i ca l Ex a m pe
When computing a worm and wormwh eel
l .
it is customary to assume the outside diameter of the worm ( if

possible make it so you can us e an existing hob ) and the linear
pitch The velocity ratio is of course given
.
, , .
We will take for our example a single threaded worm two

A
-
,
threads per inch The linear pitch is therefore / é

.
1 ssume the ”
.
outside diameter to be 2 0 00 and the velocity ratio 4 0 to 1 ”
As the worm is Single threaded

.
n 1 Therefore , .
,
I P X n A
I x 1 ( The lead equals the linear pitch i n
this case S ince the worm is single threade )

,
d .
S
x
. 3 1 83 P . 3 1 83 x . 5 . 1 5915 .
d 2 ( 2 . 1 5 9 15 ) 2 . 3 1 83
P x N 40 x 5 20
6
.
A T EA ISE
R T ON MILLING A ND MILLING MA CHINES 3 15
y,
w . 68 66 xP . 6866 x . 5 . 3 4 33 .
b O 2 w 2 ( 2 x . 3 433 ) 2 . 68 66
x (1
Tangent B
1
B the helix angle of worm .
The gashing angle of w o rmwh ee l ( 90 °

B)
T 31 x P
. 31 x 5 1 55 the width of thread tool at
. . .
O D 2 S . 3 1 83 the throat diame

ter of the wo rm wh eel .
g
C u t t i n t h e W o r m w h e e l C utting a wormwh eel on a Milling.
Machine requires two operations ; first gashing the teeth and se c ond , , ,
hobbing the teeth to correct S i z e and S hape .
The ga sh ing operation consists of roughing out the gear teeth .
T he cutter S hould be an involute cutter Of the same diameter and

pit c h as the worm threads .
The wo rmwh eel to be gashed is held between c enters Fig 25 8 ,

.
,
and the table of the machine is moved longitudinally to bring the

cutter central over the work having first made sure that the cutter ,
i s central with the dividing head center as when cutting spur gears ; ,
then the milling machine table is swiveled to an angle c orresponding

with the gashing angle Fo r wo rmwh eel s driven by a right hand
.
-
worm that is wheels finished by a right hand hob swivel the

, , ,
milling m achine table toward your right hand ( when facing
V
either end of the table ) and for wormwh eel s driven by left
,
hand worms swivel it to the left

,
The work is fed E RTI CALLY .
into the cutter to the desired depth for each tooth The work .
is indexed the same as a spur gear This gashing operation S houl d .
be carried out s o as to leave only a small amount of metal on the

S id es and bottom of the teeth for the final finishing or hobbing opera
tion
A ge
.
W I
Th e C a sh i n g n l
The gashing angle for the gear depends
.
on the diameter and lead of the ORM t is found by dividing the .
lead of t h e worm by the circumference of its pitch cir c le which gives

th e tangent of the desired angle .
3 16 THE CIN C INNA TI MILLING MA C HINE C O MPANY
c
ti a ly to t h e c u
C a s h i n g a w o r m w h ee l
t t er
.
. Ta bl e is s wv l d
i e e
Fi g
the
.
am o u
258
nt of t h e g as hi l
ng a ng e , a nd the w ork is fe d ve r
Tan gent of g ashin g an gl e

Lead of worm
Circumference of pitch circle
that is ,
tan ( 90
°
B)
The angle may then be read from a table of natural tangents .
The gashing angles for wo rmwh eel s for a variety of worms from .
to 6 diameter and from

”
to lead may be taken directl y
from the table at the end of this chapter
p S
.
For exam le : uppose we have a worm 3 pitch diameter 4 1

,
”
lead or two threads per inch which is the same thing We find in , .
the column O pposite lead and under 3 P D which is the ”

. .
,
gashing angle for the gear that will work with that worm .
3 18 THE CIN C INNA TI MILLING MAC HINE C O MPANY
spindle by means of gears from the machine S pindle S O as to insure

positive rota tion of the gear in exactly the correct ratio with th e
hob With such an attachment the preliminary gashing operation
.
c an be omitted .
G a sh in gA ge n l s f or Wo r m w h e e l s
Le
of
ad No o f
.
Thr ds
per In
’
.
PITCH DIAMETER OF WORM
Wrm . in
in In . Worm 1 1% 1 M 1% IV» .
1% 1% 2 2 56
° ’ ° ' ' ' ’ ’ ’

10 2 5 1 7 58 55 52 49 46
° ’ ° ' ° ' ’ ’ ’
9 2 1 1 5 1 1 57 54 51 49 ’
° ’ ° ’ ° ’ ° ' ° ’ ’
8 3 2 2 2 1 8 1 4 1 1 58 54 '
° ' ° ’ ° ' °
7 2 5 1 9 1 6 1 3'
° ' ° ’ ° ’ °
6 4 3 3 2 2 1 l l 3' r
5
° ’ ° ' ° ’ ° ’ ° ' °
4 6 4 4 3 3 2 2 9 2 2 l 49v
°
3 }é 2 5»
° ’ ° ’ ° ’ ° ’
3 8 3 6 3 4 3 3 2
° ' ° '
2 94 4 4 3 7
° ' ° ’ ° '
2% 9 3 6 4 3 2
° '
3 4
° ’ ° ’
2% 8 3 4 3
° ' ° '
2 6 3 4 3
° ’ ° ’
1% 6 3 5 6
° '
6 3
° '
1% 6 7
1 1
1
PITCH DIAMETER OF WORM
2% 2 94 3 3 M 3% 3 94 4 1
44 494 5 5 M 5%
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0
’
32 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
' ’ ’
37 35 33 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
' ’ ’ ’ ’
43 40 38 36 35
’ ’ ' ' ’ '
52 49 46 44 42 40
° ' ° ' ' ’ ' ’
1 4 1 1 58 55 52 50
° ' ° ' ° ’ ° ' '
1 9 1 6 1 3 1 1 57
° ' ° ’
1 9 1 6
° ' ° '
2 9 2 2
° ’
3 2
° '
3 4
° ’
4 3
° '
5 6
° '
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 4
A T EA ISE
R T ON MILLING A ND MILLING MA C HINES 3 19
HA P T E XV III
C R
C O N T I N U E D F R A CT I O N S
A N G U L A R I ND E X I N G
Ag
n u l ar I nd
ex i n g
The tables on pages 3 2 9 3 0 3 1 will be
.
- -
found convenient for angular indexing when it is desired to space

holes or notches a given number of degrees and minutes apart .
These tables contain all that is required in the great maj ority of
H
cases They give angles that may be O btained with the index plate
.
regularly furnished with the Cincinnati Universal D ividing ead
I
and are accurate to within one half a minute with the exception -
,
of those few in hea vy type n these the error is somewhat

.
g reater and may amount to a minute or slightly more The tables .
give angles advancing by minutes from 3 up to which corres ’
ponds to one full turn of the index handle For larger angles we .
°
make one full turn for each 9 plus the reading in the table cor
responding to the fractional degrees and minutes For example .
,
°
to index spaces apart two turns give an 1 8 space and for
, ,
the we find in the table a spacing of 7 holes in the 2 8 circle .
The entire spacing is therefore using th e 2 8 circle 2 turns 7 holes

, , , .
When it is desired to space angles to closer limits than those given

in the tables the spacing can be computed by following the com
p a ra tivel y S imple method of Continued Fractions described belo w
g S g S
.
C o m pu t in t h e p a ci n uppose the drawing comes to the

.
S hop S howing a spacing of 3 7 and the nature of the work
H
makes it desirable to come as c lose to this as is pra c tical with a
Un i versal D ividing ead .
°
One tur n of the index crank produces an angle of 9 because 40
turns produce one complete turn of the spindle or We note ,
right away that we can make four complete turns which makes
°
3 6 and there is left an angle of The q uestion is now ,
what circle of holes S hall we us e and how many spaces S hould b e

indexed One complete turn of the index crank makes
. or
I
°
We m ust make an angle of 1 ( which is 3 600 seconds ) 34 ( which is ,
’
2 04 0 se c onds ) and ,
or altogether t is therefore , ,
5669
necessary to make of a full turn of the index crank . This
3 24 00
would be easy enough if we had a circle with holes but of , ,
course this is not the case We must therefore find some other
, .
, ,
I
fraction which has a much smaller denominator and a value very
close to the given fraction f we can find one in which the den o m i
.
nator is the number of holes in one of the circles we have an easy ,
way of spacing this angle

I
.
Ge e s t C o m m o n D i vi s o r
r at f two numbers have a common .
divisor such for instance as 2 1 and 7 7 which have the common

, , ,
divisor 7 then if we should subtract 2 1 from 77 the remainder will

, ,
also have this divisor 7 as a factor ; and if we subtract several times

2 1 from 77 that remainder also has the factor 7 ; in other words ,
I
if 2 1 and 77 have a common divisor and we S hould divide 2 1 into , _
77 the remainder of the division can also be divided by 7

, f then .
we S hould divide this remainder into the 2 1 the remainder of this ,
new division would also have this factor 7 We could keep this up .
,
always dividing the remainder of the last division into the divisor
of this last division until finally the division would leave no rem a in
,
der then the last divisor would be the greatest common divisor
,
.
2 !
) ( 3
gg
T4 2 | ( 1
Seven being the last divisor is the greatest common divisor .
o C e F c o
n tin u d I n the following example we
ra ti n s .
,
will
assume a fraction
94 3
1 727
H ere we will find that there is no greatest
common divisor .
By following a system of multiplication and addition as indi ,
c a t e d above by following the arrows in Fig 2 60 we get 5 x 1

, 0 5 .
, ,
which was the next to the last divisor This is placed in the space .
I
to the right of the last divisor which brings it below the last quo
,
tient .n the same way 2 x 5 1 1 1 and 13 x 1 1 5 14 8 ,
1 x 14 8 11 1 59 and S O on until we finally get back to the original
N
numbers 94 3 and 1 7 2 7
A
ow it is a peculiar property of numbers that if we should cut ,
off part of this operation say along the line ; in other words if
, ,
we S hould start with 1 3 instead of 5 making a diag ram as in Fig ,

.
261 we will get another fraction but which is very close in value
,
t o the original fraction .
Another peculiar property of numbers that if we should cut

off at A and find that the resulting fraction
is
a little too large is ,
then if we cut O ff at C one place further to the right the fraction

E
, , ,
would be a little to o small and if we S hould start at

,
the fraction
would be too large again and S O on The value of these app r o xi
, .
mating fractio ns would move somewhat like the wave l i ne i n Fig 2 62 . .
Fi g . 2 62
The straight line represents the true value of our original frac
ti on and the wave line represents the value of the approximating
fractions I
t will be seen that these approximating fractions go
.
alternately above and below the real value and that they gradually
go farther and farther away from that value .
The diagram Fig 2 61 S hows that the resulting fraction if we

, .
,
started on the line A would be If we reduce the original frac

to a decimal fraction we get . 54 603 , and redu c ing the
A T EA ISER T ON MILLING A ND M ILLING MACHINES 3 23
approximate fraction fi we get . 54 60 5 , or a difference of . 0 0 00 2 .
1 52
I n other words we have an error of in a total of 54 60 0 whi c h is a2

I
, ,
very small error indeed f this fraction had been used for spacing
.
,
the holes or notches thus spaced might ha v e been nearly apart

with an error of only 00 02 eturning n o w to our problem of
. . R
We carry a continuous division .
)
566 9 3 24 oo s (
2 8 34 5
4 0 55
32 28
8 27
)
7 8 7 8 27 ( I
E Z
)
4 O 7 e7 19
(
f Q
’r
_
387
36C
T
7
gg
I ) I3 ( I3
I;
0
j ust like in the previous example and the nwe i g nore the last four
quotients keeping only the quotients 5 1 2 1 and 1 Fig 2 63
, , , , ,
. .
We set these five quotients up in our diagram as before and find,
the approximate fraction which means that we have to take
7 spaces on the 4 0 hole cir cle . of a c ircle is 1 of or of 3 24 00

40
324 T HE CIN CINNATI MILLING MA CHINE C O MPANY
seconds This is 567 0 seconds whereas what we want is 5 669

.
,
seconds This shows that we have missed our angle by one se c ond
H
. .
owever we meet a new di fficulty here We find that we must

, .
I
take 7 spaces on a 40 hole circle but there is no such circle on the,
standard index plate f there should be great need of extreme

.
accuracy a special plate with a 40 hole circle could be made but , ,
as a rule the accuracy required is not S O great nor would the dividing
, ,
head permi t of such extreme accuracy as an error of less than On e

second S uch extreme accuracy is only found in the most refined
. ,
I
astronomical instruments and has no place in the machine S hop .
nstead then of making a speci al plate with a 40 hole c ircle we cut

, ,
off the next quotient leaving only the quotients 1 2 1 and 5 Fig
, , , ,
.
264 .
4 23
This will give us the fraction and this is easily obtainable
4 °
by using the 4 6 hole circle and taking 8 spaces . of 9 gives us
23
5 63 5 seconds whereas we wanted 5669 seconds s o that our space

E
'
, ,
is 3 4 seconds too small ven this is a high degree of accur acy

.
,
the error being only about i of what it would be with the ordinary
20
method of circular indexi ng .
We could have cut off still another quotient and used only the
3
figures 2, 1 and 5 in which case we would have found the fraction
,
17
Fig . 2 65 .
This means that we would have had to use the 3 4 hole circle
an d take 6 spaces The result would have been 57 1 7 instead of
E
.
5 669 seconds or an error of 4 8 seconds ven this is a great i m

Y
.
,
provement over the regular method ou will note that with five .
326 T HE CIN C INNATI MILLING MA CHINE C O MPANY
of this fraction we reduce E and g to decimal fractions and find

9 ?
127 47
I
that there is a difference of 1 7 in a total of 7 874 0 which is quite ,
accurate enough for all but the very finest work f we had cut .
o ff one more quotient we would have found the approxi mating
26
fraction —
, which is quite convenient but not quite , so accurate .
33
The error in this c ase is 4 8 in a total of 7 8740 ; in other words ,
3
nearly three times as much as with the fra c tion 1
47
A g g G g
S A
l C o m pu ti n
pp c a t i o n
i to Ch an e e ars f o r Cu t t i n
A
p i r a l s nother application of this method is to be found in com
.
H
puting the change gears required to cut a spiral of given lead .
D ividing ead is furnished with a certain number of change gears

which are quite sufficient for all ordinary work and this bo ok ,
contains a table of the leads which can be cut with these change
gears The teeth in reamers taps cutters etc can easily be cut
E
. .
, , , ,
H
with these change gears v e n S piral gears can as a rule be cut
.
, ,
without using any other change gears than the ones supplied ow .
I
ever some times spiral gears must be cut with great accura c y and
,
I
a relatively small variation in the lead is not permissible n Chapter .
XV on spiral gear cutting we showed that the lead is found by

, ,
the simple formula :
Lead pitch cir cumferen c e

tangent of sp i ral angle
and from this it follows that the lead is usually a decimal fraction
and it would be strange indeed if this fraction could always be found
A
in the table of leads .
ssume that we have to cut a spiral gear having a lead of 5 8 04 2
N
C onsulting our table of leads we find that the nearest leads given
are and either of these two leads is close enough
driven gears lead *
for very accurate work S ince the . our frac

dr i v i ng gears 10
ti on 18 Th i s IS an awkward fracti on to reduce Into su i ta ble

10
form for conversion into change gears We will therefore carry out .
our method of continued fractions For convenience we multiply

hp p I
.
*
See C a t er X I X , ag e 332 .
A T EA ISE
R T ON MILLING A ND M ILLING MA CHINES 3 27
both numerator and denominator by in order to get rid of

the decimal This of course does not change the value of the
;
, ,
5804 2
100000
We now have
)
5 8 0 4 2 IOOO OO I
5 804 2
(
4 I9 5 8 )
<
s e o4 2 I
1 I9 5 6
(
)
1 6 0 8 4 4 I9 5 8 2
(
3 2 I6 8
)
9 7 9 0 I6 0 8 4 I (
9 79C
)
6 2 9 4 979 0
62 9 4
0
3 4 9 6 62 9 4 I
34 9 6
) (
2 7 9 8
2 79 2
6 ) 6 9 8 I| 6
(
9
E
L
38
35
6
_ _
Dropping the last three quotients and applying our diagram ,
we get
10 26 36 62
Our approximately equivalent fraction is therefore Testing
H
this for ac c uracy we divide 62 into 3 6 which gives us 5 8 0 64 5
, , . .
owever we must remember that we started with a fraction which

,
represented the lead divided by 10 This approximate equival ent

.
is therefore also f t of the lead Multiplying it by 1 0 we therefore

.
3 28 THE CIN C INNA TI MILLING MA CHINE C O MPANY
get as our approximate lead which compared with the ,
actual lead of shows that our new approximation is 0022 5 .

”
long This however is s o small an error that it is not likely to lead

.
, ,
-
into di fficulties .
We will therefore split up our fraction

, , and convert it into
suitable change gears . Thus

36 4 x 9
62 x 10
4 10 40 .
9 6 54
X X
10 62 10 6 60
Our change gears therefore are

X 54 driven gears 2d I ntermediate Gear on worm
I ntermediate Gear for screw
40
62 X 60 driving gears l st
We therefore put the 4 0 tooth gear on the second intermediate

stud the 54 tooth gear on the worm shaft the 62 tooth gear on the
,
'
,
first intermediate s tu d a n d the 60 tooth gear on the stud in the

,
segment which runs at the same speed as the screw

,
.
3 30 THE CIN CINNATI M ILLING MA CHINE C O MPANY
Ta bl e f o r Ag
n u lar In d ex i n g on th e Un i ve r s a l D i vi d i n g He ad
k
fl
fi
fi
k
fi
fi
fi
fi
hfi
fi
fi
fi
fi
fi
fi
fi
fi
fi
fi
h
fi
fi
—
fi
fl
fi
>
-
41
-
D A ) 0 s
t
0
y
- H O 0 A r 0
h
t
k
fl
k
fl
h
r
h
b
h
b
h
r
h
b
fi
k
fl
h
h
b
v
h
m
i
o
m w
m o
t
m w
w
c p
m m QN
)
0 1
0 0
m a
m q
—
w w
m o
m Ho
m t :
G6
7 3 O
0 O
m
r r
Ho
1 0 0
t 0 q 0 0
A T EA ISE
R T ON MILLING AN D MILLING MA C HINES 33 1
e Ag I
T a bl f o r n ular nd ex i n g on th e Un i ve r sa l D i vi d i n g He ad
s
e 8 3
5
*
e
r
9
93 3
g
E 3
e .
a
D E O ( 3 Q 2 O U)
q 59 62 55 8 30 54 51
m 0 54 48 8 31 57 54
m 1 46 41 8 32 58 55
m 2 28 25 8 33 59 56
m 3 38 34 8 34 62 59
m 4 58 52 8 35 43 41
m 5 59 53 8 36 66 63
m 6 30 27 8 37 47 45
w 7 51 46 8 38 49 47
m 8 62 56 8 39 51 49
m 9 53 48 8 40 54 52
w 10 54 49 8 41 28 27
w 11 66 60 8 42 30 29
m 12 34 31 8 43 62 60
m 13 46 42 8 44 34 33
m 14 47 43 8 45 37 36
m 15 24 22 8 46 39 38
m 16 49 45 8 47 42 41
m 17 38 35 8 48 46 45
m 18 51 47 8 49 49 48
m 19 66 61 8 50 54 53
m 20 54 50 8 51 59 58
m 21 57 53 8 52 66 65
w 22 43 40 8 53
m NO
O
8
m M B
-
H 8
m Mfl C 8
m MO D >
4 \
'
l
;
a A
).
8
m
1
NN 8
m
m
NO
O
MO
8
9 0 1T u rn
3 32 THE C IN CINNA TI M ILLING MAC HINE C O MPANY
C HA P T E R I X X
CH A N GE G E A RS F O R C U TT I N G L
SP I R A S
We have S een in the chapter on spiral gears how the lead O f the
spi ral is calculated We S hall now s ee how the machine is arranged
.
to produce a given lead

H
.
The wo rmw h eel in the Universal Dividing ead h as 40 teeth

and the worm is S ingle threaded therefore 4 0 revolutions O f the , ,
worm are required to make one revolution of the dividing head

spindle The table screw is so geared to the segment that the fi rst
.
change gear on this segment starting from the s c rew end makes
I
one revolution for M table movement ”
.
f e qual change gears were used the wo r msh af t would a l S O make

one revolution for each M table travel and as the worm has 40 ”
,
teeth the table would have to move 40 x M

, 10 for one full
” ”
I
turn O f the worm wh eel and therefore for one turn of the spindle , ,
I
O f the dividing head n other words a spiral O f 10 lead will be ”
.
,
produced if we us e even change gears f we want less lead we must .
speed up the w orm sh af t and for more lead we must slow it d own
W
.
,
This we do by means of the change gears furnished ith the driv

,
I
ing mechanism O f the dividing head .
f the lead is to be one third Of 10 then we must spe ed up 3 to 1

-
”
,
a n d if the lead were three times then we would slow down one
third O f the speed O f the first change gear
Le g G
.
Th e D i vi d e d by T e n i s t h e Ch a n e e a r R a t i o For
ad .
instan c e to cut a spiral with a lead O f

, divide 10 M by 10 .
Writing this as a common fraction we find that the change gear

105 21
ra t IO IS " We would get this result by placing a
10 20 1 00
A
2 0 tooth pinion on the first segment stud and a 2 1 tooth gear o n
- -
the wo r msh af t s these gears would be too far apart we woul d

.
H
place two equal idlers somewhere between the two gears S O as to
N
connect them owever looking up our list O f change gears we fin d
.
,
I
that we have neither a 2 0 nor a 2 1 tooth gear or do we have mul -
.
tiples O f both t is true we have a 40 tooth gear which is 2 times 2 0

.
-
,
3 34 THE CIN CINNATI MILLING MAC HINE C O MPANY
Lead Change gear ratio that is ,

10
Lead Driven gears

10 D riving gears
'
2d . R esolve this fraction into two fractions .
3d Multiply the numerator and denominator O f each fraction

.
by some number ( not necessarily the same number for both frac
tions ) S O as to get numbers corresponding to the number O f teeth in
standard change gears furnished with the machine These numbers .
will then represent

driven gears 2d interm gear on w o rm sh a f t lead
x
.
driving gears l s t interm . gear for screw 10
A pp l i c a t i o n Of C o n t i n u e d Fr a c t i o n s . The fraction
lead
10
is not always by any means as simple a fraction as the ones used in
S
the preceding c ases to illustrate the principle involved in com
puting change gears uppose for example it is desired to determine
.
, ,
the proper change gears for a lead O f Our fraction now is

9 6 13
1 8 Multiplying this by 1000 to get rid O f the decimal we have ,
9 64 3
the fracti on P roceed i ng now as In the last example g l ve n
1 00 00
in Chapter XV III on Continued Fractions , we get the following
9 64 3 ) (
IO O O O
9 64 3
i
3
7 14
2 5 0 3
24 9 9
( 69
32
22
1
4
O
A T EA ISE R T ON MILLING A ND MILL I NG MA CHINES 33 5
Omitting the last two q uotients and placing the others in o ur

diagram as before we get ,
27
and our approximately equivalent fraction is therefore — . Before
, ,
28
we proceed f ur ther let us prove the accuracy O f this fraction We .
find by dividing 2 7 by 2 8 we get 9642 5 We must remember that . .
lead
our original fra c tion was , the v alue Of which Of course is one
10
tenth the lead That is approximately what we get when we divide

.
2 7 by 2 8 as above
, We must therefore multiply this result by
.
, ,
ten in order to compare it with the original figure representing the

lead This gives us
. which subtracted fro m the a c tual lead ,
shows a di ff erence Of 0005 entirely too small an amount to

p
.
,
give us any c oncern We may therefore pro c eed to split u our

.
, ,
fra ction
22 so as to reduce it into fractions representing suitabl e
change gears . Thus

27 3 x 9
28 4 x 7
3
4
x —
16
16
[S
E and
64
9
—
7
x
4 8 X 72
We therefore have in which 48 and 72 are the driven gears
64 x 56
and 56 and 64 are the dri ving gears We therefore proceed to place .
these on the machine as shown in Fig 2 66 placing the 4 8 tooth .

,
-
gear on the second intermediate stud the 7 2 tooth gear on the ,

-
worm shaft the 64 tooth gear on the first intermediate stud and the
,
-
5 6 tooth gear on the stud in the segment next to and running at the
-
same speed as the s c rew

I
.
n this connection it should be noted t hat it is permissible to

transpose the 4 8 tooth gear and the 72 tooth gear and also the 56
- -
tooth gear and the 64 tooth gear This may make a more convenient
-
.
combination to s et up and does not affect the result at all .

T HE CIN C INNA TI MILLING MA C HINE C O MPANY
H
Fig 266 S hows the D ivid
H
.
ing ead as used on a igh

P ower Universal Miller ,
geared up for a right hand -
spiral 1 OM lead ,
”
.
We make a variety O f
ma chines and spiral cutting
heads and since the use O f
,
the idler varies with different

combinations O f spiral heads
and machines the following ,
tabulation will prove O f

as sistance
*
.
Fi g 2 66
h ch
.
NO 1 an d NO 2 C o n e D ri ve n A ll H i g P o we -
r D es i g n
hSp H l d hSp Hl d
-
. .
M a ch i nes
d Ma
d
i n es
R ig t -
an L e ft H a n
-
R ig t -
an Le f t H a n
-
ira Spi a l r ir a Spi a l r
DO n o t u se d
I l er U se d
I l er U se d
I l er DO n o t u se I dl er
U se I led r DO n o t use d
I l er DO n o t use d
I le r U se d
I l er
The table of l eads on pages 338 and 3 3 9 gives a selected number

O f leads with corresponding combinations O f change gear s angles , ,
etc for spirals up to 6 diameter and angles up to

.
,
The table on pages 34 0 to 344 gives a complete list O f leads up

to that can be Obtained with the change gears regularly sup
plied without interference when they are placed on the machine .
This will be found Of great convenience as the proper combination ,
for almost any desired spiral can be taken from this table .
For example : We want the proper gearing for a spiral O f

lead C onsulting th e table we find a lead O f
. and since this
is only 0 1 6 longer than the theoretically correct lead this gear
.
”
,
combination can be used for all ordinary work

l hd d p l p
.
b c u d p ud up f bl h ul l d wlwh y d pd b y h Adf
A wa ys witw p b f l
l
*
ra the in ex ate sto e o re s t ar t i n g to cu t S i ra s,
th e hu hd bp
a se
ea
th e in
h as
ex
ee n
ate
g e ar e
m st be r ee to
f pl c d h b fl h w bl wh chp w d f c dly
th e t a e
r e vo ve
s o be m o ve
a
it
a an
th e i n
to
s
ex o i nt er . t er
i ns
dl d c wd h ul d
re
D ivi i n g H e a
t h e ea s re
t a t al l
.
s
ar t s ar e
o be
re e
a
to
e
m o ve , e o re t r o i n g i n t h e o e r e e
i n t a t s o t O f th e t a e i i s ire t
Th e
o ver
.
THE C IN C INNA TI MILLING MA C HINE C O MPANY
6 9
6
66 6 B«
6 6 5 o m
6
6
6
6
z m
6 o
8
6
6
6
9
6
6 m2
f 6
.
6
26 6
w
6
6 w
6
6
6
2
5
6
9
6
6
5 4
6 6
6
6
6
©
6
6 m
8 6
o
m
fi h o
m
6 .
6
6
6
r N m
6
6 s 5 6 m
8 2
6 9
3 6
8 3 4
6
6 6 9
6 6
6 5
6
6
6 6
4
8
6
8
6 6
.
6
6 6
6 6
0 6
6 9 6
6 6
6
6
m 6 6
6
6
6
6
6
66 a 4 6
4
s
5
46
3 4
6
p
6 5 8
3 w o 4
2
0
3 5
6 6
6 6
6
6
6
3 6 6
6
8 3 9 44 6
6 5 6 6
3
6
m
6
6 6 9 6
6 6
8
5
6
6 9 6
6 6 6
6
6
6
:
5 2 22 6 6
6 6
8
2 6
6
6 6
4 9
6
3
6
6
6
9
2
6
2 3
.
6 6 6 6
4
6 0 6 6 6
6 6 lm
6
a N fi fl IN
6 6 6 10 00 0 ]
4 6 6 0 0 00 0 0
w lv
6
6 4 6 6 Fi lfl a dv
6 6 6 6 6 0
4 6 6 6 6 CO
w hy v'l lN
6 6 6 6
6 6 6 6 6
6
6
c
6
6 o 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
4 n 6 6 6 6 6 6 m 6 6 6
6 4 6 6 . 6 6 6 6 6
6
6 6 6 6
6 6 6 6 6
6 3
6
6 6 6 6 6 6 4
5
6
4 4 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
” 6
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 . 6 6 6
4 6 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
4 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
A a6 > 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 4 6 6 6 6 6
M
n ~ 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 4 4 6
6 ” o
6 6 6 6 6 6 6
Q
S
m 6 6 a41 6
u
r 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 4
fi
6 m 6 mI 6 n
6 6 6 4 4 6 4 6 6 4 6 4 4 4 4 4 6 4 4 6 4 6 6 6 6 6 4 6
m a1
7 6 6 6 6 6 4 6 4 4 4 6 4 4 6 6 6 4 4 6 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 4 6
6 m n
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 4 4 6 6 4 6 4 4 4 4 4 6 6 4
G
m I6 .
O
A
/ 4 4 4 4 4 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 4 6 4 6 6
m 6
um v 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 4 6 4 6 6 6 6 4 6 6 4
6 4 u
g
‘
d‘ N N OO N
A T RE A TIS E 0N MILLING A ND MILLING MA C HIN ES
” I4 p a ‘" I
4 p g' N " ‘ I ” La v F i t“ " l Q !
,
a IQ !
“ lfi "
l
N “ wh en”,
4 . m 6 6
.
6 6 m
.
m m w 4
6
6 6
4 6 fl 6 6 A M 6 m6 4 m 6 w m m
4 4 v w 6 m m 6 6 mW 6 m m fl : “
6 64 m 6 6 m 6 6 6 « 6 6 6 N4 6 m m 6
W w w W mw
6 6 O
64 6 6 R 6 6 N
9
6
m m m “
.
64 4 4 6 6 6 N N 6 . 6 ~ a
6 « . AM m 6 6 m . 6 6 M 6 “ mu 6 6 M 6
6 4 T 6 N fi o 6m M 6 m N 6 M fl 6 6 w 6 w N 6
4 4 V 4 v w 64 mm m 6 6 m N 6 N N 6 6 6 ”
.
~ H
.
6
6 6 6 6 m m 6 6 . 6 6 4 6 6 6 " M M 6 w
. 6
mw
6
4 6 c 6 6 o 6 6 o m m M a © 6 4 6 N 6 6 0
3
6 fl
4 4 m 6 6 m 6 mmmm6 . 6 N 6 6 6 N 6 6 ”
.
a fi
I 6
6
4
6
6
6
m
6
m
6
6
6
6
6
6
.
4
6
m
m
m
m
o
m
6
6
6
M
N
6
M
N 6
6
M
6M
M
©
~
6
6
6
6
6
6
“
w
”
wn
.
Q
fl
6
6
.
6
6
fl m w 6
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 m w m 6 m 6 I 6 m . N N M NM
m
6 .
6 4 4 6 6 N O w m u 6 4 v 6 6 h m w 6 6 m C
6
S
w
4 6 6 6 6
6 6 m 6 N N m 6 6 N 6 m % fl 6 6 4 M
m
m
6
6
6
6 6
I 6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
m
N
4 6
4
6
6
6
w
N
N
6
N
N
c
m
6
6
6 6 6
6
6
w
w6
6
fl
6
6 W$ i 4
N
v
0 O
.
6
66 6
o
.
6
4
m
4
SW
6 6 ~
.
6 6 H fi
6 m 6 m 6 m N m6 m
3
6 4 6 . 6 I 6
L
6 6 6
5
6 a 6
@ 6 4 4 6 6 6 m® h 6 m 4 o m6 6 c m v
m N N “
6
N 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 fi H 6 fi 6 fi
m m m .
6 6 m mM m6
6
6
.
N 6 6 6 6 6 6 . 6 6 6 6 . 6
Q
6
u
m
i
6 6 Q 6 6 6 m v 64 N 6 6 “ G
44 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 44 6
m 6 6 6 6 6 6 ”
.
6 : fi J 6 6 ~ 6 6
m 6 6 6 “ 6 m 6 i 6 m “
6
6
. 6 6
. a 6 6
5 6
6 .
m
.
m m w mm A
m
.
6 6 4 6 6 6 a 6 O 6 6 6 6 v 64 6
6 6 . 6 m m m N m6 . m .m
4
6 6 6 6 6 N 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 ” 6
6 6 m 6 6 6 6 6 6 O 6 6 mmh 6 M w 6 6 6 4 v 4 6 M
” m6 6 m
6 6 6 6 6 6 Wm 6 7 mM “
6
. 6 6 « 6 6 l 6 4 6 6. 6 6 66 w 6 .
m6
6
4 6 m a 6 6 m 6 6 6 4
6 6 6 6 “ 0 6 mm 4 m m 6 6 N N 6 6
m6 w 6 m 6 m m W 6 m
6 6 $
6 6 . 6 6
N
6 6 a 6 6 4 6. 6 6
6 6 m 6 6 6 6 e 6 m mm . 06 4 4 4 4 6 m 6 m m N 6 6
W M m
$ 6
. 6 6 N 6 6 6 6 6 66 6 6 . 6 6 6 6 6 n N
M
W 6 6 6 6 6 . 6 4 4 4 4 w v m .
6
6 M m . 6 6 6 6 N 6 6 ”
.
M
6
6
6
6
.
4
6
4
6
64
6
4 W . 6
6
4
6
6
M
m
6
6
.
6
m6
N 6
6
6
M
N
M
N
6
W6 6 6
6 Nm
6
.
6
6
6
m 6 6
a 6 n6
W . 6 m m m m
6
.
6 6 6 6 6
N
6 6 6 6 6
6
6 6 6 . 6
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 fi 6 ~ 6 6 6 6
6 6 6 6 N 4 6
6
4
6
O 6 m6 4 6 m o o 6 M N 6 6 6 6 6 N 6 N
6
6 6
. 6 6 4 6 4 .
6 6 6 6 4 6 6 . w 4 v n n 6 4 6 m 6 6 m 4 mm 6
w w 6 6 mw o m w
4
o 6 6 6 6 6 6
4
4 o 6 6 6 6
4
6
6
.
6
6 6 $ e w
4 4 4 4 n 6 4 o 4 4 v m w . 6 m m . 6 m w
4
6
M Nm6 6
6 4 6 6 N 6 6 N w M M o o M w
4 0
4
6 6
6
m 4
o
.
6
M
6
4 6 4 6 m
6
4 6 4
.
6
6 6 c 6 6 M
” 6 6 M N N4 W w 6 .
6
6 6 6 N
m m M w N N m N M
6
6 6 4 4 4 6
6 6
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 4 4 6
64 . 6 4 6 6 6 4 6 6 m
. 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 e 6 b W
. 6
. 6 6 b 6 M 6
w m m 6 mmm m C
4
6 6 c N 6 4 4
4
6 6 o 6 6 6 6 6 o 6 6
m m m mN o o m
.
w
.
e 6 6 4 6 o o 6 6 6 6 6
. 6 6 4 6 O 6 6
m 6 6 6 m 6 6 6 6 6 M w m6 o m
6 6 6 6 6
6 : 9 6
6 6 1 ~ 6
m
.
“ 6 6 6 6 6 a 6 6 6 6 6 N 6 6 N e 6 6 m . 4 .
340 THE CIN CINNA TI M ILLING MA CHINE C O MPANY
Lead s f ro m . 67 0 to
Le a d D rive n 2d x Wo r m
10 D rive rs l st x S c re w
re re
r r
r r
a a a a
a e
a
e
e e
G G G G G G
e e
e
m m
e
m w w
t
a
t
a w a
t
re
a a a
r
i i i
i r i e r i e
d d d d d r
o ) )
o ) d ) r o ) )
Wv mv mv
) )
e
Wv mv mv Wv mv mv
) e ) )
n n c c n n c
n r e n r r e r
S S S
t t
e e e e
er t t
e e e
v
er er er er er re
r v r
r r v r
r r
n i i i i
n i
e i i i n i
e l i i
—
t o r e r o r r r e r o r
o t f o f o f
D n D n D D D n D n D D D n D n D D
re re
I r I r r ( I (
r
( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( (
a I I a I a
a a a
fi
t e t e e e
s d s d d
G G G
—
G G G
—
l 2 l 2 l 2
—
m w fl
l I I
M
I
-
l I
o
k O
Nh kO
3
8 AO Nfi k- A
g
—
fl O 0 C c
S
o d O
u
r
MO - m
i v
Mfi O
O
3
0
O
8 MQ D
Oh
k
d O o
o w
o qN b-X F
V
u
m
r i r
Mfi M 8 MO a g MO
I O
3
k O Dh hO
t
N5 i
C g
m
h
u
h v r r
-
Nfi Hg fihh ” O
ON N hO a
O 3 J
QN
O
O 0 8 C D-O C h p
- n
b
Mfi MP 8 fiO H w
w qN
’
k kO
CN
5 O O 3 O
0 4 r n O0 g O b
Mfi r
w w
w 1 00 56
—
oR
I
3
x t H 8 28 K0
[ AO g
Nfi
l
xo
r MO O
10 0 w O
O 100 fl
C O g w 64
k
fi
Mfi 9
-
MP - 10 0 w
Q q
-
P OO
g - m
k - 56
m
b r
m
I b
N
3
0 OM
O
100 O
O fl b OO
s
b g
t
r w
O
O
72
Mfi $
-
MP - 86 aB- m Nh 1 00 w
P - 44
m
r
m
i h i
Mfi Dh
C t
0
0 100 h r
b
c A h 0
0 O r
3
w
N
J
64
Mfi KN
I
c N 1 00
o
w
O
O b
c hh
h 10 0 p aA r 48 n
Nfi
I
NN oO
t O 86 w
O
O b
c wN 72 wO
O
40
Nfi O
O O k
uO 100 w
M fl h QK 10 0
b w
t 56
Nfi
1
0 C
)
wA 86 I m O
O fl hH
b
K
86
0
0 N 56
0A
[
3
0A
R
w N 1 00 w B fl
t bO 86 O 72 r
m
F h
ww w
—
64
3 O
0P N
O
- i O 86 a h O 1 00
b O
wg 0 O 0 b
hR -u 1 00 I w
A D
h-
t w N 86
O
O 48
wfi q 0[ wN 8 6 w O
56
J
O b
O
'
O hO 86 kr O r
m nw
b
w 0 w 1 00
3
mO u
O
O h A 1 00
u AO 64
t
ww m m 0 N
.
0
o 64
D O
NH 100
T
bC 1 00 i
O O
u
wm uw O 1 00 w
N
I
fio 8 6
0
0 O 64
m K
p- [
wA OO O ?
uO
O
100 m
A D
C fio 72 HU
C O 64 r
0
0 O
[
NB
C G m P- 1 00 b
0
[u
;
G fi 86m X
H O 72
M fiw 100 M 64
O
Nh- QP- 0 N
0
86 O
O O
fim 100
I b
N O
O GP- 0 N 1 00
3 OJ
C N
I
K MP - 56
m
l
-
I
NO
O O
OO
K
$H 100 M Q O
O ¢ 86 BP - b- 1 00
m 72 m
l
MO MO H
w
O
NN ON
O
86 O O
hO b 40 H
Nh wfi 100 N 72
)
3 O
OR 72 Q
D
b - I
OO
l AC
- W
NP- NO
[ b B 1 00 - NP- O fifi 86
O
O 64
m
t r l i
0 N
0
Q AC 100 fifi 1 00 N 56
)
O
O O
l G
k
fl O
a
cA F w » 1 00 NO O T
O w w 72 ;
4 B
- 72 h
nm m
—
-
1 l
NHR
fio 86 B
-O
O
O Q 100 $ P - 56
am
v n
M O
fio 1 0 0 M . !
44
)
O kp
O O G 86 OO
l
m
p p
N O
O
-
O
O A 1 00 o
O N N fi P
k
86 MC C
48
M w
t
U N 86 N N 64
3
P
h 0 h O 100
h
PO b r
xO
MR
I
NP- I N uO 1 00 0
1
R
- I Q hQ
r 72 i - 44
MO O
O w N 86 3
0 O
( O hO
v 86 OO
C [ 64
O
J
CN O
O
k
uQ 1 00 O
l
O
O Q wN 86 wk H 40
AB r Q w P 1 00 b
- OB
l- i W hO
b 72 hO b 72 DO
-O
l
Mh o
q0[ M“ k HB
t
I
- O o Q hO
h
O
86 hO b 1 00 C O
MB F
I
K a p i 86
O
O N G hO O
100 hW 1 00
T
J
C O
-
b i
O0
[0 qN Ah r 100 M O
C Q hO
b 72 hD
C k 56 kP
b r v
3 42 THE C INC INNATI M ILL IN G MACHIN COMPANY E
Le ads from
WS
to
Le
10
a d D ri v
D rive n
e rs
2d
l st
x
x
o rm
c re w
r
t
r
g a
°
a
e
a
e
0 0 G G
8 o e
e
m w
t
s -
23
t
a .
a r
i
a
a
e
5 8
i
d
3
"
d
23 1 :
r
$2
3 ” ” o ) )
1:
Wv mv mv
e )
a n n r e c r
53 53 4 2 e e S
t t
e e
r
r r v
n
5 : c e
° i i i i
c r r e r o r
“ “ o
e59 E
f
A D CQ , v v
r (
D I
n
(
D n D r
D
(
H I
8 p 8 a
e t
d
a
e
2 291
s
o o G 2 G
III
l
56 40 48 100 O
O m
O U
© w .0
0
72 40 24 64 QN k->
I
b C 32
40 44 64 86 QN aH B
Ah b
56 72
I O
32 28 UO hO b
D
Ch
b
44 QP
l
48
>
64 86 F OO B
-O
-
I
!
86
3
56 32 72 06 ;
4 O Q P i
-
86 72
0 3 3
48 28 0 0 0P I
flD
C
44
D
56 72
1 D
64 O4
?
0 G th r
56
3
40
T 3
32 64 O0 0R
- i
hO
O b
-
72 O 3 3 i-
44 24 56 O 0 0 i
b
b-fi I r
-
40 44 R0 s
72
D
56 H0 p O y
u
C P-
r
48 44 56 86 N3
C 0 0 N
0
AA
64 40 NN
)
72
1
32 0O AO
44 48 56 72 OD
O C h-O O
O M
-
I
72 44 O D
P R
28 64 O G h b
- fiO
-
44 40 56 86 NN
J
P O I O wN
86 40 72 N
ON fiO
O
24 C G
-
64
m
O D
44 28 56 O C
; O
O fiP r
56
U
64 40 48 GP
- I d O
I fiO
86 44 24 64
O
O Q AB - wN
-
I
44 40 48 72 QN b O O aP
u m
b
40 48 64 72 O
OQ ch r O
86 64 72 KM
I
n w O
t at
40 e
72 48 32 64
1
0 9 m
86 44 28 72
0 3
0
n4; m O
u
0 O
48 56 64 72 0
0 0 G$ m O
O
86 N
N AO
)
0 O
64 32 56 C G 0
72
I
NN
1
40 24 56 0 O kO b
64 M0
D
0 N
J
0 0
32 28 72 UO
48 NM
I
Q5-
l
3
40 56 86
‘
J
C 0 1
86 48 28 64 OQ O
l
R
- I
O 3
O5
72
I
40 kO O
)
28 64 KN O 0
[
m
56 64 40 44 WD
’vC
O
O M p m
86 48 32 72 O
O ma a m
64 40 28 56 fim po
U
O
56 64 44 48
I
N mm mw
72 64 40 56 O
O
:
0 ma fic
86 hO h 24 64 A0 0
w
h gfi
m m
I
k
fl O kR
h H
D
C m
. I
K5
3
flN w Q
fi
kG
t
O
hP-
3 OU 0 )
fl O G O 0 OO h-O 0 N
MB
m
b I
k -O fi I -
fl P
-
r
bb O O » K6
3
O
'
O - A P -
-
b
N 3
flO i
N
tO
0 P b e
NN
I
-O
J
[ F
0 C 6
uP
h b
;I p. O3
O$ B
-O
T B
I p t O 0 OG b c h
T RE A TISE ON M ILLING A ND M ILLING MACHINE S 3 43
L ea ds fro m to
Le a
10
d D ri ve n
D rive rs
2d
l st
x
x
WSc o rm
re w
$4 r r
25
r r
“3 a a
‘D e
a e a
a) e e
<5 o G G G G
a) e e
o
m m
e e
w m w
~ 0 0 0
S
t
. 5 3 '
i
a a i
a a
r r i e r i e
o
d d r d d r
) o ) ) o ) )
Wv Wv mv mv Wv mv mv
e ) ) e )
n n n c n c
r e r r e n r
e E m E o /l
C cu e e S e S
t t
e e
t t
e e e
r
r r v r
r r v
n n n
8
i
e e
5
i i i
:
° i i i i i
o
r
8 3 h
o
r r e r
f
o r
o
r r e r o r
D
f
r (
Q
r (
D I
n
(
D n D r D
(
r (
D I
n D
(
n D r D
( I (
a a I a a a
e a Q) e t e t
e e
v d d
f N s s
m
G O G 2 G G 2 G
IIII
. l l
C
m
I
A ?: i
KN Q
t ' D . :
C O
A Afi kO
e A
1 :
"
CA C G O
J
C G fl O
b O O 0O
us
‘
J
C
D
C MO O
AO Oh- I NM O
O
J
N fiP r cu '
I
NR
J
' J
O m A
1
0 O
O
O O QO MO O
AO O DA
C Q
O
ON flQ
C flN QP- b M 0
0 A
h
c
b
O
A -
QH QN
I
B O
Ah AO Q B
-O
0 hB A AO
O hO
‘ )
OC b O 0 N H h
a t v
m
I i I
M KM
D I
GQ QN
D
O O
OO OQ
b D b
O AO
1
0 O hO s
- O
A
C o
I G cP I
M
O J
OO UO
I O
GQ
O
t
OQ AO QO o
o h {k-
y n
flU
C O O hQ h
hO b
flM
O
UQ QO O QN G
k z k
AA d O oP hu O P O
1
' - 0 a O - d
-
b
-O
l
QN M a flN
)
O O k
afi O Q
l
Dh
KN h-O
O
D
o
oN 0
qM
C h O C k “
-
I
T '
NB- flM w w
J I
NN B
n O T U
OO aO
y Ao C Q O -
n OO
-
o
-
w
J D
QOO
fifi O
OQ oP- fi fiP n
t
ZO N o
Qo h-
O O
M
C h C
-
b b
KM
I
AO o
oO
[ fiQ O
OG AO O
Ao hQ w w
N P
m m
r b r
OQ
T
CN
O
Q m aB V
5
0
k-
{
MB Qh nw Q h-O
O
w m
I p
tO
i
w w
w
J
O
flN N
b
0
O G AO Ab 0 O QA Q
m w m
h
-
GQ 0
flN QM 0 O
w
N
J
Q Ap a
-o
N
m
0 D-0 O
m
i i
KN w w
I
AO fi
P
i
qN
B
O k
O 0
T
OR - O G J
Oo x -
m
b I I
OD
OC
0
0 M MO O
O
O
O O
I
J
C
3
6 A
R
o
o k-h 0
00 w3
N flN
m
h
-
I
KN w
I
0$
D 5
k- OD
hO
b
O
O0 Ao ch Q
O
Q
'
G OO P
O
I
b ( r r
NN XO
Q O QO fifi
I
KN
o
o5
9
Ao
o b
c k-
no wO O k
O
n
fl
I
m m
b
O
O MO O
flN O D 3
h o
wN
t
O
OO
Ol O O 0
x
Au u oo Q
Wm nm w
-
OQ QO AO O
fiO DR
C I
I
w0 0
h t O
O
fiO
O
M “N
I
N’A
NN
O O
O
g G o0 fi fiR
)
QR Ao
.
C O O O t 0 O -
m
h I
O
O O MR -
MO O
flN O
O
D
G Q Uo kR
- r
O
O G w
O
O
O Q
m
t h
KM
O O
OO OQ P N
I
D
fiR AO
‘ o
cB fiP
‘ fi
J
C C QO -
J
C - -
m
h
m
I t
MO
t QN w
D
C Q flN O D 1 u O
Q fl
D
O
AB G
'
O C Oc O
m
h l
KN
I
MO O
AO flflk O
O Q Q li
r a r
1
K w O
OQ G Q fiA I
-
NM w w
J
O
N
t
3 k
09 Ao O fiO
‘J O
3
0 0 QO h-
'
-
I
[ OH l -
n I OO
O
Q M D B R
A O 1 7 J
Aw s
Ou
]
K0 w O
O ah
t
O C -H O 00 - ( O
m
I r
\
WU
OC tQ B
I
O -
0
0 0
3 O
O
O
CN Oc
I u O
O
‘:
O aO O
Q fih
m
i p
W
Oa NB- i
hB
r
b NN
I
flN OO
‘
QR- I
O
Ow >
OQ w
R I
-
O
O 0
3
D
C m ON
O
fiO N
C O
D
GQ MO O ND
CG Nw
I
NN fiR r
D
C fi0
m
I
NN N
I O
O
D
QN O o 3 O
OO A 0 s
OQ- QQ
i
oO o5 O O C fi0
m
h
NN C Q
D
w 0
Q»
T D
OHR O D
w
D
XC
U
QO k O
r O 0 OG O G 0 (
-
C
- O
O
Ofi h OQ 0
QA
O
N OG fi l O
fiO
D
k O t ci 0
O G r O
i
h I O fi O
-
KN
O
O Q
3 .
w
M
l‘ I J
0
QC O
s
bO
D
CB AO hP
O '
pp
- u0 OG 0
m m
b u r I
MO w 3 A
NN O
t
NN 0 O Q QCA O Q fiO O
O 1
Q
[ 0 Q O
- s O
QA O OQ
)
O O O R
OQ $O OQ flN
O U
Aa N
‘
OC O I
h L V
-
m
I y
-
AO RO NN
1 3
O O
QQ fiO
]
Qb NP Ao x 0 C - O P
v
r
m
r i
xm
W
KN k-P 0D
I B O J
OO CP fi
x
O
O C ON
O
Ao - v i r O G 1 C Q
MO
D
KN ON
O 5 B
AO hO
I O
O
N
»
fiO
)
1 3 O
0 6 Bo o
- CP- O C 0
-
d
m ®
i h t
QP qs N
O O :
OG Q
3
O
u
QO fifi
t
AP
0 3
0 6 r oc ( O r 0
Mw u W
NN w
I
A ae
hv o o
qN OO
O
OO th O )
0$
3
c J i r O N
-O
I
! ") !
xs OD
RN
I
UO
k T
D h
R fi o
ko o g
“
0C V b b
l
t
sO ' us OC 0 C fi
0 D
0 C MO o
0
0
N
fin
O“
O
OO AO Qfi qo
t
O
O O $ O
O fi w
N
3 44 THE C INC INNATI M ILLIN G MACHINE COM PANY
Le ads from
WS
to
Le a
10
d D r ive n
D ri ve rs
2d
l st
x
x
or
cre w
m
r r
5
r r
g a
e
a
a
e
a
8
e e
O G G G G
8 a) e e
m
e
m
e
E 13 B i
a a w
e
i
a
a w
e
r i r i
o
d d r d
d r
) ) o ) )
Wv mv mv Wv mv mv
) )
e c e )
c
n
3 5
n n
g 5 n
e e
E 23
r
w 33 r r r
e S e S
t t
e e e
t t
e e e
-
H
- g g r
r r v r
r r v
n n
g g e e
: z
i i i i i i i
z z
' i
o r r e r o r r r e r o r
o o
3
f f
8 £ 38 H D D D D D D
“
Q v
Q
v r ( I
n
(
n
(
r (
r ( I
n
(
n D r D
(
I I
8 8
a
e t
a
e
a
e t
a
e
29.
” s d d
L
s
c: o G 2 G G G
IIII III
2
. l l
72 NN MO MD
J D
O k- O hO O D- O
40 44 32
5 ;
l
I O b O O C 0 A O
-
u
86 48 56 40 OP b
- [B
0 - t OC
T
D O
h-O l Nto M O
O 64 k
fl O
MP
w
O D k- O
86
b B
72 44 h GP O hO
t
56
1
}
O C -H - H OO - O O h
N
i
-
i
64 44 56 32 O
OO h p
O
O C
fl C ON
O O
O O MO
O b u
O
l
h>
QN flD O
86 ON N
J
O
b
28 40 48 O C C O Q fiO C 41
72 O D
NN QN MQ
J
b
P R )
> A
56 64 32 O C I GH C4 b
D
OP
flD O E
Q0[ w
t
O k
86 48 64 44 u o QA
t
- O C C OO
-
i
72 40 0 )
flN Ao O
Q MO O
J 3
O
44 64
w fi
:
0 0 O O 0
-k
mu NN MO wN
3
; O
72 0 7
tB
1
48 56 32 0 C - I
O L 0 o
0 m hB
t
NM w MQ
I
O
OO
; k Dh o 1
86 28 48 56 4 “ C o h h -
m
r b
O
Q Qh o O
O Q MO
O
NN
)
k kO
64 28 56 48 O N4 o fi O
m
m
b
-
D MO MQ T
D
O O AO O kO
86 28 56 64 OC Q O O O O fi r fl O
-
QM M P
J
k
72 Q Qk Ao
J
O O
40 48 32 fiO
'
O N O I Cfi
- -
86 28 64 72 Qt N- P
C
N‘J
O nh y r
O
O
‘J
O AO Nw wN
-
l
-
86 44 56 40 O h k N3 o
w O
Q MO O
Ofi k
O
t
O 0 b
I
I - C 0 c O
72 N5 MO
D
O
O G MR Mc
b
O
48 CB h-O
9 O
24 44 - I i r fl O
I
M O
MO
O
QN
t
O O Q
3 1
O b
86 56 72 40 O 0 0 KO
[ O
N0[ N N
QN MO
O
GP N
c
Q
86 28 40 44 C AO F
-
M MP ‘A
e
O
G- ND
OO fi
3
0 O
64 40 56 32 0 0 O I C C b O P P
I
O
OQ MO
O
Q N
I
0 Q-O
72 28 48 44 9 QQ O ‘
0 K I l C
J
86 28 44 48 0
0
3
0
O
QO OQ I wN OO
O
MO
O I
NN k
fl O
72 no QO QP- wN O
O O Mh OQ
D
fiO
J
44 56 32
n
I r F
86 48 64 40 o
o o MO
O 0
A0 h-O O
OG Mh r
I
KN fiQ
q m NO
i
64 28 56 44 O )
GP P
hP
- p b
I
NM Nh
}
r OP- I w N
86 48 72 44 O
O9 QO OC
T D 3
0 N O
O O M 0
0
DB
C F wM
-
72 28 64 56
I
K5
9
NP OQ
T
$ B- O O
O
M$ C
N
Q wN
q m fiO
h t
86 40 44 32 O3
O0 b-h- DP
C-
0
0 N
O
O O NB-
qm w
I i l I
86 24 40 48 O3
O0 M k
I
AP 5-O 0
0 Q M O
O N
am w
h P
m
i
MO
O
QN Q 0
0 Q Mk
M
J
3
72 48 64 32 X
C 0 fl
QP AO 0
0 G Mb qw w N
J
t
9
k O
86 64 72 32 R5 i
b D v
QN
3 D )
O O
86 56 64 32 O 6 I
-O A
C N
34 6 THE C INC INNATI M ILLIN G MAC HINE COM PANY
with the proper change gear combinations that involves mathe
mati es which is sometimes too confusing for the toolmaker
I
.
n the tables following all the information is given and it ,
only remains for the milling machine operator to select the lead O f
the desired cam from the tables and s et up to the corresponding
change gears and angles
E
.
xample : TO set the machine for a c am having 7 1 7 lead ”
Se g A c R
. .
t t in th e Ver t i ca l t ta h m en t
. ead the angle direct from
the dial and set the spindle from its vertical position
Se g g He Subtr ct the angle in the table
'
t t in th e Dv a
i idin ad.
from The difference represents the angle to which the spindle

must be raised from the hori z ontal position .
°
50
S
90 39
/f
o
1 1
/3 .
et the dividing head spindle up from the hori z ontal

position This angle is read direct from the dial
. .
Follow this same method when setting up for any other similar
cams .
A T EA ISE O N M ILLING
R T AND M ILLING MACHINE S 3 47
T HE C INC INNATI M ILLIN G M AC HINE COM PANY
T HE C INC INNATI M ILLIN G M ACHINE COM PANY
A T EA ISE ON M ILLING
R T AND M ILLIN G MACHINE S 3 51
3 52 T HE C INC INNATI M ILLIN G M ACHINE COM PANY
3 54 T HE C INC INNAT I M ILLIN G M AC HINE COM PANY
R T A ND M ILLING MACHINE S 3 55
3 56 T HE C INC INNATI M ILLIN G M AC HINE COM PANY
R T AND M ILLING M ACHINE S 3 59
3 60 T HE C INC INNATI M ILLING M AC HINE COM PANY
3 62 T HE C INC INNATI M ILLIN G M AC HINE COM PA NY
R T A ND M ILLING M ACHINE S 3 63
3 66 T HE C INC INNATI M ILLIN G MAC HINE COM PANY
3 68 T HE C INC INNATI M ILLI G M AC HINE COM PANY
N
3 72 T HE C INC NNAT I M ILLIN G M AC HINE COM PANY
I
T HE C INC INNATI M ILLING MAC HINE COM PANY
R T A ND M ILLING M ACHINE S 375
3 76 T HE C INC INNATI M ILLING MAC HINE COM PANY
378 T HE C INC INNAT I M ILLIN G M AC HINE COM PANY
R T AN D M ILLING M ACHINE S 3 79
A T EA ISE M ILLING
R T ON A ND M ILLING M ACHINE S 3 83
In stru ctio n s f o r U sin g Ca m -

M i ll i n g
At t a ch m e n t
SPINDLE
a t ri g ht
l l f c hca
Fo r m i i n g
ang es
a e
to t
m s the a t ta
i s p os i t i o n .
ch m e nt is
Fi g
set as s
. 268
h o w lu
n in i s t r a t io n . For c yl in d ic l c
r a a m s i t is s et
E
A
The attachment consists of a head stock mounted on the ,
slide C having its ways in the bed plate

, which is bolted to the ,
table O f the machine The work spindle is driven through worms

G
.
and w o rm w h e e l by a belt from a separate countershaft running

on pulley P There is also provision for applying a crank for hand
.
feeding .
P ower feed is recommended because it gives a more even motion

than can be O btained by hand The work spindle is left large S O .
it can be turned down to suit the master cam and the blanks O f the
cams being milled .
The attachment is se t up follows :

Secure the master cam to the work spindle
as
to engage the
R
s o as
roller which is located on a bracket fixed to the base plate The

,
.
slide C is held in working engagement with this roller by the weight

W The weight regularly furnished is heavy enough for only the
.
lightest work ; when heavy milling is to be done su fficient weight ,
must be added .
3 84 T HE C INC INNATI M ILLIN G MAC HINE COM PANY
The table O f the machine m us t be adj usted ve rtically to bring
the c enter O f the roller on the same horizontal plane with the center
O f the cutter .
A
The cam being milled is mounted on the work spindle as S hown .
S the spindle revolves it follows that a revolving motion is imparted

,
to the cam being milled and in combination with this revolving

,
A I
motion there is also a lateral movement caused by the master c am
rolling against the roller which is fixed to the base R ,
f the .
master c am is properly constructed the resulting cam will be satis

factory .
When cams are cut out O f S olid stock a roughing cut should be ,
taken first leaving a small amount for finishing

FINISHING CUTTER US ALWAYS
.
,
LLE W I H WHI C H
THE SA E IA E E M BE THE M M
FINISHE
T D T R
A S THE RO R SHALL
T THE D CAM W O RK .
Th eM s e m I n case it found preferable to use for

a t r Ca . is
the master cam a cam which is exactly like and the same size the
cam to be made the roller R must be the same diameter
as
, the as
I
finishing cutter .
n general the master cam S hould be larger than the cam being
R
,
I
milled and the roller
, should be as large in diameter as possible .
n laying out such a master cam decide upon a S ize for the roller
R T
,
W W
( which may be any convenient size ) and then LAY OU T HE ,
W W V W
MAS TE R CAM CO NSI DE RING IT AS A CAM
,
HI C H HEN O PE RA TING ,
IN CO NNE CTI O N I TH THIS RO LLE R ILL HA E THE SAME TH RO

T M TM
,
A ND HE S A E I E A S the cam being made .
These instructions hold for both fa c e and cylindrical cams .

THE C INC INNATI M ILLIN G M AC HINE COM PANY
O w l‘ O W V M N b- O
2
‘
mm
v n
n n
m
o o
.
u
.
v n N u
o n e
ww ww
u
0
m H
o o o o
.
u
. . .
ou
m
0
.
0 w
v n c
0 0
m
o o
.
o o
u
mv
o 0 s
o o n
.
n
om
.
mw
u
mmN m m m m
o o
. .
o
.
o o
.
m ou
« g
u
a
n
o
o 0m “ n
wo 0 a m
w m m mm
mmu mm
o o
.
o o
.
o
m
u
v mN u
w n o mo w a v fl o mo 0 u m m
v v v m m m mo o o n n n n w w w
m m m m m m mmm mm mm m m m m
o
.
o o o o o o
.
o 0
.
w w n w m v
o o o o o o o o o o o o
. . .
mN
. .
H
.
o o 0 0
.
~
0
~
m
0
~
.
8
8 .
“ o
0
0
N
m v mm m H o 0 m
m mw u v
o o o o o o c
. .
o mm w
. .
c mmn n ~
e u o mo
.
0
o o o u a _ m m ~ m m mm v w v v
m mmm mm fl n n mmm mm mm m
.
n n .
o o o o
.
ou
.
o o
.
o o o o
. .
o o o o o o o o o o o o o
m0 v m mH n “ © mm “ m mm m
w w mmH m m m« 0
mm 0m 0m m
“ 0 0 0 4 “ “ 0 0 0 “ 0 h o e u 0 0 0 0 0 0
2 RE 0 ~
m0 w m m0 0 0 m 0 0 o 0 o o 0 m w mm m m m v v 0 0 v 0 v 4 v v 0
8
0 0 ~ 0 0 0 B 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 a8
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0
.
0
.
0 0
.
0
.
0
.
0 0
.
0
.
0
.
0 0
.
m0
. . .
0
.
0
.
0
.
0 0
.
0
.
0 0 0
.
0
.
0
.
0
.
0
.
0
.
0
.
0 0 0
.
0
.
0
.
0 0
.
0
.
0
.
0
.
0 0
.
0
.
0
.
0
.
0 0 0
.
0 0 0
O
A T REATI SE O N M ILLIN G AND M ILLING MAC HINES 3 87
T HE C INC INNATI M ILLIN G MAC HINE COM PANY
R T AND M ILLING M ACHINE S 391
O O fiw N Q
lO fi
'
V V ‘
W
T V g n
f‘ )
w
-
aM
4 o
”)
aoo
g N
h
N g
x
NNNNNN
m-
r M N s
M M M M M M M M M M
s
A
—
n
A T REA TISE O N M ILLIN G A ND M ILLING M ACHINE S 395
T HE C INC INNAT I M ILLIN G M AC HINE COM PANY
PHE
r
CIN CINNATI MILLING MA CHINE C O MPANY
A T REA TISE O N M ILLIN G A ND M ILLING M ACHINE S 3 99
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0
3
0
3
0 0
0 0 0 0
0
3 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0: 0 0 . 0 0 0 0 0 0 . 0 . 0 0
.
THE C INC INNATI M ILLIN G M AC HINE COM PANY
c e
c
ou
c mo
0 w w
uo p
o
a
c
v
m
w
q
a mm
v m m
o
N
a
u
m
fi m o e e c o o e o o e
u
u
“ ~ “ m u u u “ ~ u m u
o . . . . . . . . . .
U u
n n h
x o
n
n n
.
u
n m m
m
a
n
.
x
~
w w
O
u B o
w
m M m m mmmmmm
n F
.
n
0
c
o
n
.
0
v
©
n
0
~
o
n
o
_
©
n
.
0
0
mm
»
o
h
n »
5
m
.
u
a
B
H
L
m
n n n
n
.
H
0
v
n n
N
u
fi
.
~
m
v
mm
h
.
m
n _
v
n
~
q
w
n
.
m mmm
0
m
n m m
n m m m
n n
.
fi m mn mn
h h
n
n v
~
.
0
~
u
«
m m
a
»
.
«
a
n
»
w
n
~
m
_
m
m m
m m n m »n m
0
.
n
.
n
0
u
h
.
>
~
n
.
L ~
0 o 0 o o o 0
402 THE C INC INNAT I M ILLIN G MAC HINE COMPANY
Ta b l e Of D e cim a l Eq u i va l e n ts Of Fr a c t i o n s Of an In ch
64ths . 64 th s .
. 0 3 12 5 . 0 1562 5
. 09375
. 1 5 62 5
. ZI R75 . 1 09 3 7 5
. 28 125
. 3 43 75 . 67 1 875
. 2 03 1 2 5
1 6th s . 2 3 4375
. 53 12 5 . 2 6562 5
. 59375 . 2968 75
. 65 6 25 . 3 28 1 25
. 4 3 75 . 7 1 8 75 . . 35 93 75 . 85 9 3 75
. 5 62 5 . 78 1 2 5 . 3 906 2 5
. 84375 . 4 2 1 8 75
. 9062 5 . 9 53 12 5
. 968 75 . 98 43 75
I N DE X 403
I N DE X
ckforI ndexing A tta chment T able Ra
ura c y of D i v iding H eads
A
Acc R a c k Milling A tta c hments

,
for Flanging T hreaded S pin

2 66
A dapters S lotting Atta c hments

,
61
,
28
S A c
,
28
A dj ustment
dle E nds
Care and E re c tion of U c c
,
82 piral Milling tta hments
Milling M a c hines v
,
26
c
,
nder utting Atta hments

A djusting Knee S addle and T a b le r
,
25
V c c
41
,
Un ,
ersal Milling Atta hments i 27
V ises A ll
e ti al Milling Atta hments
,
the S pindle w v T
,
g 27
Bearings
V P S
44 ,
S te el 3 3
C are of the M a c hine k

,
,
d j us t i n g ises ,43
lain i el and ool
A c
, ,
ma 46 er s
CC hanging
32
S pindle S peeds
,
Changing Feeds 45 utomati Clamping and R eleasing

,
r
,
A c
Fixtures 44 1 9 5- 2 3 0
E re c tion
,
ountershaft
A c
,
41 utomati ndexing Fixtu es
H igh P o w er M a c hines
,
I 237
A c
41
,
utomati Millers 35
OO iling
,
,
42
perating L e v ers
42
utomati ,
R eleasing Fixtures , 229
ORremo
,
44
v ing the S pindle Be v el Gears C omputations for

,
dering R epairs 47
S peedcompute
,
43 2 73
C utting Be v el Gea r s on a Miller

,
of Countershaft to
, ,
C omputing the off set Ho w
use the T a b le Cross and V er

2 84
Formulas for Be v el Gea r

-
,
,
42 2 78
ti c al Feeds
,
,
TO C al cu
AA ngles utside D iamete r of Blan k

,
44
and L eads for S pirals T a b le

, l a t i o ns , 2 8 7
ddendum , 249
S
S ele c ting the Cutter
etting the M a c hine
O , 277
L eads and C hange Gears for

2 77
A nglesCutting T he S ha e of the T ooth

,
of
338
,
2 82
S T
,
,
278
A ngles LeadsS piral

,
piral E nd Mills ooth E , 170 e m e nts , 2 80

,
, and Change Gears for

Milling C utters C
g
ut t i ng
AnglesCutting Leads and Change Gears for C am Milling A tta c hment

,
7o
AAngular
,
Tw ist rills C
C
D ams S piral Milling
are E re c tion and Adj ustment of
337 345
, 3 0 - 3 83
I ndexing T a b le for Milling M a c hines A

, , ,
ngular ndexing
I 3 19
AArrbb ors
, , l
329 dj ust ( se e
C arried in S to c k Change Gears for Cutting S pirals
, ,
ors82 ment ) 41
AArrbb ororsE Ke q uipment fo r Millers A ppli c ation of C ontinued Fra c tions
, ,
, , 84 , , 332
86
AArrbb ors Method of D ri v ing

,
y
y w ays for 82 83to 3 34
ors P roper A rrangement of S up L eads Change Gears and A ngles

, , ,
, Change Gear R atio , 80 , 332
AAtta
r or S uppor s L eads Change Gears and A ngles
, , ,
ports and Cutters on 78 79 3 11
c hments Milling M a c hine

,
b 77
CC iramcularMilling
t
A tta c hments
, ,
for Cutting S piral E nd Mills 23
Milling A tta c hment L eads Change Gears and A ngles

, , ,
30 170
DD riivviding for C utting S piral Milling C ut

,
s, 30
ing Me c hanism
,
H eads 56
H igh S peed Atta c hment L eads Change Gears and A ngles

,
ters
25 170
I ndex H eads C om b ination for Cutting Tw ist D rills

, ,
26
ndexing A tta c hments H igh N um L eads T a b le of

, ,
24
bPumps
337
Pla cing
, , ,
I to 340 3 44
c
, , ,
er2 4-66 Change Gears on the M a

R a c k I ndex ng Atta c hments
,
O il , 3 1 hine , 336
i Chattering C auses of , 28 , , 87
404 I N DE X
C c Sz
Chattering R emedies for 8 9 w
R ene ing Worm 1 7 6
k
S etting of M a c hine M a k ing
, , ,
hip I nfluen e of i e of on Life o f R esetting Wor to 7 0

S
, , ,
Cutter 1 2 4 for
CC c P c c
1 67
S ide Mills D esign of

,
Chips from H igh peed Milling 1 3 4 S hell

,
E nd Mills esign of D 155
SS olid Mills T heir C onstru c tion

, , ,
hordal it h 2 4 8 1 54
C c PD cv c peeds of see under S peeds

, , ,
ir ular Milling Atta hment 2 9 14 0
S piral Mills Corre c t D esign of

, , ,
ir ular it h 2 4 8 2 50 ( ) 1 76
C utters S a w s S lotting
-
S plining
, ,
C l am l i l g e i es for Fixtures 2 1 0 to , 14 3
Cutters et c D esign of
é
Classi c ation of Milling M a c hines
, ,
zl
CColumn
learan c e for Cutters T ablemaofkingLeads Angles et c for
, ,
fi 7 1 60
and Knee Constru c tion

, , .
, ,
176
C ontinued Fra c tions T ableM aofkingLeadsS piralAngles et c for

, , , .
,
13 E nd Mills 170
A ngular ndexing T a b les

, ,
3 1 9- 3 2 0
to A ngula r I ndexing TT ests on Fa c e Mills

, , , .
,
I , 329 Mills 1 70
ests on S piral Milling Cutters

,
A p pl i c at i o n 151
Appli cationfotor Cutting

, ,
zgl b
S pi r als TwentAcytionFivofe D egree S piral Angle

,
Computing Change 14 6 to 1 50
9e
326
Gea r ing a L athe for When C orre c tl y S harpened

6 -
A ppliMetri
c ationc Ttohreads
, ,
{3 144
S pa ced T eeth I nfluen ce of

,
1 76
Greatest Common D i v isor

,
325 Wi d e
CC utting B e v el Gears on the Miller
-
, , ,
320 l 47
Control Central z ed utting C apa c it y of a iller

,
Continuous Milling and 1 92 226 2 78
C oolant Use of on Cutters see S tream Cutting S peeds E xperiments on

, ,
i , 17 M 1 83
Lu br i c ation S P cc
, ,
( 12 7
Cose c ants T a b le of
, , , ,
) 12 5 Cutting S peeds afe ra ti al 1 10
Cosines T a b le of S
, , ,
to , 3 86 4 00 and 1 2 0
CCutotangents T a b le of
,
to 3 86 400 Cutting piral Gears on the Miller 2 9 3

R elation of S i z e of and Feed to
, ,
Cutting S pur Gears on the Miller 2 5 3

,
to , 3 86 400
E fi c ien c y
, ,
C u t t i n g Worm Gears on the Miller
Cutter and Wor k Cooling S y stem see

, , ,
f 1 52 g1 5
z
S tream L u b ri c ation D
,
(
Cutter A r b o r s D e cimal E q ui v alents of Fra c tions
) 125
Cutte r S harpening an I n c h T a b le of
,
84 8 5
C utters
-
of
D e cimT abl leEofquivalents of Millimeters

,
, 1 72
Action of
4 02
Milling , 140
, ,
c DD edendum
,
92 a ,
,
401
C apa it y of When Milling C ast
iametral P it c h
,
S
249
DD iivviding
,
I ron 1 8 4
H ead Acc ura c y of
,
,
2 48
C a p a ci t y of When M illing teel ,
r T b
61
D ividing H ead H o w to S et Up
, ,
, ,
l 83
c D T
For Cutting Gea s a le of 2 5 2 iding H ead C are of , , 64
for
D ividing
‘
, ,
E ff e t of too man y eeth 14 2 ,
T
I ndexing a Gear
cc
66
fo r Ina cc urate I ndexing

,
E nd Mills esign of 1 52 H eads C auses and Remed y

,
D DD iivviding H eads U ni v ersal

, ,
Fa e Mills Cutting ests on 1 5 1 ,
C D
, ,
65
Fa e Mills esign of 1 5 6 ,
DS z
56
c U DD ririvveses forM otorArb ors

, ,
Form utters esign of 1 62 , ,

isor Greatest Common
, ,
320
H eli al Mills esign and se of 1 62 ,
80
,
D rivting
, ,
I n fl u n c e of i e of Chip on L ife of
ing Me c hanism S piral Cut
,
Ke y w a y s for
z 19
,
,
l2
,
f or
8 2 83 -
,
25
L ife When Milling C ast Iron
h
,
M ethod of D ri v ing Fa c e Mills

0 ,
R elation S i z e of Cut and

124
N i c k ed T eeth
E 80
Proper Arrangement on Arb ors E nd Feed

,
14 3 E ffi ci e n cy , of
Mills D esign of
,
to 1 52
PRrope r Clearan c e E nd Mills Feeds and S peeds Cur v es

, ,
7 8- 79 1 52
a k e o r Under Cut T eeth

, ,
1 76
en c e of E nd Mills S harpening
, , ,
for In fl u 116
R elation of S i z e of Cut and Feed to E q ui v alents D e c imal of Fra c tions O f

-
, ,
to 14 7 1 51 1 77
E f c ien c y an n c h
, , ,
, ,
fi , 1 52 I , 4 02
4 06 I NDE X
Gears Worm R ules and Formulas A Tb

Leads ngles and Change Gears for
C
, , ,
f o r , 3 12 , 3 1 3 S pirals a le of 3 3 8 3 3 9
Tw D
, , ,
Worm Gears Cutting on the Mil L eads hange Gears and Angles for
Ck
, , ,
ler 3 1 5 Cutting ist rills 3 3 7

bbz
, ,
Worm Gears Gashing 3 1 5 Leads hange Gears and Angles for

Ck S
, , ,
Worm Gears H o ing 3 1 7 , , M a ing S piral M ills 1 7 0 ,
Worm Gears S i ing and Cutting Leads hange Gears and Angles for
CS P TC b
, ,
( see Worm Gears ) 3 1 0 , M a ing piral E nd Mills 1 7 0 ,
Grinding Milling utters roperl y Leads a le of 3 4 0 to 3 4 4

b cb c S
, ,
( see Cutter harpening ) 1 7 6 , Life o f utters Milling C ast Iron 1 2 2 ,
Lu ri ation of Cutters ( see tream

Lu ri ation ) 1 2 5
C b
,
H eads om ination 2 2 2 3 M
H eads lain 2 3
,
PS
H eads Gear Cutting 2 2 2 3
,
,
,
c c
M aintenan e Cost of Fixtures 1 99
cP c D c q v
,
M anufa turing Millers 7 3 5 3 8

Uv Dv
, ,
H eads piral 2 3
, , Metri it hes 2 60
, , ,
H eads ni ersal I ndexing and i id

cA A
,
Millimeters e imal E ui alents

O b
, of ,
ing 5 6
P c
,
in I n hes 4 0 1
Tc
,
H eat Generation f y Cutting M ill i g n nal y sis of the ro ess

,
T
of ,
g
, ,
ools 1 2 5
Automati c
,
, l
H eli al Mills Cutting ests on 1 4 7 Clamping and R eleasing
c D CHontinuous
, ,
to 1 50 Fixtures
b
195
A c ori z ontal M a c hine U sing a S tring

H eli al Mills esign of 1 62 , , Milling and
,
1 92 226
H igh N um er I ndexing tt a hment ,
A c H ori z ontal M a c hine U sing

,
2 4 and 6 6
,
bb
Ji g , 1 8 8
H igh S peed Milling tta hment 2 6
H o ing Worm Wheels 3 1 7 ,
,
V
H ori z ontal M a c hine Using Tw o
ise 1 87
, O ne
V
,
I nfluen c e D iameter of Fa c e Mill

,
ises 188
P v
,
of
wer ReBetquired
PRoelation
,
I ndex H eads lain 2 2 1 92
AA c w een Fa c e Milling and

, ,
I ndex H eads Uni ersal 5 6 to D O , 1 82
b
, ,
I ndexing ngular 3 1 9
Re v olution M ar k s
,
I ndexing tta hment H igh N um er S piral Milling

,
1 90
TT hehe AAction of a Fa c e Mill

, , ,
2 4 and 6 6 95
cc c A c a S ide Mill
,
I ndexing C auses of and R emedies for 97
c TT heoothA cMtionarks a S piral Mill

, ,
I na ura ies 5 5 ,
tion of , 99
I ndexing Fixtures utomati 2 3 7 of 92
w SC c VVerti
, , ,
I ndexing Fixtures H and 2 3 2 to 2 3 7 95
c al Milling w ith V
, , ,
I ndexing H o to al ulate 6 8 arious Methods of 1 86
V erti c al Milling w ith T w o V ises

, , ,
I ndexing Ho w to et up for 66 ise O ne 1 89
T b M illing C ontinuous
, , ,
I ndexing M ethods E mplo y ed 6 7 190
P c C
, , ,
I ndexing a les 7 2 to 7 6 and 1 92 226
ing C ast Iron

,
utters L ife
, ,
I ndex lates Uses o f N ot hes in 7 0

,
M illing When Mill of ,
illing Cutters S peeds

, , ,
122
Milling M a c hines
,
M of , 1 04
Automati c
,
CC olumn
:
S tring 35
entrali z ed C ontrol
Ji g , , 188 ,
, 13
17
w ri v e Gears
,
etails of to
S D 9 19
E re c tion C are and A dj ustment

,
Ke y a y Milling peeds and Feeds D 10
w Ab
,
,
of ,
for 1 1 8 ,
Ke y a y s for Cutters and r ors

,
41
8 2 and 83
, ,
Feed Gears 1 3 ,
Feeds 1 0 1
cP O
,
L Knee 1 3
S w
,
M anufa turing 7 3 5 3 8
P
, ,
N ames of arts f 4 8 to
,
Lead of a piral Gear H o ,

to Com , 53
pute 2 9 9 ,
lain 9 ,
I N DE X 407
SS etting
addle 13 P umpsc ation ‘
O il ( see also S tream L u br i
STeleabcletion of
, ,
Up , 77 ) 31
,
TUniumvbersal
,
13
Q
ck T raverse and R eturn
,
ler 11
V erti c al a nd
,
, 55
Qui 18
Milling M a c hines Classi c ation of

,
7 21
Mitre Gears see Be v el Gears

,
fi 7
M odule P it c hes
, ,
cckk
( ) 2 73
M otor Dr i v es A c
,
2 60
A c
R a I ndexing tta hment 2 8
,
cktingT b to r
19 ,
R a Milling tta hment 2 8

,
R a s a les fo I ndexing and Cut

R a k e or U nder c ut V alue of
,
2 62 2 66
P arts of Milling M a chines

,
N ames of , in Cut
ters 147
c ndex P late Uses of

,
48to 5 3 R e ci j n o c a l
,
Milling Fixtures 197 and

N ot hed I
A c
,
, , 71 zé 7
R eleasing Fixtures utomati 22 9
R epairs I nstru tions for O rdering 4 7 ck , ,
v k
,
O ilingP umps see also S tream

,
R esetting Wor to the Cutter 7 1 ,
42 R e olution M ar s 9 5 ,
c Milling Fixtures
,
O il ( L ubr i R o t a y C o n t i n u o us
g
O rdering R epairs nstru ctions for
,
“
ation ) 31 2G
R oughing Cuts in C ast I ron
S
,
, I , 47 , 111
R oughing Cuts i n teel 1 1 6 ,
P artsNofamesMillingtoM a chines and T heir SS eaddle and T a b le C onstru c tion

PP ititcchh Cir C hordal c ants T a b le of
48 53 13
c SS eleetting
ctionupofthea Miller
, ,
248 to 3 86 400
PP itit cchh D iameter M a c hine

, , , ,
ular and 24 8 2 50 , 8
SS harpening
, ,
D S pur Gears 24 9 77
PPitit cchh MModuleetri c Fa c e M ills

, ,
harpening E nd Mills
, ,
iametral 248 , 1 77
S harpening Gear C utters

, ,
2 60 , 1 78
P it ches Comparati v e T a b le of Cir

, ,
, 2 60 , 179
and D iametral S harpeningto Milling Cutters Properl y

S harpening H and Reamers
,
, 1 77
PPlate
lain Milling M a c hines
,
c ul ar 2 60
I ndex U se of N ot c hes in SS harpening S

, ,
7 9 1 72 176
PP oo wwerer Reuiqckuired
T ravtoersedoandMilling hop T rigonometr y Be v el Gears
-
,
71 piral Mills to 1 72 176
A ppliBceation to a S hop P ro b lem

, , , ,
Q R eturn 18 2 67
C apa c it y of Cutters v
, , ,
1 82
DT hee nition of S ine et c

, ,
Milling f or el Gears 2 73
Cutting C apa c it y of a M a c hine in R ight A ngle T riangle

,
C ast Iron 1 84 fi 2 69
Cu b i c I n c hes T ables
.
, , ,
2 67
H o w to Compute the P w er of a
,
1 83 T ri g m etr i c How to Use

Cone D ri v en M a c hine T rigonometr
n
g7g
y E xpressed as P ro
, , ,
to Compute the P o w er of a
o
1 82
H igh P o w er S ingle P ulle y M a

-
SSide Mill Ac tion of

,
HO W portion 2 70
c ines T a b le
,
99
O thertionFa ctors Go verning P rodu c

-
S lotting A tta c hment

, ,
hine 1 83 to O f , 3 86 400
S peed C hanging
, ,
, 28
P ra cti candal Cutting S peeds S afe

, 1 84
1 10 S peeds
Conditions D etermining P roper
of Milling Cutters
, 44
104
PPressure A ngles of Gear T eeth S

, , ,
120
ro c ess of Milling an Anal y sis of E nd Mills Cur v es for

251 peed 106
Fa c Milling in Cast ron Cur v es

, ,
1 14
PProdu c tion nfluen c e of S peed on

, , ,
the 91 I
roportion T rigonometr y E xpressed Fa c e Milling S teel Ca tings C ur v es

, e ,
, I , 107 f or , 1 1 6
, s ,
as , 2 70 for , 1 17
40 8 I N DE X
Finishing C ast Iron ith piral

CC v w S S
Cutters f o r C utti n g Gears a le f Tb O
CC
'
Mills ur es for 1 1 3 tandard 2 5 2

c P c
, , ,
H eating auses of 1 0 4 utting Gears o n the Miller 2 5 3

D b PT c
,
utting L arge Gears 2 55

, ,
I nfluen e o f S peed on rodu tion

Key w a y Cutting Cur v es for
, ,
iametral it h 2 4 8
OP c D D
107
Life of C utter I nfluen c e of S i z e

,
118 N um er of eeth 2 4 9
C hip
, , ,
of utside iameter 2 5 0
C w C P c C D v Tb
, ,
on, 124 it h iameter 2 4 9 ,
Life of utters hen Milling ast it hes omparati e a le of Cir

O cC w c P ck T Ab C
,
Iron 1 2 2 ,
c ul a r and iametral 2 6 0 ,
ther Fa tors hi h D e t er m l n e ressure ngles 2 5 1

w S
,
Life o f utters 1 2 1 R a s a le for utting 2 62 to 2 6 6

C v S
, , ,
R oughing C ast Iron ith piral Rules and Formulas f o r D imensions

S P cc
Mills ur es f o r 1 1 1 ,
afe ra ti al S peeds f o r utters C ,
S c of pur Gears 2 57
c
ele ting the Cutter 2 5 2
,
S v ST b T P
, ,
S etting the M a hine 2 5 4

,
1 1 0 and 1 2 0 ,
piral Milling in C ast Iron Cur es harpening Gear Cutters 1 7 9

S S v
, ,
for 1 1 1 a le o f ooth arts 2 5 6

SS c
,
S piral H eads 2 0 and 5 6

,
piral Milling in teel Cur es for

pindle D ri v e
SS pindle bc k
, , ,
1 16 piral Milling Atta hment 2 6 ,
tream Lu ri ation Cutter and Wor

vC
10
S pindle E nds Flanges for T hreaded A cc

,
Cooling 1 2 5
,
E nd Flanged 80 ,
, ,
ppli ation to H ea y uts 1 3 9 ,
Appli ation to Light Finishi n g Cuts

S pindle I nstru c tions A
, ,
81
nstru c tions for R emo v ing

,
SS pindle
139
C
dj usting for 43
Chips from H igh S peed Milling 1 3 4
piral C ams
, ,
I
S
43 ,
utter H oods 1 3 7 1 3 8
C utting C hange Gears for
, ,
SS piral 345
, ,
peeds E xperiments on
piral Gear C utting
C utt i ng
bc
,
c A
, ,
332 l 27
Cutting S piral Gears

, ,
291 E ff e ts of mple Lu ri ation at

b C
,
the Mil on H igh S peeds 1 3 2

PS eleit cchtingLeadtheNCormal
ler to
P it c h et c T
,
2 93 309 Generation of H eat y utting
bq c
,
2 92 ools 1 2 5
S piral Gears w ith S hafts at an A ngle
, , , .
,
utter
ST P
,
, 2 95 Kinds o f Lu ri ant 1 3 6 ,
tandard E uipment 1 3 8
D iameters Circumferen ces
of Less than
Sw v
,
3 05 he ump 1 3 6 ,
i eling Fixtures 23 9
N um b er of T eeth and S piral A ngle T
, ,
,
307
S piralA ngles Gears w ith S hafts at R ight TT ailsto c k D i v iding H ead

,
3 06
60
angents T a b le of
TT eeth
, ,
Computations for 3 00 andem Fixtures 2 18
of T eeth and S piral A ngle Wide S pa c ed in S piral Mills

, , ,
C omputing the Lead , 3 03 , , 3 86 t

o 400
N um be
ele c ting the C utter

g
S TT oolroom
, , , ,
go 147
S piral Gears w ith S hafts P arallel ooth M ark s

3 03 Millers 55
ooth P arts of Gears T a b le

TT rigonometri
, ,
95
c Fun c tions
, ,
Computations for 295 of , 2 56
of T eeth and S piral Angle TT rigonometri c T a b les

, ,
C omputing the Lead 2 99 3 85
rigonometr y E xpressed as P ropor

, ,
N u m ber to 3 86 400
S ele c ting the Cutter

, ,
z96
S piral V i s Cutting T ests on to

1 1 11
, 2 98
146 T rigonometry Shop
tion , 270
2 67
SS piral Mills S harpening

, , , ,
1 51
piral Mills D esign

to 1 72 176
S purAddendumGears S i z ing and Cutting Under c ut or R a k e V alue in C ut

, ,
of , 143
and D edendum
,
24 7 of ,
CChordal
enter D istan c e UU nder c utting Atta c hment
, , ,
249 ters to
147 151
P it c h ni v ersal i v iding H eads

, ,
249 25
CC learan
ir c ular P it c h UUninivversal Milling Atta c hment
, ,
248 D 56
ce and Full D epth ersal T oolroom Millers

, ,
and , 248 2 50 , 27
, 2 50 , 55
U N I VERSI T Y O F C AL I F O R N I A L IBRAR Y
BER K EL EY
e e o f r m wh ich b ooe
oo e e eo
R tu rn t o d sk rr w d .
T h is b k i s D UE o n th e l ast d a t sta mp d b l w .
94
'
DISCCIRC JUL0 6

ATreatiseonMillingandMillingMachines 10066323

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ATreatiseonMillingandMillingMachines 10066323

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

A T R E A TI S E O N

This illustration is made from a scale drawing and shows the

the manufacture of Milling Machines and Milling Cutter rinders .

V isitors are cordially welcome to inspect this plant at all

The past few years have seen an unusually rapid development

experiments in cutter design cutter and work cooling and other

branches of the art which have led to marked improvements not

lthough some of the data pertaining to these de velopments

compilation in complete form as found in this book will make

ble for efficient produ c tion from Milling Machines

p l e t e knowledge of the action of milling cutters , the effect that

unsatisfactory Milling Ma c hine performance and the basi c prin

application of the modern Milling Machine .

We have in this book given c onsiderable space to various phases

The mathematical chapters dealing with the computations

these subj ects in a simple detailed manner which will we believe

The arrangement of the various formulas and mathematical

based on material prepared by Mr D e L eeuw while Chief

ngineer of The Cincinnati Milling Machine Company .

Before entering into an analysis of the pro c ess of milling the ,

design of milling cutters j igs ﬁxtures etc and the mathemati cs

involved in the setting up of the machine for some c lasses of milling ,

it may be best to ﬁrst examine into the construction of the machines

C l a ss i ﬁ c a t i o n o f M a c h i n e s n this book we will conﬁne our

comprise the types of ma chines with which everyone is more or less

Universal M illing Ma chines s o called becaus e of the great range

of work that they will accommodate are arranged with a swiveling ,

be used in addition to a general line of milling for all sorts of indexing

toolroom S hould c ontain one or more of these Universal Ma chines .

P lain M illing Machines are S imilar to the Universals differing ,

Vertical Milling Machines are S imilar to the P lain Milling

toolr oom and for the ma chining of dies

Manufacturing M illers are particularly adapted for repetition

type of Miller best adapted for the economi c al production of a gi ven

We have gone far towards helping our customers in the solution

We are prepared to make complete time studies of all the milling

and fur nish the c omplete e quipment for doing it .

O ur wide experience in this work and the great variety of milling

t would hardly be appropriate to attempt to deal here with all

Whether it should be a C one D riven or a igh P ower S ingle P ul

ley type ma chine depends ou

The kind of work to be milled .

Method of transmission used whether by line shaft group , ,

drive or indi v idual motor dri ve .

Whether it S hould be P lain Universal or Verti c al dep ends

Whether it will be one of m any mach ines Or the only Milling

Machine in the department .

The amount of time it will be used for spiral cutting .

Wh ether it will be used for j obbing or manuf a cturing .

Whether for machining ﬂat sur faces , die sinking or gang

Whether it S hould be an utomatic depends on the quan

T he suggestions c ontained in the illus trations of machines in

The rapid development of the use of Milling Machines is constantly

pulley c onstant speed belt machines n their design the spindle .

power is not handi ca pped by the limitations of a driving cone and ,

countershaft is not necessary The main driving pulley is j o ur n al e d

on a bracket bolted to the column of the machine and is connected

drive gearing is arranged as Shown in Fig 1 ll the gears are . .

nickel steel heat treated and hardened making an extremely

pilot when engaging the large gears .

n order to reduce torsional strains and consequent vibrations to

S ingl e exception of the main gear “

nother feature which gives these machines the strength and